CHAP. I.

EVer since I came to years, that I could tell my own inclinations, I found the chiefest of my desires was to travel and to see strange Countries. And whilst, by reason of my youth, and my more absolute dependance and sub­jection to my Parents, I could not think of moving in person; yet, in my thoughts, I was often trans­ported from one Country to another: And by the help of Books, I did in some measure enjoy that satisfaction in imagination which I hoped one day to enjoy in reality; and that too as soon as might be; for the more I read Voyages, Journals, [Page 2] and other such Books, which gave me an account of strange Adventures, places, things, &c. which Men had met with in those more distant parts of the World; the more my desires encreased to see those things, they gave so pleasant a description of. Nor did the greatest of dangers, which those ac­counts represented to me, so much affright me from the like undertakings, as the joyful deliverances out of them, encouraged me to trust so much the more firmly in Divine Providence. And I proposed to my self so much the greater a degree of satisfaction, in as much as I might be induced so much more effe­ctually thereby to admire the great power and wis­dom of God; which, tho' visible enough every where, yet are more conspicuous in those wonder­ful works of Nature, which being less common and less familiar to us, are more apt to raise our admiration and love of him, who is the Creatour of them all.

As soon then as my years and affairs did fairly permit me, I prepared my self to be gone, and to spend the best part of my time in Travels.

In order therefore to put my resolution into practise, I set out from home in the year 1677. on the 28th of February, and took my shortest way to Vienna, the chief City of the Empire; from whence I went and took a view of most part of Hungary; after that I went into Bohemia, Moravia, Silesia, Saxony, and other Countries adjacent; thence I went into Swisserland, where I spent about six months at Zurich.

But my earnest desire to be a travelling something farther would not permit me to stay, and afford my self much ease at any of these neighbouring Coun­tries; but I went away for Baden; taking a Boat that carried me all up the River Limat, which is a little River that flows from the Zurich-Zee, and passes thro' the Country of Zurichgow, and below [Page 3] Baden runs into the River Aar. Above Waldshut I took a Boat on the Rhine, which carried me all down that River to Nimeguen, whence I went by Land to Utretcht, and from thence by Water to Am­sterdam, where I arrived about Christmas, A. D. 1679.

The vastness and beauty of that famous City, and my being a stranger there, made me not a little to stand amazed, and look about me; as well to ad­mire the rarities, that offer'd themselves to my view every where, as to consider whither I should go first, and where it was most likely I should meet with what I sought after, which was, a fair opportunity of undertaking some Voyage to the East-Indies.

While I stood in this doubtful manner considering what I should do next, a good Woman (in all appea­rance) observing me to be a stranger, and full of thoughts, askt me whom I wanted, or whither I would go? I told her that the first thing I was to see after, was a Lodging; for I was but just come, and the night was drawing on apace: But withal I told her, what sort of one I wanted, for I had not much money left: Upon which she very compas­sionately told me, I should be very welcome to her poor Apartment (as she call'd it) if I pleased. I did not stand long to consider of the matter, but took hold of the opportunity, and went straightway with her to her house: Being come in there, she bid me stay a while till her Husband came home. It was pretty late at night 'ere he came; being abroad at work, a Bricklayer by Trade; when he came, he shewed himself very courteous; and being all sate down, we fell a talking, and he asking me several questions, as it is natural to do to a stranger, and amongst others, to what intent I was come thither: I told him the truth of the matter, and the only thing I proposed to my self was, to find an occasion to go to the East-Indies; and begg'd his assistance and ad­vice the better to go about my design and to com­pass it.

[Page 4] The honest Man did not seem a little surprized at my design, and endeavoured by all means he could to dissuade me from it, by setting before me all the dangers I was to run, viz. of hardships, excesses of heat, hunger and thirst, and oftentimes of losing life it self. But the more lively he presented all these and other kind of dangers to me, the more eager it made me to go thro' 'em, and the more it establish­ed me in my resolutions, as if the dangers had been the only charm that drew me. Which my honest Landlord observing, he found it was in vain to at­tempt to turn me from my design; and upon that turn'd all his persuasions into a friendly promise, that he would assist me to the utmost of his power; and he accordingly recommended me to some of the Chief Men of the East-India Company, and did me very considerable service.

Having in this friendly manner broke the Ice for me, and prepared some of the Gentlemen to receive my applications, I went chearfully to wait upon them my self, and told them, that it was my desire to be employed by those honourable Members in any service suitable to my profession, which was Physick. They carefully examined the reasons that induced me to go the Voyage, and advised me to weigh well what I was about, before I fixt my re­solution; that I might not have cause to repent of my rashness when it was too late; and withal they told me that I must expect to engage my self for five years. I told them that I had not wanted lei­sure to consider of it, and that I was fully satisfied of the reality of my intention, and that there was no danger of my repenting, or of performing with any regret a thing I had resolved upon with so much deliberation. At which they were very well satisfied, yet could they not chuse but wonder to find me, who was but a Youth, so undaunted, notwithstanding the dangers, which they themselves represented to me. [Page 5] I was then appointed to appear before the Chief Physicians, and to undergo an examination; which I accordingly did, with twelve more with me, who were, like me, Candidates to serve in several parts, out of all which there were but six to be chosen, three being designed to each Ship, of which there were but two to go this Voyage.

Having been all examined, we retired to the Hall belonging to the Hospital, where we were order'd to wait for our answer. The expectation and hope which every one of us were in, of being one of those that were chosen; and on the other side, the fear of ill success, and of disappointment, made us all very uneasie. We were not put out of our suspence that day, but we were bid to come again and make our personal appearance before the Commissioners the next day following; which we did, and I was one of them that were chosen, and my Post was assigned me aboard the Ship called the (Ternate) which was the only one that went the Voyage in company with the Europa. I was not so very un­easie as the rest were during the time of our sus­pence, because I was prepared against all disap­pointments in relation to my particular Profession; for I was resolv'd to go upon any account rather than not to go at all; and a Man so resolved may easily find admittance into some Post or other. And indeed I utterly despaired of success as to my being chosen for a Physician, being I was so very young, and the number of the Candidates so very great; but beyond all expectation I was one of the six Persons that were called in to give in their Names, tho' indeed I was but the last of them: And being all order'd to stand by the Secretary, we were eve­ry one askt severally the second time whether we would promise faithfully to execute our Office, and strictly to observe all and every the Articles enjoyn­ed by the Company. There were enter'd with the [Page 6] other Physicians, and my self a Surgeon for each Ship, and to each of them a Mate, who serves as a Barber. So that we were six in number, who an­swering all in the affirmative, were sworn, and a Declaration was made to us of the several Offices we were all accepted into, and what Salary each of us was to expect; viz. Each Physician was to have 42 Gelders per month, and his Table, and a Shoar instead of it 6 Ricksdollers. The Surgeons 28 Gilders, and Diet, and on Shoar 3 Ricksdollers. The Barbers 14 Gilders a month, and their Diet, and on Shoar an allowance proportionable to the others instead of it. Then we all subscribed to their Articles, and the Cash-keeper paid us two months Salary before hand; and three Dutch Skil­lings every day while we stayed on Shoar; which was eighteen days.

After which, a review being first made of all the Ships Crew, we were all put on board three long flat Boats (which are for that purpose, and tho' small, yet so close Deckt, that in a rough Sea they will go quite under the waves and retain no water) they carried us from Amsterdam to Texel, where the two Ships, bound for the East-Indies, lay. Texel is a Sea Port lying on the open Sea, about 16 miles from Amsterdam; we had a very fresh gale of Wind (I call it so now, tho' then I reckon'd it a hard Storm) but it was not fair for us; so that we made something more than four days, before we could reach Texel: Whither being come, and ha­ving nothing to do but to Sail, I will in the mean while give my Reader an account of the prepara­tions that those Ships generally make for this great Voyage.

Before they go off from Holland, they take a ge­neral review of every person that belongs to the Ship, and each Man hath two months pay advan­ced him: But the full and regular pay begins only [Page 7] after they are passed the Tonnen, which is a place so called, about a League out at Sea; from that time the full pay is to continue whether the Fleet go forward, or is forced back again by contrary Winds, as they frequently are; and sometimes kept there a great while, insomuch that in the Winter they are laid up for several weeks, the Water being frozen all about them, so that they cannot stir; and when that happens, they do sometimes discharge their Ships Crew to lessen the charges which would otherwise be very great.

But when the Wind is fair, and the Fleet hath been two or three days under Sail, then there is distributed to each person, little and great, 5 Dutch Cheeses as a Present from the Company: Then must all and every Officer, Soldier and Mariner, make his appearance upon Deck, to be divided in­to their several Quarters, which are two: The one of them is called the Prince's Quarter, the other Count Maurice's.

Each person is assigned into one of these Quar­ters, in which he is always to be found on any oc­casion; and there he is to keep the Watch by turns. And that all may know to what part every Man belongs, the names of them all as they are divided is affixed to the Main Mast, on two distinct Tables; where also is set the order and time that every Man is to watch in. The Prince's Quarter hath the first turn, and is therefore called the first Watch. There is a Provost, whose Office it is to call them toge­ther, and to set the Watch; each Quarter watches four hours, and then is relieved by the other. Count Maurice's Quarter hath the second Watch, and is also called the Dog-watch. There is a Bell in the Ship, by which notice is given them of the time. It is rung at the setting of the Watch, and with a loud voice charge is given by the Provost to every one to take care not to be drunk upon pain of [Page 8] punishment. There are Hour-glasses put up conve­niently for him that stands Centinel, and the Helms­man to see; and as soon as the first Glass, which is but of half an hour, is out, they strike one stroke on the Bell; when the second is out, they give two, and so on, adding one for each half hour, un­til the Bell is rung again. Then another Officer comes and calls his Men together out of his Quar­ter, and releases the other.

There is likewise one Man or two always to stand on the Main Top-Mast head; but the Sol­diers that go to the East-Indies are always free from that service, tho' in their return from thence Home, that duty lies upon them equally with the Sea-men. Yet (if they can afford it) they may buy it off with a matter of 25 Ricksdollers, tho' the Voyage should be a year in compleating.

When there are a great many sick in the Ship, then those that are in health are again divided, that they may have the duty as equally shared between them as may be: And when a Storm threatens them so as to be forced to hand their Sails, all hands must be at work and help; and so likewise when the Ship is forc'd to clap upon a Wind, so that she must tack every two hours.

When any one neglects his turn, or is negligent in his duty, his punishment is to have a 100 or 200 (or sometimes more) blows on the breech with a Rope's end. Every one that doth not come every morning and night to the Prayers that are constantly made twice every day, loseth for that day his portion of Wine and Brandy: There is a Psalm also sung every night, and for that purpose a Psalm book is presented by the Company to every person in the Ship.

Smoaking of Tobacco is strictly forbidden at night below Decks, to prevent any mischief that might be caused by it, the Beds being all stuft with [Page 9] very good Cotton; but every where else it is al­lowed: And there is a great square Chest with a Pin in the middle, about which there is 10 or 12 fa­thom of Match, where any one may light his Pipe.

At the third Watch it's the business of one of them to take care to call up the Cook, who, as soon as Prayers are over, goes about the Dinner. Three Meals a day are allowed to all, and imme­diately after Prayers they ring the Bell, then every one comes for his Quantum of Brandy, which is about a quartern of our measure.

Every Saturday each Man receives five pound of Biscuit, about a quartern of Oil, and double that quantity of Vinegar, and half a pound of Butter, which a man must husband as he thinks best; it is to serve for the whole week. Three times a week are Flesh-days, viz. Tuesdays, Saturdays and Sun­days, on which days each Man hath three quarters of a pound of Beef or Pork, but most of it is so salt, having lain in the Salt it may be five or six years, that when it is drest it hardly weighs half a pound.

As for the Drink: At the setting out the Beer is in common as long as it lasts, which is not very long; when it is out, then every one is reduced to his measure of Water, which is about a large quart to a Man, and very well too; but when they come into the Indies, if they chance to be commanded away to any other parts, they are often forced to be satisfied with half that quantity, and then you may imagine what a value a Man sets upon his Liquor; and a Man may as well steal all ones mo­ney, as a drop of Water from any one.

There is a very great severity exercised over the Malefactors, of which we shall have occasion to speak more particularly hereafter. In the mean while to inform the Reader of the general Customs, they are as follow.

[Page 10] If any one wounds another with a Knife, or other Weapon, he is forced to hold up his hand against the Mast; and the Barber takes a Knife, and strikes it thro' his hand a little below the fingers; and sometimes as the fault is greater or less, thro' the middle of his hand, and there he leaves if sticking in the Mast; so that the Offender must pull his hand thro' if he designs to have it to himself again. He that strikes an Officer, or Master of the Ship, is without hopes of pardon to be thrown into the Sea fasten'd by a Rope, with which he is thrown in on one side of the Ship, and drawn up again on the other, and so three times together he is drawn round the Keel of the Ship, in the doing of which, if they should chance not to allow Rope enough to let him sink below the Keel, the Malefactor might have his brains knockt out. This Punishment is call'd Keel-halen, which may be call'd in English Keel-drawing. But the Provost hath this Priviledge more than the other, that if any one strikes him on Shoar, he forfeits his hand, if on Board, then he is certainly Keel-draw'd. Part of the Provost's Of­fice is diligently to observe the behaviour of the Soldiers, &c. and to see that they be exercised eve­ry day by some disciplined Soldiers that have been the Voyage already. Punishment also is inflicted by his orders on the Soldiers that are catch'd at Cards or Dice, which are strictly forbid; but Tables and Draughts are allowed, yet must they not play at them for Money.

All I shall add concerning the manner of going about this Voyage, is by way of directions to those who have a mind to undertake it. There are occa­sions enough for any Man among the Dutch, French, English and Portugueze, and every Man must take his choice which he will go with, according to the Nation he is of. But for the Dutch (if not for the others too) the best way is to go to Amsterdam, [Page 11] whence a Fleet is dispatched three times every year, which for management of their affairs at Sea yields to no Sea-men whatever, and therefore is most safe and convenient; they go off about June, September and December. But they will hardly re­ceive any Passenger, as such; and therefore for his ad­mittance, he must enter into their service, into some Post convenient for him, at least for the Voyage.

Indeed when one comes to Great Java, which is by Batavia, one may quit their service; but the Rules which their Articles bind a Man to observe, makes it a freedom not much different from the service, by reason of the great restraint the Company will lay upon a Man. For first, He must oblige himself not to stir out of the Country in less than ten years time: Nor must he Traffick in several goods, as he would desire; nor with such Countries as would please him best: For he is only permitted to deal with some small part of the Country, at the Islands of Molucco: And if a Man transgresses these Injun­ctions, he doth not only forfeit all he is worth, but also his honour and reputation.

Those that design then to give themselves up wholly to the service of the Dutch East-India Com­pany, must bind themselves to them for five years, besides the Voyage forwards and backwards; and take his chance for what part of the Country he is to live in: For it doth not lie in his power to chuse this or that part, as a Man might wish; some parts being so much more healthy than others are, and some much more advantageous than the rest; for that he must take his Lot as it falls. It seldom happens too, that any one is removed from the place into which he is ordered at the first: but it falls hardest of all upon those that are or­der'd to stay all the while at Sea on board; tho' indeed it is more profitable for him.

Any one that goes thither cannot have any pro­spect [Page 12] of advancing himself much, unless he under­stands Trade very well, and the Dutch Tongue; and hath Friends there, that are able and willing to help him. For when the Company take men into their service, they take 3 or 4 times as many Men as they have Employments for, and out of them they employ those only that have good recommen­dations. Some men indeed by their Industry and good Fortune, or rather I should say, good Provi­dence, have advanced themselves considerably from nothing, or very mean beginnings; but there are abundance who want neither parts, nor industry, who notwithstanding do not move a step towards Preferment all the while they stay there: Which hath made several of them to despair, and betake themselves to very ill courses. The condition of life wherein a Man meets with least disappoint­ments under them, is that of a Soldier; where he hath four Ricksdollers a month and his meat; tho' the latter is very mean and sparingly allowed, both in the Ships and in the Garrisons, insomuch that it is a very hard and uncomfortable employ for any one that hath any thing of Education.

The Soldiers receive their Pay as follows; one half of it is paid at two payments in one year; and that not in full, but one part in Cloths, which are reckon'd to him at a sufficient high rate, and the other half is paid him when he is come home again. He receives for his Subsistence (besides his pay) 40 pounds of Rice (instead of Ammunition­bread) per month, and ¾ of a Ricksdoller.

Besides, all the Countries where the Company hath any footing are very unhealthful, except Cor­mandel, Batavia, and some few others, and most very ill provided with necessaries, much less with conveniences, for life.

The Soldiers that remain on Ship-board, are yet worse used than those that are at Land, and by rea­son [Page 13] of the Foggs they are often in, are more sub­ject to sickness; and besides, both there and on Shore, there is more severe Justice exercised on Offenders than in Europe, and a small matter brings a Man to open and shameful punishment.

All this being well considered, I presume no Man can be very fond of going to the East-Indies on those terms, unless he is reduc'd to Poverty, or driven to it by some other necessitous occasion. But my advice would be to any one that hath a mind to see the Indies, and to try his Fortune with freedom, to go among the English, who with more honour and generosity give a Man the liberty to advance himself, or to pass his days there as he thinks most convenient, and to as much satis­faction as his circumstances will permit him, which are left to a Man to improve as he is best able, and may then comfortably enjoy the fruits of his Labours and Industry.

CHAP. II.

A Review of all our Ships Crew being made, which was three hundred and fifty persons, on the last of May 1680. We weighed An­chor, and set out with a good Wind, and the other Ship with us. And the next day about Sun-rising [Page] we passed between Dover and Calice, which are se­ven Leagues distant from each other. The same day five Fly-boats from the Maes joyned us, they were bound for Portugal, by which we were to pass.

The third and fourth day we still had France on the left of us, and kept England in sight on the right, and sailed successfully, save that one of the Master's Boys going to ease Nature at the Ships Stern (whereas the Bowgh is the usual place) dropt into the Sea; and tho' we hall'd out our long Boat immediately, yet the Ship sailing so very fast, they could not come at him; so the Boat was hoysted in again. The Wind continued good for us till we came within sight of the Island Sal­vagues, where we lost our Companion the Ship Europa, which had steered another course. In the mean time the common Articles which are to be observed at Sea, were read; to inform every one of his duty upon all accidents and occasions; and also what allowances every Man was to have.

We passed by the said Islands, tho' with a con­trary Wind, which obliged us to tack three or four times a day, till we at last at three weeks end got in sight of the Canary Islands, and with a side Wind at N. N. E. sailed thro' between the two Islands. There we saw that vast high Hill call'd Pico de Canaria, or the Peak of Teneriff, which is of such an incredible height, that none in the World is to compare to it. 'Tis admirable to see, how far it stretches it self above the Clouds. It was at that time so excessive hot about us in our Ship, that we were forced to have a sail stretched, and that continually kept wetting, to keep us a little cool; and defend us from the Sun's piercing Beams: And yet you might see through the Clouds, the top of that mountain covered with Snow.

Here our Master died, being upwards of four­score Years of Age, and having made three Voy­ages [Page 15] to the East-Indies: Upon which, a Council be­ing called, one Peter Peters was chosen in his Place. This old Gentleman was the first I saw buried after the Sea-fashion, which is in this man­ner: They take the dead Body and tye it on a Board, and fasten two Cannon-Balls to their Feet, and so throw them over-board, just as Morning-Pray­ers are over. In this manner they served the Ma­ster. But my Comrade had not all this pother made about him; for without a Salute or a Cannon-Ball he was barely ty'd to a Board, and thrown over; so that he floated a great while. This Solemnity gave occasion to a Dispute among some of our Seamen, concerning the dead Bodies that were thus thrown over-board; some affirming, That when they were loose, floating upon the Water, you might turn them how you would, and they would still turn again, with their Face or Head towards the East: Upon which, one of those who could not give Credit to that Opinion, went down (the Water being pretty still) and with a Pole turned the Corps about, which immediately turn'd again, by what Cause I know not, but it convinced him, That the other's Assertion had somewhat of Truth in it.

Such dead Bodies float till some Shark, or such like great Fish, devours them: But I do suppose they spit out the Plank again. These Sharks we as often call Men-Eaters in Dutch, because they are very greedy of Mens Flesh. They have a large Mouth, which they open very wide, and Teeth of great length, and exceeding sharp, which shut into one another; so that whatever they get be­tween them, they bite clear through. They are about 20 or 24 Foot in length; and they keep about the Ships in hopes of Prey; but are much more frequent in the Indies, than in the Way; where they do abundance of Mischief among the [Page 16] Seamen when they go to swim, as we afterwards found, when we came in the Road near Batavia; where one swimming at a distance from the Ship, a Shark came up to him, and drew him under Wa­ter, and we never could hear of him more, or so much as see any remnant of him; which made all the old Seamen wonder, who said, They never knew a Shark take any more of a Man, than a Leg, or, it may be, a good Part of the Thigh with it: But for this Man, we did not perceive so much as the Water bloody. Near Japara we had a Man, who had lost a Limb by this means, under our Hands to cure; and he lived seven Days after it; but at the end of that time he died, being mightily tortured with a vehement Cramp. Ano­ther time, at the Isle of Onrust, about eight Leagues from Batavia, our Ship being layed up to mend something of the side of it, the Carpenter going to do something to it, about a Knee deep under Water, had his Arm and Shoulder snap'd off. I took him and bound him up, but to no purpose; for in less than three Hours time, he was dead.

But now to return to my Purpose; which is, To give you an Account of our Voyage.

We had now been above eight Weeks at Sea, and had had very favourable Winds; in which time most of our Provisions of Brandy, Cheese and To­bacco, being consumed; and the Heat daily in­creasing; to which we must add, That many were not used to such sort of Sea-Diet (and that at last we could hardly get neither) viz. Bacon as salt as Brine, Gray-Pease half boyl'd, Grout and stinking Water: Our Ship became a meer Hospital, so many fell sick. The chief Distempers were, the Dropsie, the Bloody-Flux and Scurvey. Upon this the sick were divided from the rest, and had the Larboard side allotted them, which is the side on the left­hand. The Starboard was for the others. Thus we [Page 17] continued our Course, till we reached the Island call'd, The Island of St. Paul, which we left about 30 Miles off on the left-hand, and steered our Course for the Cape of Good Hope.

After about seven days sail from the said Island of St. Paul with very little Wind, the number of our sick increased daily, and the distempers that now reigned most, were the Scurvy, and the Small-Pox; which carried off almost all the oldest of our Men, but the younger sort quickly recover'd. Many were light-headed, and ailed nothing more; which was occasioned, as I presume, only from the excessive heat we suffer'd, as we passed under the Line, and came to the other side of the Globe. In this dismal condition we went on; our only hope being that we should not be long ere we should reach the Cape Bonne Esperance, or the Cape of Good Hope.

But our hopes were strangely frustrated: for we quite lost our course: For the Snow fell so migh­ty thick (as it is usual about Africa) that our Men could not see one another the length of the Ship. Then our Master gave Orders that one should go up the Main Top-Mast head, and keep strict watch; because we were continually in expectation of com­ing to Land. Early the next morning I got me above Deck, and went to take my allowance of Brandy at the usual place: After which my Com­rade, and I, who had been old acquaintance before we went to Sea, and between whom an inviolable friendship was contracted, we agreed to go and smoak our Pipes, and fell into a chearful confe­rence about our approaching Joy of setting our feet on dry ground.

While we were thus talking, we heard of a sud­den cry of Land, Land, which mightily increased our Joy; little knowing after what manner we were drawing nigh to the Shore. But we quickly [Page 18] saw our mistake, when the Master upon this out-cry, comes out, and with death in his looks crys our, Oh my poor Ship! we are all undone! At which we stood in amaze, not knowing what to say, or to take in hand to help our selves.

All this while the Ship was running violently to shore, the Wind being very high, and having no time to hand our Sails, we were forced to cut the Gears, upon which the Wind carried off our Sails over-board, with such a violent noise, that one would have thought Heaven and Earth were com­ing together. While we were all running hither and thither, in a miserable confusion, the Ship be­gun to crack; which made us all cry out with a loud voice, to Almighty God, to receive our poor Souls. It is easie to imagine what a dismal condi­tion we were in, with the noise the Ship made, and the crying and sighing that so many of us made; for we were still 343 persons on Board, and the Ship kept still cracking more and more, till at last the After-part broke, and the Sea beating in violent­ly, sunk our Stern in an instant.

None now expected to escape, and we saw no­thing but death round about us, by reason of the depth of the Sea on one side, and on the other the Shore so high, that it was inaccessible. Yet every body was willing to try what they could do; and to prolong their lives as long as they possibly could. We resolved therefore to leap into the Sea; and, if possible, to make to Shore, which was near enough to us, if haply we might reach it: But we fore­saw it almost impossible to come to it, by reason of its steepness, and the violent beating of the Waves.

Thus recommending my self to Almighty God, and having implored his pardon and assistance, I committed my self to the Sea, and strove with the utmost of my power to get to the Rocks. I toucht them twice or thrice, but the Waves carried [Page 19] me off again; by this time some of our Com­pany were got out safe, and they could not help us any otherwise, than by calling to us, and advi­sing us what was best to do; which was no small help to those that swom: for the directions they gave from the Shore, was a great guide to those poor people who were still in the Sea, and whom fear made so insensible, and so hasty, that they could not of themselves think to take the advan­tages they might have done, had they been less terrified.

After I had been carried off again from the Rock, so far, that I had little or no hopes of ever reco­vering it again, it pleased God that I was thrown on again, and I luckily struck my hand into a claiy part of it, and thus got safe to shore.

Seven more got out after me, and 35 before, so that 43 of us only escaped; viz. the Master, the Steers-man, two Surgeons besides me, three Car­penters, the Cook's men, the Swabber, the Gunner, 22 Sea-men, and eight Soldiers.

The rest, 300 in number, miserably lost their lives.

Here we all fell on our knees, and returned our hearty praise to the merciful God who had so boun­tifully deliver'd us from so great a danger; after which we went to look a little about us; but none of us knew where we were; which added much to our sorrow; besides that three of our men were al­most dead with the cold caused by the Sea-water.

The Ship sunk down-right, so that we could not see the least part of her, nor had we saved the least thing about us. Her Cargo was worth above 328000 Ricksdollers in ready Cash, and many thousand Gil­ders in goods besides, which were all lost.

Finding out at last that it was the false Cape of Good Hope we were got upon, and that we were at 40 Miles distance from the right one, where the Duth Garrison lay; we were forced to go further [Page 20] into the Country, which was the more tedious, by reason of the sick men we had with us. We knew that the Country had good store of admirable fruits, which we wished to come at; and at last we got some excellent good Water-Melons, which served us for Meat and Drink.

In this poor condition we saw some Hottentots at a distance, whom we could not come to speak to; for they run away from us. But it was to fetch some of them that could speak Dutch; and when we had made our case known to them, they imme­diately went and acquainted the Governour with it, who streight sent another parcel of these Hotten­tots (who are the wild Inhabitants of that Country) together with several Files of Soldiers to fetch us. They took up our sick men, and carried them on their shoulders upon Beds made of Reeds; and we were comfortably entertained with good Canary, good Rice, Bisket, and all sorts of excellent fruits; all which were extreamly welcome to us.

When we came to the Cape, our Master and the Streers-man went immediately before the Gover­nour, to clear themselves from whatever might be laid to their charge, for the loss of the Ship, and of so many mens lives; and there alledg'd, that it could not be imputed to their negligence, or want of due care; but that it was the good pleasure of Providence to afflict them in that manner. After which we were all lodged within the Castle, and furnish'd with the usual allowance, and there wait­ed for the Europa's coming; which was no less than three weeks: So that we gave that over for lost too, fearing it had undergone like fate with ours. What observations I made in this Country, du­ring that time of our stay, I will now give you an account of.

In the year 1650 a Fort was built by the Dutch in this Cape, and ever since all the shipping that comes [Page 21] thither, whether French, English, or any other Nation, must pay Tribute at their first Landing. This Land, for its situation and fruitfulness, is very commodious for all that go from any part of Europe to the East-Indies, for refreshing of themselves, and recruiting of Provisions, and taking in of fresh Water, which comes out of the Rocks and Mountains of the Coun­try. Within the Land, it is richly adorn'd with abundance of Fruit-trees; but near the Shore, there are few, or none, by reason of the terrible Winds and Hurricanes, that beat upon it in a fearful man­ner, which come generally down from the Moun­tain called by the Dutch Tafel-bergh: And by rea­son of these stormy Winds, this Cape goes frequent­ly with us by the name of the Storm Cape.

The Dutch, that are there in Garrison, have planted good Orchards and Gardens, which afford all sorts of Sallads, Cabages, Turnips, Cowcum­bers, and all sorts of Kitchen Herbs: All which are great refreshments to those that come from Sea. And likewise the free Inhabitants, of which there were already some hundreds when I was there, have Land which produces good Corn, Wheat, and Oats, &c. and Vineyards: So that one finds there plenty of good Beer, Wine, excellent Bread, and such sort of things as well as in Europe.

I dieted at one of these Free-men's houses, and I had a very good Dinner of Meat, rost and boil'd, and Fish, with excellent Sallad, and Butter, and Cheese, and delicate Beer, all for one Skelling, (which is but six pence English) but Wine I was forced to pay for, after the rate of half a Ricks-doller the quart.

Besides the great store of Fruits which are com­mon in Europe. There is great plenty of admirable Lemon and Orange Trees, which afford a very beau­tiful prospect.

The Haven is called Tafel-Baey, which is to say, [Page 22] Table-Bay, so called from a vast Mountain just by the Shore which is called Tafel-bergh, in English Table-bill, from its figure, which is seemingly square and flat at top: It is seen a vast way off at Sea; and it lies about five Miles from the utmost point of the Cape; between which, lieth the Hill Lewen­bergh, or Lion's-bill, so call'd, by reason of its re­sembling a Lion in shape; the head comes quite up to the Table-hill, and the tail comes down into the Sea.

I had a great desire to go up to the top of that Hill e're I went from the Cape: So having got some others who desired it too, we got leave, and set out the next morning early. It is about a Mile distance from the Castle; we went up it a good pace for a matter of four hours, and yet we were not near to the top: We were pretty well tired, and more afraid of being too long about it, and of being belated; for in the evening it is extraordinary dangerous be­ing there, by reason of the wild Beasts that then come abroad; so we e'en resolved to go back again to get in by day-light: For we thought if we had fallen under their clutches, we should not have been much the better for our experience: And be­sides, a Cloud came over us which wetted us to the Skin, whereupon we returned back streight, and came into the Castle about half an hour before night; so that we could not compass our desire, nor could ever yet hear of any one that had been up to the top of it.

Provision is here so plenty, that the Dutch have it mighty cheap, for a little Copper-wire, for Brace­lets, for Tobacco, and for any such trifle; so that a large Beast doth not stand a man in more than a conple of Shillings.

There are a great many Lions and wild Boars. In the Governours Hall are two Lions Skins. The one was of a Lion, that one of the Hottentots shot with his Arrow: The other was kill'd by a Boar. This last [Page 23] Creature, I mean the Boar, hath on its back a sharp sort of Prickle; near a spang long, and so hard, that they serve many Trades-men for Bodkins. And the Lion falling furiously upon this Boar, the Boar struck him with his prickly Bristles into the belly, and made him bleed to death, tho' the Boar perish­ed likewise in the fight; and they were found dead by one another, and both their Skins were hung up for a memorandum.

Besides these, there are many Elephants in that Country, and a sort of Beast they call Bavians, the same we call Baboons; which very much resemble aged Men. Some of our Men had orders once to go into the Wood to cut down part of it. Amongst them was one Comical fellow, who had beaten one to death in a quarrel at Tirol; and being forc'd to fly, had listed himself a Soldier in the East-India Company, and so made his escape. He staid a little after the rest to ease Nature; and laid his Satchel down at some distance from him; we saw one of those Baboons coming towards him, which made us stand still to see what he would do; and laying hold on his Satchel, away he went with it, and robb'd the fellow of all his provision of Bread, and Cheese, and Tobacco; which made very good sport for the rest. Ostridges are here also very common; the Eggs whereof are very good to eat. And among many other sorts of Birds, which they have, that are uncommon with us, there are a sort called Sea-Ra­vens; but of these there hath been account enough given by several Writers.

In the Sea, all round this place, one may see abundance of great Fish called North-Capers, but none of them are catched about the Cape; they have a snout like that of an Hog, thro' which they throw up Water as high as an house, and in such a quan­tity, as to fill almost a small Vessel, and it comes down like a violent shower of Rain: They are al­ways [Page 24] to be seen about the Cape, but they do no manner of harm.

There is a prodigious quantity of other sorts of Fish, both in the Sea, and in the Rivers too. We went one night with a Net to have some sport, and at two pulls we had so many, we could not carry the tenth part of 'em. The Fish we caught were made very much like our Carps; and here are also abun­dance of Tortoises.

The natural Inhabitants of this place, are called Hottentots, meer Heathens; of no extraordinary size; for the most part very lean, and meagre; their Lan­guage very unpleasant, rattling like Turkies when they speak. They go stark naked, only having a Sheeps Skin about them, the Tail whereof comes before their Privities.

When a Ship is new come in, assoon as the Boat lands any of the Men, they get in as it comes back, to beg Bisket of the Sea-men, which they love ex­ceedingly; when they ask for it, they cry Broqua, which signifies Bread.

It is their custom to cut out one of their Testicles when they are young. Their chief Ornaments (if such may be so called) is on their Legs; they take an Ox, or Sheep's guts, and thrusting out the excrements a little, just to let them lye close and flat; and while they are moist, they wrap them about their Legs, and there let them stick. These very guts is part of their food too; for just in this same pickle, they broil them a little over the fire, and eat them. So that it may properly be said, that they are meat and cloth to 'em: But to see them use-it either way, might very probably give any man besides them, a vomit. They use to besmear their body with all manner of dirt and nastiness, which makes them stink worse than a Goat.

Upon their heads they stick all sorts of little Sea-shells, and small Copper Rings, that come from [Page 25] Neurenbergh, which the Sea-men bring with them, to give them: And for one of them they will shew you some of their Tricks; among which one is, to throw a Dart or long Stick, with which they'll hit within the compass of a farthing a mighty distance off.

As for their Religion, little can be said of it, their Language, it not being understood by any, that ever I heard of. They use commonly to get together near to the Sea-shore in the morning by Sun-rising, and there they get in a Ring, holding each other fast by their hands, and dance about upon the Sand, looking up towards Heaven, saying something in their Lan­guage; and then write some strange unintelligible characters and figures in the Sand, and so depart; all which undoubtedly is intended in honour to some Deity. I have asked some of them that could speak a little broken Dutch, what thoughts they had of a God, and whom they believed in; they answered, that they thought that there was one above, that had made the Hills, and that Sea which we saw, and all that was in them; and that Homage was due to him; but I could not learn any thing further.

They are very good Footmen, and run very swift­ly, which make the Dutch keep always a Troop of Horse there, to catch them in case of any Insurre­ction: For they dare not trust them in the least. In mischief they are cunning enough, tho' wonderfully stupid in any thing else. If they are not hungry, they'll not work, tho' you would beat them to death; but when their belly incites them to it, they'll work like Horses. It is not safe to break ones word with them; and if one should not give them what was promised, when their work is done, a man would go in danger of his life.

Their Habitations are most on green Meadows, and grounds that bear sweet Herbs for Pasture for their Cattle. Their Houses are made of Sea-Reeds joyn'd together, and fastned at top; just like our [Page 26] Hop-poles, when they are laid up for the Winter; and when their Cattle hath eaten up the Pasture all about them, then they remove their Houses, to some fresh place, and settle there again for some time.

As to what belongs to those we call Free-men, of which I made some mention before, they are such of our Men, as have served the Company in the station of a Soldier, or any other way during the space of ten or twelve years, and then desired to settle there, to trade or plant, which they may then do, paying a certain sum of Money, and all Imposts and Customs to the Company. These have dwel­ling-houses built after a manner like as in Holland, but not so high nor so fine.

The chief Commodities which the Company trades in, to quit the Costs of their Garrison there, is Sea-Dogs, which are catched here in vast quan­tities. They boil the fat out of them, and the Skins are hung up to dry, which they send afterwards to Holland.

When any Ship comes there, an Order is read to all the People that are on Board, forbidding them all to buy any thing of the Hottentots, except Ostridges Eggs, and other like trifles. All Commo­dities of any use or value, as Rhinoceros Horns, Ele­phants Teeth, and Sea-Dog Skins, are wholly in­grossed by the Company.

Justice here is very severe, in respect to any of these Heathens especially; one instance whereof I was an eye-witness of, while I was there; Three of them having ravish'd a Christian Maid-servant, were hung up by the heels on a Gibbet, and so ended their lives, after they had hang'd there about thir­teen or fourteen hours.

There are four Seasons of the year here, tho' in a quite different time from ours: For our Summer is their Winter; and in September, which was the time I was there, it was their Spring-season.

[Page 27] Their Winters are cold, and always foggy and misty, but there is never any Frost or Snow. Thus far will suffice to inform the Reader of the nature and customs of the Cape de Bona Speranza. I pro­ceed now with the continuation of our Voyage.

CHAP. III.

AFter we had spent a pretty while here, and were very well recovered from our late Af­fliction, we prepared our selves to be gone in the Europa, which by this time was come, and ready to sail off again for Batavia; and with the first fair Wind we set Sail, and in the name of God we ran out of Tasel-Bay, leaving only one English Fly-Boat behind us at the Cape, which was come thither, since we.

All that day, and the next, the same fair Gale continued, which blew us along so briskly, that on the next day we were got out of sight of Afri­ca, and came into the Main. We had this brisk and fair Gale for eight days together, which car­ried us merrily along beyond the Island called [Page 28] St. Maurice, about which place men seldom fail of a Storm and bad Weather; so that it was no small joy to us, to have so fairly escaped it: But alas! our joy was soon palled; and our security proved very deceitful, while we foolishly took the measures of our safety, more from the Climes and Latitudes we were in, than from His Provi­dence, to whom the Winds, and Seas are every where subject; for when we least thought on't, the Sky darkned all of a sudden, and such a Hur­rican rose upon us, as made us all tremble. No sooner had it given us the first toss, but our Ship out-did almost the noise of it, with the dreadful cracks it gave, insomuch that we expected nothing but to sink in the instant. All the while the Clouds grew darker and darker, and the Wind increased to that degree, that we could not hear one another speak. The Sea gaped so hideously, that it could not be thought we should ever escape being swal­lowed up; our Ship sometimes mounted on the top of a Wave, plunged down with such a terrible force, as it had been down a Precipice, that we expected every moment to be overwhelmed with it. And no sooner had we escaped one Gulph, but we were raised up again to fall into another. All this while, what with the Sea dashing in upon us, and what with the great Gaps that were in the Ship, we were so full of Water, that we were all forced to pump like Slaves, for three days toge­ther; all which yet was little enough. I for my part, who little thought to have been in any such employment, yet was forced to fall to, and stick to it for four hours together, which would have been intolerable to me at any other time: But on such occasions a Man doth not much stand up­on Niceties: And I do not remember that I was so much as tired with it, for the hopes we had that God would still cast an Eye of pity upon us, [Page 29] and relieve us out of our misery, was now all the comfort we had left. But the Weather still conti­nued, or, rather indeed, grew worse, so that mounting our Ship up an end, one of our Carpen­ters was toss'd out of his Cabin, and had tumbled directly into the Sea, had not one of the Sea-men luckily caught hold of him. I tryed several places to get a little rest in, and, amongst others, I got in by some Sheep that we had brought from the Cape with us, which I found almost dead, never a one of them being able to stand on its Leggs. Not finding my self safe there, without holding fast by the Boards, which was very tiresome work, I went to the Gunner's Room, where the Surgeons Chests always lye, to try to get into a Hammock: But all the Chests there were turned topsie turvy, and in such a confusion, that I could not get to the place I designed for 'em; so I sate me down: But I had not been there three minutes, but I heard a low broken voice just breathing out the Name of God; at which, being mightily surprised, I looked and found our Provost, an old Man, lying under those Chests that were jumbled together, and crusht to pieces with the vast weight of 'em. I ran up to acquaint our Master, who in the hurry took little notice of it, only order'd some of the Men to throw him over-board, which was immediately done, without any formalities, or so much as a Plank; for we had no time to tye him to one, as it is usual; but over they threw him, cloaths and all on.

It was now the fourth night that we had been in this condition; and that we gave our selves for gone every moment of that time: So we were all called to Prayers, and every one got out upon Deck with much ado, and held fast, some by one thing, some by another, to hear our Minister, who very earnestly sent up most devout Prayers to [Page 30] Heaven, that God would in his mercy deliver us; or, if it were his good pleasure, to receive our poor Souls unto himself.

To those who are altogether strangers to the Sea, the Affliction we were in is altogether uncon­ceivable; and for my own part, tho' I have been oftentimes in great dangers by Sea and by Land, and upon many occasions have, with Courage enough, stood before the Enemy; yet did none of these dangers ever terrifie me comparably to this, where death doth not only seem sure and inevitable, but comes attended with all the Hor­rour imaginable, and drest in its most hideous and terrifying shapes.

But by how much the greater our danger was, so much the more admirable was the power and goodness of God towards us: For on the fourth day in the morning the Winds fell, the Air be­came serene, and the Sea calm, which restored us all, as it were, to life again. We then, as in du­ty bound, first fell to praising of God, whence our help came; and with Hymns and Psalms to rejoyce in him for his goodness, and our miracu­lous deliverance.

After which we went to set things to right about us, and to mend our tattered Ships. To this purpose we put all the heavy Cannon on one side of the Ship, to raise up the other, that the Car­penters might get at it to work; which they went about immediately: But the Calm did not last long enough for them to do half what we wanted. We had a brisk Gale, which was very fair for us, it's true; but having so many Leaks unstopt, we were forced to keep our Pumps going continually. This Wind held us six days, during which we pas­sed the Latitude of St. Maurice, and got in sight of St. Paul de Amsterdam; which we left about six­teen [Page 31] Miles on the right off us, and steer'd right up­on Great Java, whereof Batavia is the chief Town. In all this time we had a great many of our Men sick, and seven of them died, and were cast over­board.

The Wind being so fair for us, the allowance was large, and there was no stint of any thing al­most: Yet we wish'd heartily to be ashore, and the more, for the sake of our Sick: But we want­ed more than a hundred Miles sail to the place we were to go to. But by God's assistance we reach'd it, beyond our expectation; for, by Sun-setting, a Sailor cryed out, Land; which caused a sudden joy amongst us all; and the Master straight presented him a Ducat, or two Ricksdollers, two Cheeses, and a Bottle of Canary, according to custom.

Upon this we fell to tricking up our selves, painting our Long-Boat and Shalloop, and making our Ship very fine: We fastned our Anchors, and made all preparations to go to Shore, which was not now above forty Miles from us. By the next morning we got within two hours sail of it; but we over-shot it by above thirty Miles on the West­ward of it; so that we were forced to tack about to the East; and after some days sail we came up to some small Islands that lye within five Miles of Great Java; there we cast Anchor immediately, hawl'd out our Boat, and went on Shore, to fetch some Coco's, which we divided among the rest on Ship-board. Three days after this, we came into the Road of Sunda, wherein a great many little Vessels came to us (which they call Prawen, which sail prodigious swiftly) and brought with them se­veral sorts of fruits, as Coco's, Pisang Figgs, which are a long kind of Figg, Eggs, and such like. Lastly, On the last day of November we arrived safely at Batavia, where we cast Anchor before the Castle, having lost thirteen of our Men, and [Page 32] about 20 sick still aboard. Here we return'd God thanks for our safe arrival; embraced each other heartily, and discharged our Cannon very briskly. After which the Master taking some company along with him, went immediately to Shore, to wait on the General, who was the Heer John Speelman, at that time Governour of all the East-Indies.

In the mean time the Fiscal came to our Ship, to take a view of all the Men, and to demand all their Letters: After which the Men were landed, and the Ship unladen: The sick were put into the Hospital, and those that were in health marched in good order into the Castle of Batavia; where being drawn up before the Generals Apartment, he came out to them, and kindly bad them welcome; and ordered the Major to divide them amongst the Militia; but first they had three days free­dom given them to rest and take their ease: Af­ter which they were obliged to gather together every day without fail on a place appointed for them to exercise, until they were well vers'd in it, and made thorow-pac'd Soldiers of, and fit to be sent on any Expedition to any part of the Indies.

For my part, I went to Shore several times, and diverted my self very well, until I received an Order from the Surgeon general to take my Post in a small Fort, about a Mile or somewhat less, from Batavia; where I found an Ensign, two Serjeants, two Gunners, to eight Pieces of Can­non, and sixty private Soldiers. I was mighty well pleased with my Station here; the Place be­ing very finely and advantageously situated, with the Sea on the one side, and a very pleasant Ri­ver on the other, which came down from Batavia, upon which there were continually a great num­ber of Prawen sailing to and fro with Chineses, [Page 33] going to a certain place, about half a Mile from thence, where their Mosque is, wherein they sa­crifice at several times in the year to their Idol, called by them Jasgin, and by the Dutch Josic; and there they perform all their Religious Cere­monies, which are very diverting to a stranger to see.

As for Batavia, the City and Castle are as well worth a description, as they are a Man's sight: And truly mine was ravisht with it; for I must confess, that I think them yet finer even than Amsterdam it self. It is five or six Miles in compass. The River Jacatra runs thro' most Streets of the Town, and almost encompasses it. Upon these Canals the Inhabitants have the con­veniency of going in Boats to their Gardens and Pleasure-houses: The sides of them is wall'd up with good square Stone, and all along each side of it, there goes a Row or two of fine Cedar, Coco, or Figg trees, where the Free-men use to walk at night under a most pleasant Shade.

The Castle stands toward the Sea. It hath four Bastions, two of them to the Sea, called the Ruby and the Pearl; the other two to the City, which go by the name of the Saphir and the Dia­mon.

It is in the whole exact square, and from top to bottom built up with excellent good square Stone. On each of these Bastions are sixteen half Culverins planted: Besides this, they are full of fine Trees, such as Lemons, and Mango's, which makes them look most sweetly. While I was there, there was a third Gate built to the Castle, which before had but two. One of the Gates looks toward the Sea, thro' which the Goods come in from the Ships into the Ware houses, and it's call'd the Water-Gate. The other goeth [Page 34] into the City, which therefore they call the City-Gate.

In the middle of the Castle is the Generals Apart­ment, and over against it are the Houses of two of the Council-men. The rest, (which are four more) live in the City.

The Government of the Indies lies upon these six Men. The General's Retinue is not very sump­tuous: He had but twelve Halbardiers, drest much after the manner of our Yeomen of the Guard, but in Red and Yellow. One of these is always to stand Centinel an hour before his Chamber. When he rid out, he was attended by a Troop of Cuirassiers, and a company of Foot-men, and six Halbardiers. But all this is nothing to his Re­venue, which exceeds that of several Princes of Europe.

There are in the Castle many other Inhabitants, some of the chief Merchants; some Assistants, and Book-keepers; also several Handycrafts men, as Gun-Smiths, Lock-Smiths, Joyners, and such like, that are to be employed in any Military bu­siness. The Soldiers have their standings under the Gates, and on the Bastions: Sometimes more, some­times less, as they have occasion to send them abroad, or call them home again. Every day about four in the afternoon, they must come to the Parade, and pass by the General's house three times; sometimes he comes out, and takes a view of them, to observe their carriage, and beha­viour, and to see whether their Arms are kept in good order.

When any one neglects the Parade, he must ex­pect to be severely punished; for the Military Discipline is most strictly kept up there. If any one should chance to sleep upon Centry; for the first time, his punishment is to be loaden with [Page 35] heavy Arms, for some days; the second time he is whipt; and the third time it is death, without re­mission.

The Castle is encompassed with very wide Grafts or Canals; over one of which there is a fine Stone-Bridge of one and twenty Arches, that goes into a large Field, which is called the Galg­veld, that is, the Gibbet-field; where Malefactors are executed. There is a Gibbet, a Wheel, and a Whipping-Post; all which are frequently made use of. Cross this Field is another smaller Bridge, (where a Centry always stands) which leads to the chief Street of the City, which is called the Heere-straet.

Within the City are Shops for all kind of Mer­chandize, and very good and reasonable Victual­ling-houses: The Inhabitants are of all Nations, as Amboineses, Malabarians, Mardigarians, &c. bur the Chineses, being the chief and greater part, I shall pass by the others, and give you some ac­count of them only.

They exceed all the others by far, in cunning and policy; and are very good Mechanicks; and there are of them of all Trades, excepting Clock­work, or Watch-work, and they dive into all man­ner of Commerce whatever.

They wear most commonly White or Blew. Their Coats are very large, and the Sleeves so long, and wide, that they fall over their hands. Their Breeches likewise of the same colour, are very wide, and come down to their feet. They wear a sort of broad Slippers, like Hungarian Shoes: But they are only made of Past-board; so that when they are to go thro' any wet or dirt, they take their Slippers in their hands; then wash their feet at the next Canal, and wipe 'em; so put their Slippers on again: But in bad Weather, if they are to go thro' a great deal of dht, they wear [Page 36] woodden Shoes, such as the Country People do in France.

They are very neat in their Hair, which they have trimm'd and comb'd every week by their Barbers; they do 'em up with a Bodkin, and stick a small Tortoise-shell Comb in it behind, and so put a Coif over it, made of Horse-Hair, like a Net; so that at the first, a stranger would take their Men for Women.

Their Hair they value at the higest rate, since it is the last thing they will stake at play. They are the greatest Gamesters that ever were known; insomuch that they'll play away their Wives and Children, when they have lost all their Wealth: And when their Houses and Family are lost, then goes the very Hair off of their heads: But if one loses that, he loses with it all his Credit and Re­putation, and is lookt upon as a Slave, and is forced all his life long to work and sell for other People. Their Beards are very extraordinary, both for their length, and thinness. I have seen them with only five or six Hairs on their chin, and those hang down to their feet.

Their Women are most of them Slaves, bought out of the Island Baly and Macassar; not very black, but of a deep tawny; short and very well sett. They may have as many of them as they are able to keep. When a Chinese dies, his Heir sells all his Wives away again; except that one that he loved best, who is by his Will made free. This makes them Gentlewomen, and their Heirs after them are likewise ennobled. Such as these are esteemed as the right Chineses; and they are but rare in the Country; for while I was there, there was not above twenty of them. They have none but Sons, almost; it is rare to see a Daughter in a Family. I was very curious to know whence that might proceed: But in vain did I imagine [Page 37] many things, to be the natural causes of it. But being intimate with one of them, the cruel and barbarous method they take was made plain to me, which is, that they destroy their Females; and to this purpose, as soon as their Big Bellies begin to be perceived, they keep within doors, so that none knows of their being delivered, unless they bring forth a Male. At the same time this discovery was made to me, I was entrusted with the life of the discoverer, and therefore I was made to promise all the secrecy imaginable. Eve­ry morning their custom is, to wash their Chil­dren in the River.

Their Weddings are kept openly. The Men and Women go in Procession, and the Relations among them carry all their Presents to the Young Couple, and all their Riches openly before them. Before the doors, where they are to have their Entertainment, is a fine Scaffold made up, where their Musick stands, which consists of several In­struments peculair to the Country; as the Gun­gumma, which is a kind of Drum, and a sort of Musick they make with little Bells, which is agree­able enough. All the way they go, as also the house they are to come into, are strowed with all sorts of Greens and Flowers: Or sometimes they go by Water in their Prawen, on the Ca­nals that run thro' the City, with their Hair down about their Ears, or hanging down in the Water. When they are come home, the first thing they do, is to sacrifice to their Idol; which is done after this manner. In a corner of the Room they have an Altar set out with abundance of pretty little Trinkets, upon which is an Image made of Clay, about a span long. The face of it is very broad, with a large pair of Eyes; it is black, and painted with some round streeks of Red; a vast large Nose, and a long white Beard: [Page 38] On the head stand two Horns painted, with all sorts of Colours. This Image they call Josgin; to this they bow, and make many salutations; clapping their hands altogether, begging it to keep them from all harms, and to take care that no evil may happen to them.

They own that there is a powerful God, that hath made the Heavens and the Earth: But they say, that he is of a good nature and disposition, and that there is no fear of harm from him: But that all their fear is from the Devil, whom they appease by their Offerings and Prayers under the shape of that Image: Therefore they are very careful to please him, and will not sail at night to light Candles made of red or yellow Wax, which they set before it: And there they bring Meat and Drink, and all sorts of Fruit, which is all taken away the next day, and then it is eaten by the People of the house, and other fresh Meat set in the room of it.

But to return to their Feasts; the Men and the Women eat always apart. They take up their Meat with an Instrument made of two pieces of Wood, which go cross one another, something like that which the Gold-beaters use with us to take up their Leaves of Gold or Silver, which they use very dextrously to take up their Meat with; This serves them instead of Forks, and they keep them very neat and clean. They sit on the ground cross-legg'd: And if at any time they do sit on a Chair or Stool, they still sit down with their Leggs cross-wise under them, and by that means they have them so pliant, that they can lay them on their Polls, with as great nimbleness and ease as we can our hands.

But now to make an end of the Description of the City of Batavia. That is likewise encompass'd [Page 39] with a strong Wall, above forty paces broad, and Earth thrown up against it.

The Bastions are like those of the Sluys, built with large cut Stone, and all square and well pro­vided with Guard-houses on all sides of it, where the Soldiers have their Quarters, and none of them dares to be absent one night from them, without especial leave, and that is but very seldom grant­ed. Besides this, there are Canals on each side the Wall all round. The Cannon is always ready to turn, as well upon the City it self, as upon an Enemy without, in case of any Insurrection or Di­sturbance amongst the Inhabitants, which are of all Nations. So that to be the better prepared, if such a thing should happen, every Street hath a Bastion that commands it, from whence they could immediately cut off any Party that should be made in any part of the Town against the Castle.

The same care hath been taken, and the like provision made in all places in the Indies, that are in possession of the Dutch, and they are always well provided with Europeans, Christians, in the Service of the Company; and there is of course a considerable number of such as are settled there, and are married, some to European, and some to Indian Women. And of what Nations soever they be, they are permitted to keep the same Religion, Manners and Customs, as they have in their own Country.

The Magistrate consists of persons that are in the Service of the Company, and of Burghers, which are Free-men; made such after they have spent that time in the Company's Service, as was agreed upon betwixt them. The President is one of the Council, but cannot direct in any thing of moment without the consent of the General.

[Page 40] Each of the other Nations have also a head and chief of their own: But when there is any thing in hand that concerns the Publick; or if they cannot agree among themselves, they are for­ced to appear before the Magistrate of the City, And in all things their Government is very well and prudently established.

The four chief Gates of the City are called by the names of the Utrecht, the Delft, the Rotterdam, and the New-Gate, so called, on the out-sides of which, are the Suburbs, which are large and spacious, and very fine, and inhabited most by Chineeses: A vast number of which have been forced by the Wars they had with the Tartars to retire, and seek a Refuge in the Indies, over which they have spread themselves: And espe­cially in all Maritine Towns, where they are fallen into Trades and Commerce with admirable indu­stry and success.

The River Jacatra is no small Ornament as well as Advantage to Batavia; besides which, it is beautified with abundance of very fine Orchards, Fruit-gardens, and Pleasure-houses, which are ve­ry neatly contrived and kept. There is but very little Rice all about it; tho' it is their staff of life. And, as in all the other parts of the Indies, the only thing that serves instead of Bread; but yet there is never any want of it, it being always brought in great quantities, and the City suffici­ently furnish'd with it from Bantam, Japara, &c.

The Rivers thereabouts are much pestered with Crocodiles. While I was there, as we used to go a walking in the Evenings, we observed one of them for several nights that used to run out of the hedge into the River, as soon as it spied or [Page 41] heard us coming towards him: Upon which a desire took us to try to catch him if we could; which we did in this manner.

We took a long Rope, to which we fastened a strong double Hook, full of beards: And instead of arming it with Wires, we did it with Pack­thread; which being loose about it, gets in be­tween its Teeth, and hinders him from snapping the Hook off: This done, we tyed a Dog to this, with the Hook under his belly: And setting him upon a Board, thrust him out into the River, and fasten'd the Cord to a Tree: Quickly after, the Dog fell a barking and howling, and the Croco­dil did not fail to come to him; and very gree­dily swallowed him in: Upon which the Hook struck into his Throat, and had him fast. We had so good success with this, that we afterwards caught a great many of them. The biggest we caught was twenty seven foot long; and when we opened it, we found two Steen-Bockiens, and the head of a black Boy in his belly. We were forced to knock him on the head with great Iron Bars, after we had fired several Muskets upon him to little purpose. When the Soldiers kill one of these Creatures, they get some Blacks to carry it for 'em to the General; who immediately gives them six Ducatoons, for their pains. The only advantage I sought for, was to have some of their Fat, it being very good for several operations in Physick and Surgery.

The Inhabitants use to catch them with Nets; which is very dangerous, as I my self have seen; at Bantam, on such an occasion, a Crocodil bit off both the Leggs of a Javan; yet do they con­tinue that way still, and go often to catch them in that manner.

[Page 42] Besides these Crocodils, there are abundance of other sorts of Wild Beasts in the said Island of Japatra.

The Fort where I was order'd to be at my first coming, was very near to the Forest, and just in the way to it, from Batavia; so that the Hunts­men coming by us, I often went out with them, and saw them catch most sorts of those Wild Creatures that the Country affords, It will not be amiss to give the Reader an account of some of 'em; and first of a sad accident that befell the Hunts-men one day.

We had two Hunts-men that were made free by the General, and had the liberty to go abroad for that purpose, to catch what they could. These being gone one day to get some game for the Ge­neral; which was commonly Wild Pigeons, and other sorts of Wild Fowl, and Wild Boars, and a sort of Creature they call Steen-Bockiens, which is made much like a Hare, and differs only in that it hath small Horns, and the Meat of 'em is far more delicate; while they were only prepared for the pursuit of things of this kind, and sat down to rest under a Tree, a Tyger fell in a most furious manner upon them. They were pretty much used to be followed by them; but they used to be in such readiness to receive them, that they were the death of them whenever they did but offer to come near them.

But being now surprised by this more than or­dinary fierce Creature, coming of a sudden upon them: It was as much as the one could do to lay hold of his Fowling-piece, while the other had nothing to defend himself with, but his lighted Match in his hand; which he shook about, but to no purpose: The other had no sooner got his Gun, but in a hurry he fires upon him; but not tak­ing good aim, did not do any execution, but what [Page 43] served to enrage him the more; him the Tyger throws down under him; and seizing the other by the hand, bit off three of his Fingers; notwith­standing which, he luckily seizing his Gun, fired it, and by good providence laid the Tyger flat on the ground. Upon this he bethought himself of what he might do for his best security, for the night coming upon him, the danger increased; be­sides that he was now alone, for his Companion was by this time expired, being miserably torn. He took up the Corps, lest it should become a prey to the rest of them; and climbing into a Tree, drew him up with him: There he remained in great fear and excessive pain caused by his wound. When he had been there a while, there came a couple of Wild Boars, which he could not see: But he heard them scratch and tear at the bottom of the Tree, which they did the more furiously, be­cause the blood of his dead Companion was spilt about the place; so he shot upon them at random, and hit one of them, so that he fell dead some few paces from thence.

The day being come, and the Coast clear, he gets down, and leaving his dead Companion upon the Tree, the Tyger and the Wild Boar on the ground, comes forthwith to our Fort to me, to have his hand drest: Which being done, he gave us the account of this Adventure. Our Ensign went to acquaint the Major General with it, upon which Orders were given immediately to a Serjeant, to go with six Soldiers, and six Negro Slaves, with a Bier to the place where this Slaughter was, and the wounded Hunts-man went with 'em, to shew them the place. There they found all according to the Information he had given. The Man was brought to Batavia, and decently buried in the Malaish Church-Yard; and he that was come off, had for a Reward twelve Gilders given him, [Page 44] and a settled Table for his life, besides his former Pay, and withal a Corporal's place.

On the other side of the Fort, is almost all Woods, which are cut down every other Year by the Soldiers. These Woods harbour vast numbers of Monkeys, which make there such a strange noise, that one would be amazed to hear it. We made it almost our daily diversion to go a Hunt­ing after them; and we used to catch such abun­dance of them, that a Man might have one of them for a Pipe of Tobacco. They are a very docile sort of Monkeys, and not in the least infe­riour to those that are brought out of Africa and America for playing of Tricks; but they come but seldom over hither, being very tender, and not able to bear the change of Climates, nor the hard­ship of so long a Voyage: For at my return I took a couple of them with me, but as soon as ever we came on this side the Tropick, where we begun to feel a change of Air, they were seized with the Bloody-Flux, fell lame, and died.

One way to catch them was, by taking of Coco-Nuts, which are very plentiful there; and making a small hole in 'em, just big enough for 'em to force their Paws into; we hung them up all about the Trees where they came. As soon as they espyed the hole, they wanting to get at the Kernel, would strive hard but they would get their Paws in: And when they go to take them out again, they have not the sense to squeeze their Claws together to slip their Paws out, as they had to get them in: Besides that, the surprize which the person causes, who watches them, makes them less able to rid themselves of their Manacles; and as they went to run down, they fall with the very weight of the Nut, which is it may be five or six pound weight. But this way there was no hopes of catching any more than one at [Page 45] one time; for when the others see one of their company thus caught by the Legg, they won't come near the Coco-Nuts all that day.

I went out once for a fancy after them with a Fowling-piece, but I found it impracticable; for after I had spied one of them, and got my Shoes and Stockings off, because the place was a kind of a Moorish ground; but he had his Eye upon me too, and led me such a dance, that I had al­most stuck in the Slough, for want of minding my way: And since that time, I never went after them again; for they are so shy, that it is almost always labour lost. And if one doth happen to shoot one of them, if he doth not kill him dead upon the spot, they'll run and stop up their wounds with grass, and so get sar enough from you, tho' they drop in the long run, and go and die in some hole where you cannot get at 'em.

My chief Recreation was to take a walk to the City, which was a most delicious walk indeed, all along shaded with fine large Coco-trees. Sometimes I took a Boat, and went to the Fort Jacatra; where lay a whole Company of Soldiers, of the number of which our Men was a sort of a Detatchment: It lies about two Miles more to the South, and is the chief Pass into the whole Country of Java, in the direct way to Japara and Kartiri. Near this Fort flows the famous River Jacatra (from which the Fort had its name) which thence running thro' Batavia, empties it self into the Sea about half a Mile below it. There are by the Fort three Powder-Mills upon that River, which I used to walk to frequently, being very well worth ones sight for their largeness and ingenious contrivance.

The outward parts of this Country, and that for a considerable way within too, are very well cultivated, and richly set out with abundance of [Page 46] fine noble Gardens, which produce all manner of fruits, for refreshment and for sustenance. There are of all sorts of Figg-Trees; some of which are the most delicious fruit that ever was tasted: So that with its lofty Cedars, which over-top the fruit-bearing Trees, and look so sweet and green, and what with their more useful Coco-Trees, and other fruit-trees, which are always verdant, and afford a cool retreat, and pleasant shade; besides that their fruits are all of them most delicious, I think truly, it may be called an Earthly Paradice, and that no Country in the World can out-do it for gratifying the Eye and taste.

But of all the fruits that the East-Indies pro­duce (now I am about 'em) I think it will not be amiss to give you a description of three of the chiefest of them.

That which deserves the first place amongst them, is the fruit which they call the Manges Tanges; of the bigness of a common Apple; the shell is of a dark brown colour, in which are con­tained four Kernels, of a flesh colour, sticking to each other, which melt like Butter upon the Tongue, and of so fine and refreshing a taste, that I never met with any fruit comparable to it, in any other part of the World. It is generally served up at the greatest Tables, as the most de­licious Dish that can be made; drest with Sugar, Spice and Sack, and put into fine China Dishes. It is also a most pleasant and infallible Remedy against the Bloody-Flux, when boiled in Water. The Tree that bears this, is about the bigness of a Mulberry-Tree, and very flow of propagation: For when you have planted it, you must never expect to see it bear; and if it doth chance to bear any fruit within the life of him that planted [Page 47] it, it comes to nothing; but withers away: But then there shoots out a little shoot, which you take and plant very carefully, and that becomes your Stock.

The next to this is the Coco-Nut. The Tree is all smooth and even from the bottom to the very top; where the Leaves spread themselves all in a fuff, and the Nutts under them, twenty or thirty on a Tree. The Country people have a pretty Art of Tapping these Trees, with long Bamboe Canes, that will hold two or three quarts, or more, which they very artfully stick into the Tree, and let them fill themselves with the Juice: When they are fill'd, they put it into Vessels to keep, or else they go away with it to Batavia, and sell it fresh there, as it comes from the Tree. This they call Suri, which is to be sold at the Suri-houses, and is a very pretty refreshing Liquor, and extream pleasant; especially when the Wea­ther is very hot. With this Liquor they make the best Vinegar, and their Arack or Brandy, which goes far beyond our best Rhenish Wine for strength, taste and colour: And mixing it with Water and Wine, with Sugar and Lemon-Juice, it makes an excellent sort of Limonade, which they call Mas­sack and Burabols, but sufficiently known in Eng­lish by the name of Punch.

The Leaves of this Tree serve the Inhabitants for a common covering for their Houses, and keep them as dry as our Tiles. The stalks of them they bind together, to make Brooms; and they use hardly any thing else throughout all India. The outward Coat of the Nutt is good to make Match, which burns better than that we use in Europe▪ The Sap serves for Oyl to burn. The Kernel be­ing prest, yields a Milk, of which they make a very pretty kind of Cheeses; and it is good for several other uses, as our Milk is. The Shell is [Page 48] good to make Cups, Spoons, &c. It would be too tedious to relate the many uses every part of this Tree is good for: Besides that, it hath in a great measure been done already by other hands.

The third fruit I was to mention, is the Bissang-Figgs, which is mighty common amongst them; and so cheap, that when a Ship comes out of Eu­rope, it is the first fruit that is brought to 'em, and you buy it for a trifle; notwithstanding it is ex­cellent; it is in shape pretty much like our Pine-Apples. The Tree is somewhat like our Elder-Tree; and bears all the year in abundance. The Leaves are so large, that one of them will shelter a Man from the Sun and Rain, being about two Cubits in length, and one or more in breadth: Which makes some people apt to believe they were the Leaves which Adam and Eve made their Aprons of, after the Fall. They are likewise made use of instead of Paper to pack up goods.

These I have only taken notice of, as being the most considerable fruits of the Indies, and must pass by several others, which might be worth a de­scription, both for their excellency and variety, that I may not be too tedious.

CHAP. IV.

HAving been now four months in this little Fort, an Order came to me to remove from this place, to take the care of the Men that lay sick in the City, and the Hospital, which was very welcome to me; not but that the Post I was in was profitable enough, and very genteel, and the place extraordinary plea­santly scituated: But it being a token of the respect the East-India Company had for me, and withal more advantageous, I accepted of the Invitation with much satisfaction.

About a Fortnight after there came a gene­ral Order for all that were in the Company's [Page 50] Service, to make their Rendezvous in the Exe­cution-field; so that you might see there all their Forces drawn up together; excepting those only, that were absolutely necessary to stand Centinels at the Gates and Redoubts. And in­deed a finer sight of that kind could no where be seen; for there were some thousands of Eu­ropeans, which were all very lusty, tall, proper, well-chosen Men; and almost as many of other different Nations; as Amboineeses, Malabars, Ma­layers, Mardikers and Balingers. These were all mixt into several Companies, which had their own respective Officers; and after they had all pass'd Muster, they took the Oath of Fidelity in the presence of the General, and the Council. Af­ter which the General made a very Eloquent Speech to 'em, in order to encourage them va­liantly to prepare themselves for the Action, which was then in hand; and to make his Speech more truly Rhetorical and perswading, he gave to every Man a month's pay gratis. Then one half of these Men were order'd to march to­ward Bantam, and to Dangerang, which is a Pass to it, which they found very well fortified. The other half march'd thro' the Castle to the Wa­ter-Gate, whence they were carried off in little Praw's, or small Boats, on Board the Men of War, that lay in the Road, about half a League from thence, and so they were immediately embarkt. And the Wind blowing then just full East, as fair as they could have wish'd, they straight weighed Anchor, and steered directly to the Royal City of Bantam. But

It will be proper to give you some account of that place, before I go any further, and to ac­quaint you with the causes and motives of this Undertaking.

[Page 51] First, Then you must know, that this large Kingdom of Bantam, being in it self of great strength, hath of late much improved it self, by the numbers of Foreigners that are come thither from all Nations; and among them considerable numbers too of English, Danes, Spaniards, Por­tugueses and Dutch, which hath made it a very troublesome and dangerous Neighbour to the Dutch East-India Company; insomuch that their Ships that came from Europe, or any other places thither, did not dare to come by the Road of Bantam; but were forced to take a vast com­pass of three or four hundred Miles; keeping to the Northward.

Moreover, the King of Bantam had made seve­ral Attempts upon Batavia, both by Sea and Land. Tho' he was always forced to retire with great loss, and without doing us any great damage. But tho' he could not accomplish his desire, and the Company could not fear a total overthrow; yet they were still apprehensive, that he being so much more powerful than they were, would prove very fatal to them in the end, and by little and little bring his designs to perfe­ction. Thus they were always very uneasie, by reason of their troublesome Neighbour: But not finding themselves able to declare open War against him, they endeavoured to gain him by Pre­sents, and a specious shew of Friendship. These means did not prove altogether unsuccessful, but they were never at good understanding with each other long together. For the King of Ban­tam, besides that he was very fickle and uncon­stant in his Nature, having so many Foreigners about him, who were no Friends to the Dutch [Page 52] Interest, he was easily perswaded by them, to break Friendship with the Dutch upon the least occasion. And this the English and Danes were the chief Instruments of, who made there a con­siderable Body, were rich, and enioyed great free­dom, and a most flourishing Trade; so that they with ease set the King upon us, in hopes of rooting the Dutch out of their holds.

The Dutch therefore were always forced to be upon their Guard; even while there was the greatest appearance of a settled Friendship; for they were sufficiently informed, that he was always contriving how he might at once fall foul on them, and drive them out of Batavia: Upon which, they on the other side, resolved to countermine his designs, and thought it the best Expedient to divert him from that Under­taking, by finding him some Employment with some other Neighbours; and accordingly made it their business to create an ill understanding be­twixt him and the King of Japara, hoping that the silent Fire might in time break out in­to an open Flame. This they effected at length; but it proved little or no advantage to them; for they lay so far asunder, that it never came but to a few little Skirmishes; which did not damage him much, nor profit them: So that they fell very short of what they had pro­mised themselves; for they were fully perswa­ded that the Emperour of Japara would have soon been induced to pursue the King of Ban­tam, with the utmost vigour; especially, when there was so great a motive to spur him on, as the rejoyning of that Kingdom to his Empire, from which it had been divided. The Island of Great Java, of which I have already made [Page 53] mention, did likewise belong to him once, and altogether made but one Empire, under the Do­minion of the Great Mataran, but now it is di­vided into three Kingdoms, to wit, Japard, Ban­tam and Jacatra, or Kartiri; of which (i. e. Ja­catra) the present Batavia is a part, and did here­tofore belong to the King of Jacatra; from whom the Portugueezes took it. After that, the Spa­niards got it from them: And lastly the Dutch from the Spaniards.

Now the Dutch, having all this while made se­veral Attempts upon the King of Jacatra, which had proved very advantageous to them; they at length subdued him: Having first made the Em­perour of Japara unable to resist them, or to stand up in the defence of his Neighbour; over whom they carried a total Victory a little before I came to Batavia. And having all this while received fresh supplies yearly from Holland, which, together with Germany, enjoyed a pro­found Peace, and therefore could, and did con­stantly furnish them with large Recruits of choice good Soldiers: The Duth East-India Company thought they might be able to cope with Ban­tam, and accordingly made preparations against it.

Now while these things were in agitation, and they big with the design and hopes of infallible success, the fairest opportunity, that could be wish'd for, offered it self to them unexpected, and therefore so much the more welcome, which was a sudden falling out between the old, and the two young Kings of Bantam. The occasion whereof was this: The old King being weary with the Burden of the Government, and desirous [Page 54] to spend his remaining days in ease and tran­quility, made over his Kingdom to his younger Son; the eldest having dedicated himself to a spiritual life, was a Bangerang Babay, something like an Archbishop with us; and having thus in­vested his younger Son with the Regal Power, he retired to an Old Castle called Dortjasse, the old place of his residence, about four Miles from Bantam.

The young King having Reigned some years, his People began to grow weary of him, specially the Nobles, the Bourgerang and Kirria; and they made their Complaints to the old King, that he oppressed his Subjects; and that he over­burden'd them with his Recreations, and his con­stant Hunting; and by his requiring so much At­tendance and Service to be done him; so that they were no longer able to bear the Yoke. He did not Govern as other Heathen Kings use for the most part to do, but after the Model he had taken from the European Countries; some of which he had been in, as Constantinople, and would have gone to France, England, Spain and Portugal, if his Law had permitted him; and as far as that had given him leave he had Travelled, viz. in Muscovy, Schiras, Ispahan, Japan, Siam; from which several places he had taken those Methods of Government, which he thought most convenient to introduce into his own Dominions. But his Subjects being dissatis­fied with these Innovations, conspired at last together, and Deposed him; and set his Brother the Bangarang Babay in his stead.

Upon this the Old King came with a consi­derable Retinue, and his Main Guard, before the [Page 55] Castle; which is in the middle of Bantam. The young King, having notice of this, commanded the Gates to be shut against him, and sent to know what he wanted. The old King sent him an Answer, which did not please him: Upon which, without more ado, he gives Orders to Fire the Great Guns from the Castle upon the City, and particularly, that some of them should play upon his Fathers Quarters; against which sixteen Pieces of Demi-Cannon were planted, which were fired briskly upon him by his po­sitive Orders, and some of them too by his own hand.

Being thus satisfied, that his Fathers Intentions were to Depose him, he wholly forgot all Du­ty, and sent him word by one of his Concu­bines, that he did not reckon himself now bound to him in any Bond of Duty; and that he would pay him no other Homage, but Powder and Ball, which he would not spare, for he had enough of it, and that should be at his ser­vice. Besides the Message that had made him so desperate, he relied much upon the strength of the Castle, which was very well fortified with very good Walls, lined with Earth, like those of Batavia, and very strong Bastions upon them, besides very large Canals round them, with Draw-Bridges. Neither did he want Provisions or Ammunitions; and the Bastions were provided with very good heavy Cannon. But the num­ber of his Men was not above three hundred; yet with them he had resolved to stand it out to the last. So that his Garrison was not so con­siderable as his Court, which, as it chiefly con­sists of Women, according to the general Cu­stom of Heathen Princes; so he had of them [Page 56] no less than one thousand two hundred that were his Concubines.

With this continual Firing, the City was mi­serably shatter'd, and lookt like a Wilderness; for every Man had got away that could, and all the English and Danes, together with the Nobi­lity, and the most considerable Inhabitants, went over to the old King. And having formed a con­siderable Body, they went and besieged the Castle; raised several Batteries, and planted their best Cannon upon them; and then fired briskly in their turn upon the Castle. Notwithstanding all these preparations, the young King remained undaunt­ed, and only applied himself to get supplies and support abroad; and by Advice of two Dutch­men, who were of his Party, and who had for­merly run away from Batavia, to shelter them­selves from Justice, he resolves to send to the Company of Batavia, for Assistance. One of these Dutch-men was appointed for the Negotiation; and immediately was let down from the Wall of the Castle; and having pass'd the Canals in a little Boat, that used to lye there, he came to the Enemies Army, thro' which he was unavoidably to pass; but he being very ready in the Javan and Malleish Languages, having been fifteen years in those Countries, and having been Circumcised at his Abjuration of the Christian Religion, he easily pass'd thro' all difficulties, and came to the General at Batavia; and by word of mouth, without any further Credentials, delivered his Message to him in the young King's name.

This was an opportunity which the Dutch had long wish'd for; so that the Messenger needed no great Rhetorick or Art to induce them to take [Page 57] it by the forelock. But immediately Orders were dispatched; and the Forces had their Ren­dezvous appointed. I my self had Orders to attend the Major General St. Martini's own per­son; and was in the whole Expedition, so that I may justly speak of the matter, and be the more particular in the relation of it.

The Major General above mentioned, com­manded the whole Fleet; and one Captain Har­zing of Cassel had the whole command of the Land-Forces. Both set out at one time, as I said before; the one march'd out straight upon Dangerang. The Fleet went directly to Bantam. Captain Hartzing was forced first to Attack Dangerang; by which means he reckon'd he should have drawn off the old King and his Army from Bantam; but found himself very much mis­taken: For the place made such a vigorous Re­sistance, that it appeared they neither wanted ne­cessary Assistance, nor Courage. We lost there a great many of our best Men, insomuch that we found our selves forced to Intrench, left they should have routed us quite; so we made our Lines of Approach, which we fortified with as good Pallisado's as we could, and so secured our selves, that the Enemy could not come at us.

In the mean while we continued our Approaches with all the diligence that might be, till we came within Musket-shot of the Fort. There we made use of a cover'd way, with which we came up close to the Enemies works, and in some measure within them: And having finish­ed our Mines, we set them on fire, with a reso­lution, [Page 58] that as soon as they should blow up to any purpose, we would assault them. One of our Mines made a breach that three or four Waggons might stand abreast in. Upon which it was order'd we should immediately enter: And so we did, but so with much ado, that we had reason to fear, we must have retired; but after a little resistance, they seeing us pour in so thick upon them, took their heels, and most of them threw down their Arms. All this while we pur­sued them, and made the most heavy slaughter amongst them that ever any History can shew. For, the Gates of their Castle, or rather their Doors being so little, that one could not go un­der them without stooping; they were all forced, almost, to creep thro' them one by one; and as they were all in a cluster, and unarm'd, to the number of near five thousand, we fired continually upon them, so that they lay like heaps of Stones one on another, which made the most dismal fight in the World: And to prevent the Air being infected with them, we made our Blacks to carry them off, and throw them in the River Dan­gerang.

Having gotten this Post, we fortified our selves in the best manner we could; for we were sure that we should not enjoy our rest there long; and that we were to be upon our Guard.

In this six weeks time that we had besieged this place, we had lost a great many Men, and a great many were fallen sick by reason of the bad Water, which had much of the tast of Salt-peter in it; which made Captain Hartzing at a stand, whether we should go on or not. At last he thought it best for us to stay there, till we could [Page 59] hear of the safe Arrival and Landing of our Fleet before Bantam, which we did in a few days after.

Major General St. Martini being come before Bantam with twenty stout Men of War, each of which carried between four and five hundred Men, besides a hundred Fire-ships, Tenders, &c. gave Orders for their Landing about two a Clock the next Morning: But first he took a general Review of the Men, and a Gill of Brandy was given to every one of the Soldiers; and after that six and thirty of the lustiest Soldiers were provided with a good quantity of Powder; and some hundreds of Sea-men were set out with Pole-Axes, or Hatchets, and eight or nine Hand-Granado's to each Man; all which were to Land with the Army.

We lay within Cannot-shot of the Town, and we could both hear, and see, the old King, who kept continually firing upon the Castle; and he had raised his Batteries above the tops of the houses that were in the City, so that the Enemy might see us with ease; so they immediately prepared to prevent our Landing, and for that purpose order'd the Main Body to march to the Sea-shore; and there raised Batteries to hinder our coming any nearer. In the mean while it was not a little satisfaction to the young King, to see our Fleet so near at hand, as well as to hear of our Forces by Land. And besides, it gave him some time to take breath, and freed him from the danger he was in continually of a Storm, for the Walls being almost all down. But now the Enemy could not go on with that Design, having enough to do to look after us. They took most care of a certain place, where they thought we designed to Land, as indeed we did: But in the night [Page 60] time we weighed Anchor, with all the stilness that might be, and saild on about a League higher; and drawing as near to the Shore as we could pos­sibly, we let fall our Anchors again. Our Cannon on Board was all loaden, and all things were or­der'd so, that where-ever we Landed, we might fire them upon the Enemy, and upon the City. The Tenders, and other small Vessels were all Mann'd immediately for Landing; some with a hundred Men, some more, some less; all which went with all speed to Shore. The Enemy ha­ving notice of this, were ready as soon as we, but had not time to raise any Batteries there against us, or to fortifie themselves; for 'ere the day begun to peep, we had got all things ready for our Land­ing.

Major General St. Martini, with his Life-guard, which consisted of sixty Men, and the Surgeons, came into my Schappon, and stood ready to give Order for the Signal, by Drums and Trumpets, for the whole Body of our Army to Land all toge­ther: But the Enemy made a very vigorous Defence; and being advantageously Posted in a Wood that was there, they charged us after so terrible a manner, that what with their Fire, and what with our Great Guns, that played all this while cross­wise upon the City, there was need of more than ordinary Courage to stand it out: Besides that, we all this while being still up to the knees in Water, had a very great disadvantage.

In this condition we Charged them for three hours, and could not come to Land all that while; at last five of our Companies were quite routed, and of the twelve Surgeons that we brought with us, there were but five left; and we that did re­main, were not able to do any great feats, by rea­son that we all this while stood in the Water. When we saw that we could not get any ground, [Page 61] we got some small Vessels, which fetch'd us some Haubitzes, (which is a kind of Field-Piece to load with small Shot,) with which we rattled so upon the Javans, that we obliged them to give ground enough for us to get on upon dry Land; and at last we forced them to quit the Wood, and to to retire to their Breast-works; so we remained Masters of the Field that night: And the next morning at break of day, we marched to Attack them in their Intrenchments.

The Major General, considering that the Dutch Companies were mightily weakned, commanded Captain Jochem, who led the Blacks, to march in the Front; and he sell upon them straightway with admirable Courage and Conduct. The Ma­jor General behaved himself like a true Soldier, and gave such tokens of his Invincible Valour, Wise Conduct, and Indefatigable Diligence, as can­not be well described. And tho' he had the mis-for­tune to have two of his Fingers shot off from his right hand, as he was Riding to and fro to give Orders, he could hardly afford himself time to have his hand drest; and I had no sooner done, but he straight mounted again.

The best of this Engagement was, that most of the Enemies Bullets flew over our heads. But I found that they did not all of them take the same course, and was a little surprized, when talking with the Sergeant of our Company, and jeering them for not being good Marks-men, a Bul­let came and laid him dead at my foot.

In the mean while our Men made but little on't: And the Captain was not able to do any thing more, than just to keep his ground against the Enemy. Wherefore the Major General, ha­ving given some new Orders, and briskly encou­raged the Soldiers, by telling them, that the beat­ing the Enemy out of that place, would be the [Page 62] chief part of their work, and the sure fore-runner of a total Victory, promising to the three first that should break into the Enemies Camp, an hundred Gilders, two Slaves, and a Pipe of Sack for a Reward; and having by such like Speeches and Promises, infused, as it were, new Spirits into them, he took upon him the Ma­nagement of the Front himself, and drawing out Captain Bleutner and Captain Winkler's Compa­nies, together with some others, he led them in Person; fell upon the Enemy with such fury, that we soon carried the day; for he had so animated the Soldiers, that every Man was worth two. Our Men being now come too near to use their Muskets, took their Cutlaces in one hand, and their Hand Granado's in the other; and when the Blacks saw the Dutch drive so hard upon the Enemy, they took such heart too, that with their Sword and Buckler they poured in upon the Ene­my, and drove all before them: So that the Slaughter we made of the King's Army in this place, was nothing less than that of Dangerang.

The Enemy was wholly put to flight, and left most of their Arms behind them. And we ha­ving gained that Post, the Admirable gave Orders that the Ships should no longer Fire upon the City, lest we our selves might receive some of their Shot amongst us.

All this while we push'd on forward to their Pallisado's, and came to the Forr which they called Speelwick, where we found a great many of the King's Men; but yet most of our Officers found that we should quickly become Masters of it. We sent for some heavy Cannon from our Ships, and batter'd it down in a very little time. The Sea­men forced open the Gate with Hammers and Axes, and so enter'd, throwing of Granado's: But all the Javaus being fled, we became Masters of it, with­out any further opposition.

[Page 63] This served our purpose mighty well, and sa­ved us the trouble of any further Entrenchments, except a few Gaps that we made up with Wood, which our Blacks cut down and brought to us.

Here we took a little breath, and rested that night, and the following day; and a portion of Biscuit, Sack, and Brandy, was distributed to each Soldier in the Army. After this fine Refreshment, the Army was put into a new Order, and the Right and Left Wings formed anew, and provided with Field Pieces, loaden with small Shot. Then we march'd against the Enemy, who lookt at first as if they were able to have eaten us all up for a Break­fast, they being above thirty thousand of them. But our Officers were not in the least dismayed at their numbers, but very couragiously Attack'd them on the two sides of 'em; yet taking such mea­sures, that we could joyn together again at any time. I must own, I never expected the Dutch should have escaped a total overthrow, considering the vast disproportion of Men; and while I was in this contemplation, on a sudden the Javans sallied out upon us with such a terrible and horrid Out­cry, as their Custom is, that one would have thought it had been a Hurricane, rather than a Bo­dy of Men: But for all that our Men stood their ground bravely, and gave Fire continually upon them. We had so order'd our Army, that behind each Rank of Musquetiers we had a Rank of Pikes, lest they should break in upon us: And all the while we played so thick upon them, with ten or twelve Field-Pieces, that they fell like Bees before us. Our other Wing observed the same Order; and we at last joyned together again in­to a Body. Having sustained this for near 3hours they sent some of their Muck Speelers amongst us, which are a sort of giddy, resolute Fellows, that are ready to be hired upon any kind of [Page 64] Exploit, how rash and mischievous soever it be; be it to stabb a Man for any private Affront, or any thing else of that kind: And the more fa­mous Cut-throats they be, the more they value themselves on their Reputation of being such. Before they go upon any such sort of undertaking, they eat of a sort of Herb which they call Avion, which for a time makes them giddy, and alto­gether unsensible of any danger; so that they are as fool-hardy, as they are dangerous. They rnsht in upon us with an incredible Fury, and be­ing incapable of consulting their own safety, they came running head-long against our Men, and spitted themselves upon our Pikes, and destroyed themselves without doing us any hurt. And in a little time after, having killed several thousands of the King's Party, we utterly routed them, and made them leave all their Arms behind them. Up­on which we fell from fighting to plundering.

After this, the Major General went, accompa­nied with his Life-guard, and others, to the Castle, where the young King was; who imme­diately upon his approach, opened the Gates, came to meet him, and with all the humble acknow­ledgment fell down at his feet, and afterward em­braced him, with all the demonstration of a grate­ful and sincere Affection.

Before this, the Admiral had given Orders for the Army to Encamp all round the Castle, and the Gunners to be ready in their Posts with the Artillery, which consisted of above three hundred Pieces of Cannon.

After this the Army having had 3 days rest, and all the refreshment that might be, was order'd to march into the City, and there they had the chief Posts in their hands, as the Boom, the Speelwick, and other Bastions, and the rest were quartered [Page 69] in the English, Danish, and French Quarters. Some were order'd likewise to keep Garrison in the Castle; so that all places of consequence were sufficiently secured, in order to make the whole our own, when time should serve a little more commodiously.

Here I received Orders to repair to the Hos­pital, where I had five Surgeons under me. But there being so many sick and wounded, that we could not well look after them; the best part of them we sent to Batavia.

The old King, after this Overthrow, retired with his shatter'd Army, to his 'Fort Dorjasse, where having made ready some hundreds of Prawen, and small Vessels, he resolved to be re­venged on us: And having the conveniency of the two Rivers, Dorjasse and Bantam, which run from that Fort into the Sea; he Mann'd them in order to go as far as Batavia, and to do us some mischief, which accordingly he did. For being come into the Road of Batavia, they set fire on some of our Ships; and either kill'd the Men, or took them Prisoners, and went on Shore on the little Island call'd Onrust, and made sad Havock of the few Inhabitants that were there. To prevent their doing any further mischief, some of the largest of our Men of War were straight got ready, besides a considerable number of Prawen, and small Vessels; all which were as well Mann'd as we could wish: And with these we went in search of the Javians. In this Expedition I was made Captain of the Ship call'd the Europa; which had eight hundred. Men and three Surgeons; and one Captain De Ruiter commanded the whole Fleet. We straight put to Sea, and with our whole Fleet we made directly to Bantam, and Dorjasse, the two Ri­vers, which I told you, lay so conveniently for [Page 66] the Javians to run in and out at; and there we lay, to cut off their Pass, when-ever they should attempt to come in there for shelter.

Being come there, one half of the Fleet was order'd to stay there, and the other half of which number I was, went in search of the Enemy. The next morning, as we were come about the Island call'd the Toppers Hoadie, we saw them about a League off of us, with more than a hundred Prawen, &c. cruising to and fro. Our Admiral De Ruyter judged himself strong enough to En­gage them; so having call'd a Council, it was resolved to fall upon them. Upon this a Gill of Brandy, (the best thing in the World to in­spire Courage into a Dutch-man) was given to eve­ry one of them: And we were divided into two parts, with Instructions, that upon the Sig­nal given, we should fall upon them all toge­ther. All that day we lay still; but on the Evening we did so surround our Enemy, that they had no way left them by the next Morn­ing, but to fight their way thro' us, or else be forced to shelter themselves on a little Island call'd Schlepse; but that being not above a League in compass, and besides, so barren, that it would not afford them any Provision or Relief; they were necessitated to Attack us; and indeed they were not long resolving upon it, having four times at least the number of Men that we had. They stood to the Windward off us; so that ha­ving that advantage too over us, they came ve­ry briskly upon us with twenty Prawen well Mann'd, and with forty Double Haekken, hoping with them to lay fast hold of our greatest Ships first, and so to board them, and then the smaller would easily be dispatched. The Admiral all this while did not let us fire one Shot, and had [Page 67] order'd a kind of Breast-works to be got ready upon the Deck by the Main Mast, and under Deck in the Fore-castle. Our Prawen and small Vessels kept behind us, ready to fall upon the Ene­my, when-ever he should Attack us. We had planted some of those Haubitzen I made mention of before, behind those Breast-works, which we had made, which were to pour small Shot upon them; and there were Men ready besides these with their Granado's, Fire-Pikes, &c. to give them a welcome at their entrance. All this while the Javians continually fired upon us, but did little Execution: And being come up close to us, they scaled us, and in an instant our large Ships were filled with Javans, who upon their Boarding of us, set up such a Huzza, or rather an Out-cry af­ter their manner, that it made the Air to tremble. But we straightway falling to our works, opened our Breast-works, and fired our small Shot upon them, together with our Granado's; so that ne­ver were Men destroyed after that rate. Those that were still coming up, and those that were in the Prawen, we swept down like a swarm of Bees, with our Fire-Pikes, and other Fire-arms, and Hand-Granado's, into the Sea; all that remain­ed begun then to Provide for running off. But out Prawen and light Vessels followed them so close, that they killed infinite numbers of them, and took up some that were fallen into the Sea, and made them Prisoners; who we immediately hang'd up altogether upon the said Island. The Sea all about us was pure Blood, and we were all in a Cloud of Smoke, tho' we had not fired one Great Gun. There was no less than two hundred and sixty of the Enemy lay dead Aboard my Ship the Europa. The dead and wounded we threw one with another over-board; which caused a bitter Out-cry among those who were yet sensible, [Page 72] or but slightly wounded. After this great Victo­ry our Ships came all together again, and upon a Review, we found our loss to be two Masters of Ships, seven Steers-men, eight Officers, and about three hundred and eighty private Soldiers, and se­ven hundred of our Blacks. We lost two Ships, the Victor and the Ameland, besides eighteen Prawen, three Galliots, and seven Fire Ships; all which were burnt. But of the Enemies Ships, which were a hundred and twenty in number, there did not one single one escape; their Men were computed to have been 24000.

CHAP. V.

HAving put our selves into a pretty good posture again, our Men had all the Refresh­ment that could be, with great plenty of Brandy, Sack, Biscuit, and such like. The next thing we did, was to dispatch a Ship to Batavia, to carry the news of our Victory to the General.

After this we went to joyn the rest of our Fleet again. The Javians all this while made se­veral offers to come out of the River Dorjasse: [Page 70] But, our Fleet lying just in the mouth of it, they could not attempt it with safety; but were forced to make their way out at some other small Rivers; so that some of them came in sight of us; but we no sooner made towards them, but they retired. Yet were we obliged to keep Cruising between that place and Batavia, to prevent their doing us any mischief. So that there was continually some little Skirmish with them; but never any Engage­ment worth speaking of. In a matter of two months, the greatest part of our Ships, and the best of our Men, were sent again to Bantam, the rest of 'em kept still Cruising before Dorjasse.

Being come to Bantam, under the Com­mand of Captain Jochem, the Men were put on Shore, and Quarter'd amongst the others that were in the Fort. It fell to my share to be of the number too. So I took my Lodging in the Chineesen Straet, where I was very commodious­ly seated for my business. There were also two Assistants with me, and three Under-Surgeons, who were Lodged in their several Quarters, for the better looking after their Patients. Those were obliged to come to me ever and anon to give me an account of those they had under their hands, and to fetch the Remedies, which were all in my custody, and to take my directions. Only those other necessaries, as Linnen for Plaisters, Arack, Sack, Salad Oyl, and such like, were to be fetched from the Steward, who had them in keep­ing; but they were never delivered without I sent an especial Order under my hand. The number of our Sick and Wounded was great, and that of the former increased, by reason of the Flux, which was very rief among them: And some were seized with a Lameness in all their Limbs; so that we had enough to keep us in employment.

All this while we were making all preparations [Page 71] for carrying on the War with utmost vigour, both by Sea, and Land: But we wanted Men; wherefore we were forced to stay till our Recruits came from Batavia. We had an especial Eye upon the Royal Fort Dorjasse; for we saw very well that we laboured in vain, while that stood; and we had reason to think, that if we did but once ferret them out of their strong hold, we should not find it difficult to give them a total Overthrow.

I must confess, that besides the pleasure I had out of a publick love for my Country, to see them in a fair way of overcoming their Ene­mies, and enlarging their Territories: I had also a secret satisfaction to see that they were the Ja­vians that were the Object of our Conquests; they being the most faithless, treacherous and base of all the Indians. They are fit for all man­ner of mischief; but never fit to be employed in any action that's noble or generous. In short, they are skill'd in nothing, but in cheating, filch­ing, and all manner of knavery. I have often found it to my cost, but that which was most notorious, tho' of no great moment, was the trick they put upon me at my first coming, which was this. When our Ship was just arrived from Eu­rope, some of these Javians came to meet us, as it is their usual manner to come and meet all Ships, that are newly come in, to welcome them, and to sell them fruits, fresh meat, and other refresh­ments. I, who was very much fatigued with my long Voyage, and quite tired with our S [...] Provisions, was not long a fixing upon some of their things; and amongst others, I was so set upon some fine fresh Fish, that they h [...]d brought with them, that I was resolved I would have it at any rate.

[Page 68] Their way is to Truck for some of our Com­modities; so I agreed to what they ask'd me for the Fish, which was some Nails, Thread and Tobacco-Pipes; which I immediately fetch'd for 'em, and gave to the Javian, who was then busie about something that others had bought likewise. I was so pleased with the thoughts of the rare Feast I was to have, and withal in such haste to be at it, that I could not stay any longer; but bidding the Fellow leave my Fish, with any of our Men, I ran down in the mean while into the Cook's Room, to get me some Water hung on ready, and I think never went so chearfully about any business in my life. But no sooner had I turned my back, but the Dog push'd off his Boat, and went off with my Dish of Fish, and left me to Dine on my Water; and I must confess, that from that time I could never have a hearty love for one of the Nation. It was a sort of a satis­faction to me, that in three or four days after we were Landed, I had an opportunity to be revenged on a Javian, which I never let slip, for his sake, when ever it offer'd it self. They are generally very great lovers of Shooting, tho' they are so stu­pid, as never to understand it as they should do: And as I was one day Shooting at a Mark, one of them comes up to me, and wanted mightily to have a Shoot. I told him he should: So I shot, and loaded again with a double Charge of Powder, and a vast deal of Paper, which I took care to ram down as hard as ever I was able, and then offer'd it him: He very joyfully recei­ved it, and went to fire it: But the Piece recoil­ed so furiously, and gave him such a knock on the shoulder, that down fell my Booby, and could hardly stir his Arm for a fortnight, or three weeks after it.

[Page 77] But to return to our purpose, all our Affairs were in a very good posture at Bantam: And there was a very good understanding between the young King, and our Major General St. Martin. But the Javans were ever and anon upon us in small Bodies, and came quite up to our Rampiers: So that we had many Skirmishes with them; but so inconsiderable, that they were not worth the speaking of.

One would admire how quickly our Recruits were made at Batavia; for in a few months we had again a considerable Army on foot, and they had got together Men from all parts of the Indies, which were all sent to us with speed. And as soon as they were got together, it was resolved to go directly against the Royal Fort of Dor­jasse.

Our Major General St. Martin left Captain De Ruyter to Command Bantam, in his absence, and himself went straightway with some of the best Ships thither; and in some days after sent Orders for the rest of the Fleet, and most of the Men to follow him, leaving only what was necessary in Bantam for the security of the Place, which had little to fear from the Enemy without, and less to suspect from the young King within, who had but a very inconsiderable number of Men of his own with him. So three thousand Men were order'd to be imbark'd and of that Squadron I was, and had that time the Command of the Ship call'd the Middleburgh.

When we had joyned the Major General, we made together a very fine Fleet; and indeed such a one, as had never been seen before in those parts of the World. For we had there fifty two fine large Men of War, besides some hundreds of Prawen Fire-Ships, Tenders, small Boats, &c. Ma­jor General St. Martin, soon after these were [Page 74] all come together, went back to Batavia; and we continued our way under the Command of the General and Admiral, whose name was Tack.

As soon as we came to cast Anchor before Dorjasse, the Javians got together in prodigious numbers to the Sea Shore, and covered the ground for several Miles, which was all level from the Sea to the Fort, and all Fields of Rice. Just by the Shore were several Sconces at some distance from each other: Some big, some little, but all vastly strong, being all made with a double Row of Trunks of Coco-Trees, that were set very deep into the ground, and the space fill'd up with Earth ram'd down ve­ry hard. The space between each of these Scon­ces, was all Ditches and Rampiers, with Palli­sado's. The Sconces were so broad, that two or three Waggons might drive abreast upon them. In the middle of them within, were the dwellings for the Soldiers: Some of them were built up square, and flat at top; for the Sol­diers to stand there and fight. From all these places the Javians were continually firing upon us, but to little purpose, because we were far enough out at Sea; yet were we near enough to hear them make many hideous Out-crys, and to see their Troops hurry from one place to another.

In the mean time we made all ready to Land. Admiral Tack going all the while from one Ship to another, to give Orders to the several Captains. Which done, we went to Prayers, and then the usual portions of Brandy, Sack, &c. were distributed with strict Injunctions to be all ready. Presently after they brought us some Schappons or Pontons, which is a flat sort [Page 75] of Boat like a Horse-Ferry-Boat, which were fenced with a kind of Breast-work; and four Pieces for Small Shot to each, and to these, Gun­ners a sufficient number, with some Sea-men, with Hand-Granado's. Then went in the Soldiers. After this manner we kept our Easter, which was now come, but was none of the merriest for us. The third day after Easter, we unladed seven large Ships, and sunk them in the place where we had a mind to Land at: And upon them we raised Batteries, upon which we planted above forty heavy Pieces of Cannon, to shelter us when we Landed, and to annoy the Enemy and their Sconces.

The next day after, about two of the Clock in the Morning, the Signal being given, we all in general left the Ships; upon which I went down into the Boat with the other Surgeons, which were above seventy in number, upon our Vessel, which was attended always by two or three small Boats, that were ready in case of any wounded, that they might carry them off to any place, and upon ever so shallow a Water.

All this while we kept a hideous Shooting with our great Cannon, which was all we fired; under the shelter of which we drew all the while still nearer and nearer to Land, from whence the Ene­my kept firing very hotly upon us. When we came to have no more than knee-deep of Water, we got out; and then our Gunners played the more freely from their Schappons, upon the Ene­my, and the Sea-men could then make the better use of their Hand-shells.

In this manner we Charged for above two hours, and lost a great many of our Men: Their Sconces lying so high, that they had a great command of us; and we on the other side could hardly reach them. Seeing that we could make but slow pro­gress [Page 70] this way, the Council of War met and re­solved to fall upon their Works altogether.

Upon this the Front marched forward directly towards the Enemy, and the Sea-men succeeded in our place, landing, and taking possession of the ground, which the Army occupied before. We carried some of their Forts by Storm in a few hours time, tho' with the loss of a great many of our Men. As soon as the Javians saw that they had lost some of their Holds, they set fire in most of the others, and betook themselves to their heels, but did not quite run away from us neither; for they kept moving in the Rice-fields on the sides of us, with a resolution to charge us all in a Body. We had yet a very considerable Army, tho' nothing in comparison to theirs; but we having by this time got together our Artillery, and planted it very advantagiously, we were ready for 'em.

The Admiral gave Orders we should play upon them with our Artillery, without intermission, which we did. The Armies being now come in reach of each other, the Javians fell upon us with the greatest fury imaginable; the manner of which I could not see, being then in the midst of our Men; but I heard their usual Out-cry at their fal­ling on.

Our Army opened it self to the right, and left; and then our Artillery, which was ready for 'em, was all at once discharged upon them, which made a hideous Slaughter amongst them. After which our Men closed in again, while it was charging again: Our Front moving always with movable Pallisado's before them, which was a very great defence to our Men, and enabled them to keep their Order the better.

All this while, tho' thousands of their Men dropt, they would not give ground an Inch, nor [Page 73] did we. And the day was now so far spent, that we were both forced to give over; yet were we whol­ly set upon pursuing the Stroke, and hoped that the night should prove rather more commodious and successful, than the day had done. As soon as the night drew on, we begun to play upon them with our Mortars, and sent such a quantity of Bombs among them, and at the same time fell on one of their Wings so furiously, that we gain'd ground; and pouring our Shot so thick upon them, we put them into such a consternation, that they were not able to defend themselves, so that we thought of nothing more, but to prepare to pursue them; but they did not design to put us to that trouble; for we could hear some of them in the front of their Army cry, Dida mou boggel ada orang Hollando; which is as much as to say, I will fight no longer against the Hollan­ders. This was made known to Admiral Tack, and further confirmed by some of the chief Offi­cers of the Enemies Army, which the Admiral had permitted to come to him, and were sent to parley, and to beg him to grant a Truce, or rather make a Peace. The Admiral durst not do any thing in this matter of his own accord; but was obliged to send to the General at Batavia, who sent him word again that he should be sure not to hearken to any Proposals of Peace.

During this Suspension of Arms, I conversed much with those Javian Deputies, and I found them very inquisitive, and curious to know what our Army was composed of; whether of real Men, or of Devils in humane shapes: We told them, they were only Men, but brave Men, and most Germans; and indeed they behaved themselves with such inexpressible Bravery, that it might have amazed a polite, and well-disciplin'd Nation, and much more might it do so, with a Barbarous, and Heathenish People.

[Page 78] When the Admiral had received his Answer from the General at Batavia, he told the De­puties that the Dutch would not hear talk of a Peace, and so sent them away; and bid them tell the old King, that they would now have as little regard for him, as he had formerly shewed for Batavia.

Upon which our Artillery was fired again, and we charged them with greater fury than be­fore; so that we put their whole Army to flight, which they took directly towards Dorjasse, and there we put them all in confusion, totally routed them, and made a most dreadful Slaughter a­mongst them. We did not pursue them as we might have done; for we thought best to keep together, and to continue in our Entrenchments, while we made all the preparations requisite for a more effectual pursuit of 'em, and in order to Attack the said Town of Dorjasse.

Here our Men rested three days, and had all the usual Refreshments; and in that time our Dead were buried. But in the third night, about twelve of the Clock, we saw the City of Dorjasse in a blaze, and heard the blowing up of some of their Building and Fortification, great pieces of which fell into our Camp, which was half a Mile from thence; all which was very agreeable to our Admiral, and to our Army too, because it would have cost us a great many brave Men's Lives, if we had been put to fighting for it.

We sent immediately a Party towards the place, to see what they were doing there, and in what condition they were. But when they came near to the place, the old King withdrew with all speed, and passed over the River Dor­jasse, with all his remaining Forces; and fled to the Blawe Peperbergh, which was about four Leagues from thence; so that our Men found [Page 79] Dorjasse quite empty, and the Coasts all clear. As soon as the Admiral had Advice of it, he march'd thither with the greatest part of the Army. We found nothing there, but Houses rui­nated; most of them still smoaking, and no Inha­bitants, but a vast parcel of Ducks and Hens, fly­ing about the Streets to seek a habitation; which our Soldiers were very glad to see, and regaled themselves bravely with. I went to take my Rounds in the City, and as I came near to a par­cel of Ducks, I fired amongst 'em, and shot a good many of 'em, and the rest ran into a House there hard by: So I followed them with my Fusil in my hand, designing to knock them down with the Butt end of it; But as soon as I came within the doors, I saw an old Woman sitting on a Bedstead with a naked Kriz in her hand. But she seeing me come with a Gun in my hand, fell down dead for fear.

Our Men found a great many Javians, that were hid in corners and holes, who could not flee away with the rest, being exceeding old, or otherwise disabled. Our Soldiers were Quartered upon the Bastions. The Admiral took his Quarters in the middle of the City, in the Court of the Old Pa­lace, which before was the greatest place for Trade.

The chief of my care was, to see if I could not get some Plunder, which, while I was looking for, about the Old Palace, I discovered a place in a dark Entry, which was not Paved firm, but the Stones only laid loose; and knowing it to be their custom to bury their Treasures in time of danger, I went to examine the place more narrowly, and made shift to dig down a matter of two foot; but finding nothing but a few Staefiens or Stiftiens, which were about a quarter of a Yard long, I grew [Page 76] weary of my work, not knowing the value of 'em. Those I got I gave away to a Free-man, who went privately among the Free-men, and sold them for a Crown. As soon as ever I knew the worth of 'em, I went in all haste to the place again, and got a pretty good parcel of them: But as ill luck would have it, 'ere I could carry them off, the Ad­miral, who was come to take a view of the Ru­ines of the Palace, came just that way, and find­ing what it was, engrossed it to himself, and sent for Men immediately to dig there; and there they found as many of them as filled eight Wag­gons, which were sold for 700000 Gilders: All which went into the Admiral's Pocket. However he presented me with a hundred Gilders for being the discoverer.

In the mean while, others got several good Booties, as Persian Quilts, and Persian & China Silks, with many other rich Furniture and costly Gar­ments, that were left in the Palace. And I who had found the greatest Booty, came off with the least share.

By what I could see of the strength of this place, it is certain the Javians wanted nothing but Courage to keep us out; for if that had not been wanting, they might have defied double our num­ber: For tho' the Town was four or five Miles in compass, yet there was but two Avenues into it, which was hardly wide enough for two Carts to go abreast, the rest being all Moorish grounds, where Rice grew, but where no Army could have come: And instead of a Wall, the Town was fenced with a Line of Coco-Trees set close to one another, and filled up with Earth; so that our Cannon would never have been able to batter it down, or so much as to make a breach in any part of it. The Buildings within were all built [Page 81] with Bamboo-Canes, except the Palace, and the Noble-Mens Houses, which were of Stone.

Upon the twenty eight Bastions of this place, we found three hundred and odd large heavy Pie­ces of Cannon, tho' most of 'em Iron; but no Pow­der or Bullets; which gave us occasion to think, that thro' some carelesness the Magazine took fire, and so set fire on the whole Town, as indeed we found it true afterwards, by the account which some of the Inhabitantss gave us.

The Fortification of this place, was so strong, that all the Canonading in the World could ne­ver make a breach in it; for the outside of it was all of Coco-Trees, set as close together as might be, and behind them was all Earth thrown up: And it is impossible for a Bullet to batter any of those Trunks of Coco-Trees, being of so spungy a nature, that a Bullet will stick in them, and go no further.

In this place was a high Hill cast up by the King's Order, and a few Hutts built at top of it; from whence he used to go, and spy the Army when it lay before Bantam, and take a prospect of the Fleet, the Country lying all level between those two places.

Two Rivers run thro' the Town, the little, and great, Dorjasse; which unite their Streams a little below the Town, and make up a fine River. It runs thence thro' the pleasant Vales of the Blawen Peper Bergh into the Sea, and divides the King­dom of Bantam, from that of Batavia, or Jacatra, all along in its course.

When we had laid still here some few days, our Admiral went out with some Companies to visit some of their Negeryen, or Villages. We plun­der'd all as far as the Plain of Banta, which is just by the River Bantam, and leads towards Tangbu­rang, a Province belonging to the Kingdom of Ban­tam.

[Page 82] Here we saw some Naekens or small Boats ly­ing on the other side of the River; but neither saw or heard any body therebouts. The Admiral had a mighty fancy to go over, and so had some others of the chief Officers: Wherefore he offer'd six Rixdollers to any that would venture to swim over and fetch some of those Naekens over. Tho' the River was about a mile wide, yet there were four Seamen that proffered themselves immediately, and several Blacks, who are generally excellent swimmers; but it was thought sufficient to send the Seamen only, and two of the Blacks, who brought over six Naekens; and having got some Oars to 'em, they went with them, and fetch'd all the others, which were twenty and odd. When they were all come, the Admiral went into one of 'em, and all the Boats were filled with Men. When we were got over, we found nothing but whole flocks of Hens, and Ducks; so that our Men divided themselves, some one way, and some another, to see if they could find any Body. One of these Parties met, by misfortune, with a parcel of Amboineeses, who were come out to get some Coco-nuts; and these going drest like Javians, our Men took them for such, and falling upon them, kill'd some of 'em, and would certainly have kill'd more, had not another party of ours come in of a sudden upon the back of these poor Amboineeses, who hearing them cry out for quarter, and disco­vering them to be Amboineeses, put a stop to the slaughter, and prevented further mischief being done.

We were all well provided with Powder and Ball, and kept on to the end of the Plain; where we found some little Works, Redoubts, &c. but all abandoned. In one of them were four or five pieces of Cannon, which we took, and carried over the River, and from thence drew them to Dorjasse.

[Page 83] Our Admiral was now thinking to get over the River again, and yet desirous to know what was become of the Enemy; but truly his curiosity cost us very dear; for we had not yet reach'd our Boats, when we perceived a great number of Prawen, full of Javians, making towards us, with such speed, that we could hardly get our Arms ready. All we could do was to fire upon them, and hinder them from landing just in that place. But they past by us quickly, and came to another landing-place, that was more convenient. As soon as they had got hold of the Shore, they came upon us in a trice, and so encompassed us, that we had no way left but to yield, or throw our selves into the River. The first of these could not please us, and the latter was almost as dangerous, for those who could not swim very well, so that they who had little or no hopes of swiming over, resolved to stand it out, and to sight to the last drop of Blood. Our Admiral escaped with five Boats, and some others followed them as fast as they could, and swam over after them. I, for my part, finding I could not escape death, if I staid there, threw away my Arms, and my Surgeons Box, and leapt into the River, tho' with little hopes of getting over; however it gave me a chance for my Life, and it pleased God to carry me over safe to Shore, where our Men were got, and stood spectators of the dreadful slaughter, the Javians were making among the poor Dutchmen, that were left among them on the other side. There was no less than two hundred of 'em, who were all cut in pieces, but behaved themselves with an unparallel'd bravery, as Men in such desperate conditions use to out-do themselves; and as they held it out a long while, so they sold their Lives at the dearest rate that ever men did.

[Page 84] The Admiral exceedingly concern'd at this sad misfortune, and desirous to revenge the loss of so many brave Men, took the rest who had made their escapes, and marched with them in all haste to Dorjasse, with a design to go over with a Body of Men, and pursue the Enemy. It was upon con­sideration found impracticable, being we had no way of passing the River, for it was very broad every where, and we had not above three or four small Boats: So that we were forced to quit our designs; but that we might not go altogether un­revenged, we set fire to all that remained standing in Dorjasse, after we had staid three or four days in it. The main Body of our Army continued along the Sea Coast, very well entrenched, under the Command of Captain Harzing; while the Ad­miral went, with some small Ships, and some Men, down the River Dorjasse, and so to Bantam by Sea.

CHAP. VI.

AS soon as we were come upon the Road of Bantam, the Young King came to meet our Admiral, and to thank him for his Signal Services; and after some Complements passed between them, they went both of them on Shore in the same [Page 86] Boat; and all the Men got ready, and landed soon after them; and were divided among the rest of the Soldiers that were in the place. I was or­der'd to go to my old Post in the Hospital: But another Order came, not long after, to me, to get ready to go to Captain Ruiter, to view the Country along the River Tangburang, which runs thro' the Province of that Name, and comes by Bantam.

In our march we saw very pleasant Negeryen on both sides the River, tho' all without Inhabitants. But one Night as we were very silent in our march, we were surprized with a sudden alarm, and out­cry in one of the neighbouring Villages. We were not very much corncerned at it, because we were 400 of us; however we stood all to our Arms, and moved, according to our Captains Orders, towards the Village, and there we met with 'em upon the march, but it was not intended against us. Some of our Front only could fire upon them, yet that served to bring down several of the Javians; but the Blacks or Amboineeses, of which we had a Company with us, pursued them so long, that they brought us seventy Heads of 'em, when they came back to us the next Morning; according to the Custom of all those Nations, whether they fight for us, or against us; which is always to cut off the Heads of as many of their Enemies, as they kill, and to bring them to their Commanders, as tokens of their Valour.

Having had good success thus far, our Captain was for moving forwards, and pursuing our good Fortune; which we did, till we came to a small River that runs into Tangburang: There we found some Forts, and some Negeryen, well provided with Men. We were about going over to them, and we could have done it, the River not being very deep; but our Captain did not think it safe; [Page 87] because we did not know what Numbers there might be of the Enemy, or whether they might not lie there in ambuscade. He immediately dis­patch'd some of our Men to Bantam, to Admiral Tack for Recruits; and according to his desire he had the very next day three Companies of Dutch sent him, and two of Blacks, that were Banda­neeses.

With this Reinforcement we crossed the River briskly, and marched directly towards their Villa­ges and Forts: But we had not marcht long, be­fore our Front, (which was hardly got in rightorder, after passing through the River,) but a parcel of about a hundred and fifty of our Men fell in with a Party of near four hundred of the Enemy; they would at first have been glad to have been a little farther off, but there being no retreat, they enga­ged them so vigorously, that they killed above an hundred and seventy of 'em, and wounded se­veral, and made the rest retire to Tangburang. As we pursued them, we took some of them, who had deserted the others, and hid themselves in the Woods; who all told us, that all the Enemies Force was within three or four miles of us, and more than eight thousand strong. That it was the same Army which had continually been com­manded by the Old King, and that they lay there in order to hinder our coming over that River.

Upon this information, our Captain sent some Expresses with all speed to Bantam, to give an ac­count of it to the Admiral, who, without delay, sent some hundreds of Men more, and some Field-Pieces likewise. Then were all the Officers com­manded to take especial care, that all their Men might be well provided with Powder and Ball. All our Body was divided into five Parties, each con­sisting of four Companies, and all the necessary Orders were given; then all our Army went [Page 88] to Prayers, after which we marched straight upon the Enemy.

A Lieutenant with fifty Men was sent out be­fore, to sec what he could discover of the Enemy, and so to give us information. We had not moved half an hour, e're we had an account that the Ja­vians were coming to give us battle, and that they were eight thousand strong. All our Parties put together, made but four thousand; yet were we in hopes that we might encompass them, as indeed we did in a very little while, and made the place so hot for 'em, and sowed the ground so thick with their dead Bodies, that they be­took themselves to their Heels, and fled in all haste to Anier, which is a strong and well-for­fied place, about two miles from thence, and is the chief Pass into the Province of Tangburang. Wherefore we provided our selves immediately with Breast-works, to secure us selves from the Enemies sallies. Every one that work at the casting them up, had a Rix Doller as a present.

The next day, when we had hardly finish'd them, the Enemy made a sally upon us, which turned much to our advantage; for being pretty well prepared for 'em, we made shift to cut off seven hundred of 'em, and took some of 'em prisoners, whom we gave quarter to for six or seven days; and then took them into a Wood, and cut them in pieces. The next night we raised three Batte­ries, upon one of which we planted four large Pieces of Cannon, that were sent us from Bantam, together with two thousand Men. These were loaden immediately with Small Shot, in case of their sallies in the night time; and in the day time we drew 'em out again, and loaded with Bullets, to send into the Enemy's Works.

When we had lain here about six days before the Town, we began to make our Lines of Ap­proach; [Page 89] and a General Assault was agreed upon. In three days time we put it in execution: We had a Water to go over, which we passed with great ease, by means of some Fascines which our Blacks cut and laid for us; but we found so brisk a reception, that we were forced to retire with a considerable loss of Men on our side. If the Ene­my had made the best of their opportunity at that time, they might, with the greatest ease ima­ginable, have cut most of us off, and raised the Siege; but it pleased God they did not pursue us any further than their Works: And this was ow­ing chiefly to some English, who were amongst them, and who persuaded them, that this was but a Sham-Assault of ours, and not the Body of our Army, and that that lay in the Trenches to cut off those that should sally out; which if they had done, they would have utterly routed us, for we were at first but five thousand strong, (reckon­ing the two thousand Men sent us with the Can­non) and of them we had above an hundred killed, and an hundred and twenty wounded. Not­withstanding this repulse and disadvantage, we still continued in our Resolution of carrying on the Siege.

In the mean while our wounded Men were car­ried to a place about a mile distant from us, where there were ten Surgeons to look after them; and those that were not dangerously ill, were sent to the Hospital at Bantam, and with them Captain Ruyter sent a Letter to the Admiral, to desire him to send him a recruit of about a thousand Men; tel­ling him, that with that he did not doubt but he should get master of the Town in a short time.

Three days after our Assault we begun still to make good our Approaches to the Town, being our number of Men increased; and being come [Page 90] pretty near to it, the Blacks came over to us in in abundance out of the Town. We did not re­ceive them into our Army, but posted them be­tween our Lines and the Town: However, this gave us hopes, that the besieged were weary of us. Wherefore we begun to make ready some Mines, which being finished, we again resolved to make another Assault.

While we were deliberating on these matters, an English Man, with his Arms, came over to us out of the Garrison, and gave us a good account of their condition, and withal told the Captain, that the Besieged seem'd now to wish for nothing more than that we would attempt another Assault; and that in order to receive us, they had pulled down the Houses in the Streets, and levell'd that part of the Town; that they had guarded all Avenues and Streets with double Pallisadoes, and that behind them they had planted several Pieces of Small Shot to receive us: And likewise that they had laid several Mines ready to blow us up. We on the other side were in hopes that we should surmount all these difficulties. We mounted Mor­tars upon our Batteries, and sent such a number of Bombs and Granadoes into the Town, that we thought it impossible they should keep within it long, and so it proved; for by and by we heard a sudden Alarm, the Besieged having a mind to try the success of a second Sally upon us. But we, who were well prepared for 'em upon all ac­counts, did send such shoals of Hand Granado's amongst them, that we forced them to retire with very great loss, and all the while we pursued them to the very Town.

This being done, and our two Mines being fi­nished, and having laid several hundred weight of Gun-powder in each of them: Orders were given to set fire to 'em, which was accordingly done: [Page 91] And in an instant, the Mines, having been dug very deep in under the Town, (as we might do easily, the Town being scituated pretty high,) we saw half the Town in the Air, and some part of it, and of the Men came tumbling into our Camp; and within some thousands lost their Lives at that one blow.

No sooner was this done, but we, who stood all ready, and in expectation of this, rusht in furiously upon them, while they were in this confusion and disorder, and put all to the Sword that came in our way, except those that we saw were Europeans. Two of them we took, who were Dutchmen, that had deserted the Dutch Company, but these we immediately hung up without any further exami­nation, as it is the constant custom, which the Dutch observe when-ever they catch any of their Deserters. But besides that they deserved this death by Law, they doubly merited this from us; for knowing that there was no pardon to be ex­pected from the Company, they had been great instruments of the obstinate resistance we met with here; for their condition being desperate, so was the advice they gave to our Enemies, to hold out longer than they would have done. I could not but be exceedingly sorry at the fate of one of'em in particular, being one of my intimate acquain­tance, and who came over with me from Holland. He was of a very good Family, his Father was an eminent Merchant at Bergen in Norway.

Being now Masters of this Pass, we fortified our selves with the greatest diligence, it being the strongest In-land fortification, and the direct Pass from Bantam to Batavia by Land. We had already got all the Sea-port Towns and Forts in our Hands; and having likewise possessed our selves of this, we did not doubt but the Javians would be obliged to come and surrender themselves, seeing they [Page 92] could not come at the Sea. Yet in case there should be some small desperate Parties abroad, Captain Ruyter commanded fifty Men to go and stroul a little about the Country, and I desired I might be one with 'em.

We marched about for a matter of an hour or or two, thro' nothing but Woods and Coco-Trees, and then we came to a River, but we could not pass it; so we continued moving along the side of it till night; and then not meeting with a con­veniency of passing the River, we took up our lodging there that night; but for fear of the Ene­my, we hardly durst speak or stir all that night.

The next morning early we heard a noise not very far from us, and we began to fancy, that we might insensibly be got round upon our Army again; but when we were got a little further, we discovered the Enemy on the other side of the Ri­ver, as busie as might be, cutting of Coco-Trees, with a design to go and raise some new Bachers, as they call 'em, that is, Fortifications. The Ri­ver was very narrow, but very deep; and seeing they could not come at us, and that we could ea­sily retire (if need was) to our Army, which was but a mile from us; we took a resolution, and fired so briskly amongst them, that we fetch'd se­veral of 'em down off the Trees.

They, on the other side, did not fail tomake good use of their English Firelocks, and to give fire upon us; so that four of our Men fell. Two of them that were only wounded, I brought away, and appli'd what was requisite to their wounds; and having done that, I went forward to overtake the rest of our Men; but I was no sooner come up to them, but I my self received a wound in my Thigh, from a Black, that was upon a Coco-Tree, and the Ball lodged within me. The small Skirmish be­ing over, some of our Men took me up, and carri­ed [Page 93] me to Anier, where the Army was; and from thence I was carried to the Hospital at Bantam. There I was the daily care of the chief Surgeon of that place, who was a very able Man, named John Hanss a Leydener.

He used his utmost endeavours to get the Bullet out of the wound, but all in vain: And after I had undergone a long and grievous pain, and had all the Splinters clear'd out, we were forced to leave the Bullet in, and to let the wound heal over it.

In two months time I was fully recover'd, and found no pain; nor did my Bullet ever trouble me, till I came into Holland again.

I was now got again to my Employment, in the Hospital that was committed to my care, where we enjoy'd our selves with great security: Only for fear of the worst, we took care to man our outward Garrisons, and to fortifie our Frontier Places. But e're three Months were at an end, we were sufficiently satisfied that there was no great need of fortifying our selves any more; for the Javians came over to us in mighty numbers: And to convince us of their sincerity, and entire submis­sion to us, they sent us some hundreds of Carts full of Musquets, Lances, Pikes, Bows and Arrows, and other Warlike Instruments.

After this, some of their Nobility, and some Per­sons of greatest Note, who had great Estates in those parts, came to surrender themselves, and to beg for Pardon of the Dutch Company. But for that time the Company thought fit to leave that to the discretion of the Young King, who pretend­ed himself willing to receive them graciously, and to pardon all that was past. But he having got some of 'em into his power, he forgot his Royal Word, and commanded some of them to be cast to Tygers, some to Venemous Serpents, some to be [...] [Page 92] [...] [Page 93] [Page 94] strangled, others were drown'd, others had their Throats cut by his especial Command; and all va­riously and miserably put to death. Things being come to this pass, the Company thought it was high time to put a stop to such Barbarity: And therefore they acquainted him with their resent­ment of this his base dealing, and made him sen­sible of the great imprudence, as well as baseness he had been guilty of; seeing he ought to have been glad, to have seen these Persons come to sub­mit themselves to him, and furnish him with Sub­jects which he was now like to want; and that so he might have his Towns and Cities once again raised, and filled with Inhabitants. The rest of them that came in, being hereupon more civilly used, and kindly treated; insomuch that in the eighteen Months time that I was there, all the Places were rebuilt, and made finer than they were before. For then the Chineeses, who are willing to be under the Dutch Government, came and settled there in grea­ter numbers than ever. For as they love to live among the Dutch, because of the Priviledges they give them; so the Dutch are very glad of their company, because where-ever they are among them, they cause a brisk Trade, which turns to the ad­vantage of the Dutch, as well as of the Chineeses themselves.

The Country being now again pretty well Peo­pled with Neighbours and Forreigners, and by the coming in of the Javians; I thought it high time to look about me, and to try to recruit my Pockets, which were now very low, all Provisions being exceeding dear; and I had had no opportunity in a great while to get a Farthing by my Profession, any other than what my Salary brought me in. So I applied my self to the Javians, among whom I thought there might be a great many wounded, and accordingly I found pretty much practice [Page 95] amongst 'em. With all this help I made shift to live handsomly enough, but truly it was as much as I could do: For considering the scarcity there was, and the great fatigues I had born, as well as the rest, I thought it the prudentest way to look af­ter my Health, and to afford my self what my Constitution required, rather than pinch my self, and contract a fit of Sickness, as several, and in­deed most People do, who go over to the Indies with no other design but to enrich themselves at any rate. Tho', by the by, after all the pinching, saving and scraping together, that is not so easily done, as People imagine: For nothing is more common than the vulgar opinion, that there's no more to be done to get an Estate, than just to go to the Indies; from whence they reckon they may come home with a burden of Gold, Pearls and Di­amonds, as if it was but picking them up and come away. But it may be worth the while, seeing we are speaking of this Vulgar Error, to shew that these pretious things are so far from being thus ea­sie to come at, that it is even a very dangerous thing to attempt to carry off any of those things, if a Man hath got any of them in his possession.

I my self went once to Amboyna, and got inti­mately acquainted there with a Sergeant, that had lived about nineteen years in that Country, and was an Overseer over several Blacks, that work in Press-Mills. We came to trucking at last, and I exchanged some of my Cheese, Tobacco, &c. for for some Oyl of Cloves; of which I purchased seven Bottles of near two Quarts a piece. This exchange of ours was to be kept as secret as any Robbery one should commit in Europe, for both our Lives lay at stake. Fortune favour'd me so far, that I came away undiscover'd, and brought 'em safe into the Road of Batavia; where I be­gan to have some hopes of running it ashoar, and [Page 96] pleased my self with the thoughts of what it would yeild me among the Chineeses, and the English. But I reckon'd without my Host there; for no sooner was I got into the Boat, in order to get to Shoar, with one of our Seamen, whom I had made privy to the business, and who understood that Trade, but the Fiscael made towards us with his Caffers. The Seaman had so contrived the business, that the Bottles were under water well stopt, and tied to a Cord; but when we found the Caffers came direct­ly to us, the Seaman who stood ready with a Knife in his hand, cut the Cord, and dropt the Bottles into the Sea. The Caffers were immedi­ately with us, who searched our Boat very narrow­ly, and then with their Hooks groped all round the outside: They found nothing but the end of a Cord, which made them give us an Ugly Look, but it was not sufficient to bring us into any fur­ther trouble. But immediately upon this a poor Gentleman had much harder fortune than I had; for these Caffars going from us to a Ship, that was come along with us from the Western Coast, they caught a Lieutenant there, that had got a piece of Gold of some pounds weight: And the Fiscael carried him strait away to Batavia, and in two days time he was hang'd up in the Galgeveld. This poor Man's hard Lot made me not regret my loss so much, I rather hug'd my self that I had let my Tartar go. But it cured me from ever at­tempting any thing of that nature. This may serve to let you see, how dangerous such un­dertakings are; and that such Counterband-Goods are not so easily brought off. So that if Men have no other end in going to the Indies, I ad­vise them as a Friend, to stay at home while they are well.

[Page 97] But now to return again to where I was: I ought not to omit giving the Reader an account, which will not be unacceptable, tho' the action will rather amaze than delight, and must needs fill the Reader with horror: For of all the Cruel­ty I ever heard of there, I never met with any that could compare with this, which was com­mitted in my time, tho' I must confess I think the Punishment that was inflicted on the Malef [...]ctors did in some measure out-do it.

Some of our Men went one day a little way up into the Country, rather out of necessity than for pleasure, designing to shoot some Birds, &c. notwithstanding they might know well enough, that it was not very safe, being we were not altoge­ther reconciled with the Javians. They were ex­pected back at night, but three days past, and no news of 'em, which occasioned many conjectures; but most were of opinion, that some Javians had faln upon them, and murdered them. Upon which Minheer Tack commanded a Lieutenant, with some Men, to go in search after 'em. Having wan­der'd a matter of two hours, they came to a lonesome place, whereas they were thinking to go back, and take some other Road. They heard a piteous out-cry, which made them go forward to see what it was, and there they found 'em all six, and discovered the most dismal Spectacle that ever was.

One of them was stretch'd out between two Trees, with his Arms tied to the one, and his Legs to the other, about three or four yards high from the ground, with a great Fire still burning under him; but he was quite roasted when we came.

Another hung by his Privities upon another Tree, with his Arms and Legs tied together under his Back; this was dead also.

[Page 98] The third was spitted upon a Bamboo-cane, in at his Fundament and out at his Mouth; he was dead too.

The fourth was buried up to the Neck, his Eyes put out, and his Nose and Ears cut off; this was not quite dead.

The fifth and sixth were tied fast Back to Back, each of them had their Right Eyes put out, and their Privities thrust into the holes; both these were still alive.

Our Men were so surprised at this sight, that they were ready to sink down; and finding no other remedy, they came with all speed to Min­heer Tack, to give him this tragical account, who sent straight some Blacks with a Barrow to fetch these poor Creatures, and bring them to Bantam.

We were not a little concerned at this strange accident, but what was an addition to our trouble was, that we could not learn from these Men how they came to be thus served, because they were de­prived of their Instrument of Speech.

Admiral Tack sent immediately some Messen­gers to the Young King to acquaint him with all this, and to desire him to have a search made among his people, and to use all means possible to discover the Authors of this Fact. This he did, and with such good success, that in less than a fortnights time, we found the Rogues out; and all of 'em (being sixteen in number) were apprehend­ed, and eight of them were forthwith condemn'd to be thrown to Serpents.

The manner of these Serpents destroying of Men is thus. They catch hold of a Man, and swallow him near half up, and then suck all the Blood out of his Body, then they tear him peace-meal, and eat him up.

The other eight were confined to one Room, where they had very good Diet afforded them, but [Page 99] that was only in order to prolong their Pain; for there were Men always attending them with Scour­ges; and as soon as ever these Criminals begun to nod, they lashed them severely, and this continu­ed for a fortnight; and then they begg'd that we would knock them on the Head, or put 'em to any speedy death they pleased, tho' it were the most cruel they could invent.

But all their begging was in vain, for the Young King was wonderfully pleased, that he had found out such a Punishment, as would probably terrifie the rest from committing such frequent Murders as they used to do.

Thus they continued in that misery, and lived till the fifth Week; then they fell asleep in spight of all their Whipping; and continued so notwith­standing they were pincht with red hot Tongs, and so they ended their miserable Lives. So, that how barbarous soever their Fact was, yet it met with a Punishment, which, I think, did rather out-do the Fact it self in Barbarity.

CHAP. VII.

THE Javians could hardly bear the Hollanders for a great while, and truly their antipathy against us was not altogether without some grounds, seeing that we, being Forreigners, had invaded their Territories, and taken possession of all they had, and then lorded it over them. They being a very silly sort of People, had no other way to shew their Spight and Resentment, than by making Mouths at the Dutch as they passed by, and some­times Spitting upon them. To break them of that ungainly Custom, we made a resolution amongst [Page 101] us, never to let any pass by that did so, whether Old or Young, Man or Woman, without giving them a good Box on the Ear. This cured them of their incivility so effectually, that you'ld have wonder'd to see how courteously they behaved themselves towards us; for all of a sudden there was so great an alteration, that there was no pas­sing by 'em, but they would greet you very civilly, give you good morrow, (in their Language, Dobi­dis Sinior) clapping their Hands together, and holding them up to their Forehead; and when they were willing to shew themselves more cour­teous and officious, they would add, Manna Bigi Sinior, that is, where are you going Sir? which was as much as offering their service and assistance, which we frequently made use of.

Admiral Tack was all this while lodg'd in the A­partment which belonged before to the English, where the Young King used to come to visit him almost every day, and maintain'd a faithful Friendship with him. In a little time, things being settled, a Proposal was made to the Young King by the Dutch, that if he would resign intirely all claim of Power and Jurisdiction over his People, cu­stom, &c. and turn over the whole Government in­to their Hands, they would allow him such a Sum as would enable him to keep up his Grandeur, and live like a King, (a titular one, that is,) and would be obliged to pay him some thousands of Gilders every Month. To this he condescended; whether thro' fear, or thro' indifference, I cannot well say; and a certain Pension was likewise settled upon his two Young Princes, all which was duly paid ac­cording to agreement. The rest of the Nobility, and Chief of the Land, remained in the possession of their Goods and Lands, as before, only that they were now subject to the Dutch Government. Thus the Dutch compassed their whole design by force [Page 102] and policy; and by fair means became Masters of that Kingdom, which was, and had been so long flourishing, and famous for its vast Trade and traf­fick; and that in so little time, as from 1682 to 1685, that I believe History will hardly afford an instance of a more sudden change of Affairs in so great a Kingdom.

The Old King all this while having wander'd up and down on the Blawen Peper Bergh, whither he had been forced to retire when he was defeated; and being there forsaken by most of his People, re­solved also to come, and submit himself to the Dutch Company; and accordingly, after near two years, he came and surrendred himself, having first sent some of his Servants to Admiral Tack for his Pardon, which was granted him. Upon which he appeared in Person, and came to Bantam, with a very small Retinue; there they assigned him a Lodg­ing, and set Guard upon him, and in a little time after sent him to a small Island, where he ended his days.

Thus all being quiet, all Hostilities ceased, and all reduced to one Government, Bantam flourished again in a more perfect manner than it had ever done; and did, like a Phoenix, spring up out of its own Ashes, but more beautiful and strong than it was before. Its Borders were now vastly enlarged, by reason of the vast number of Foreigners, which daily flocked thither, and were all indifferently re­ceived, except the English, French and Danes, which were not admitted, but were sent with their Ships to Batavia, where they were permitted to trade, and to take Houses and Ware-houses, &c.

The chief Traffick of Bantam consists in Pepper, Salt-Peter, Salt, Ginger, Cotten-Cloth plain, and wrought with Silver and Gold; also Fine Linnen, and Flowerd Stuffs, which are the common wear of the Inhabitants.

[Page 103] The Country about it is exceeding pleasant, and produces all manner of necessary Provisions. There are all manner of tame Fowls, Hens, &c. and their Eggs very cheap. All sorts of Fish. Great store of Cows and Buffels, but the Fat of these last is not much eaten, because it tasts so much like Tallow. Many Wild Boars there are also, but the Tamest of that kind that ever was, because that the Javi­ans never hunted them, by reason that their Law doth not permit them to eat the Flesh of 'em; so that they used to come so close up to our Works, that I have shot three or four of 'em in one day, and sold them for little or nothing.

But the worst Cattle thereabouts is the Ty­gers, which are in great numbers near Bantam, which the Javians used to be frequently sent out to catch or kill: And they did it after this manner.

Thousands of Javians go together to the place where the Tygers lie; and there they spread them­selves round the place in about three miles com­pass, and so march gradually to center and meet upon the Tyger, keeping still their Nassingayen before them; so that if the Tygers come out to­wards the circumference they make, they are so frighted, that they run back again; and so they keep them running to and fro, and retiring, till at last they are so closely encompassed, that they must of necessity be forced to throw themselves into some of their Traps, which are something after the manner of our Wheel-nets, but incomparably stron­ger and bigger; for they are of strong Wood, made less and less, and several Partitions; and in each Partition a Trap-door that shuts upon 'em, till at last they come into the narrowest of all. There they let him alone a good while without Meat, then they get a Rope about his Neck, and put him into a small Coop, upon a Cart drawn by Buffels; and these are always brought to the King, [Page 104] who keeps always some of 'em in his Palace, and looks upon that as a piece of great State. And when one of them brings forth a young one, it is so much taken notice of, that all the Cannon round the Castle are discharged, and great Rejoy­cings and Pastimes are made upon the occasion.

They do breed very often, but tho' one might expect to bring the young ones to be perfectly Tame, as indeed some do pretty well come to it, yet it is never safe to trust them too far; for while I was there, two of 'em, which they thought as tame as they could wish, broke loose and run thro' the Town, and tore several People to pieces, and would have destroyed several more, had not some Javians come upon them, arm'd with their Nas­singays, who killed one of them, and took the other.

There is another way of catching them in Traps, laying a Bait for 'em, but then you can't have them alive; so there is shooting of 'em, but not with­out very great danger.

In Ceylon, Pegu and Aracan they use to catch Elephants much after the same manner. It is worth while, upon this occasion, to undeceive those simple and credulous People, who believe that the way to catch them is, to saw some Trees almost thro', against which the Elephants come to lean to take their rest; and so the Tree falling, they likewise fall, and are not able to get up again, being very clumsie, and without Joynts in their Legs. Whoever gives credit to this Fable, is easi­ly imposed upon, for considering the Bulk of 'em, there is not a more nimble and active Creature than they are; and nothing is more sure, than that when they are used in War, there are never any Ladders made use of, to help up the three or four Soldiers, which they carry; but they are taught to kneel, or rather couch down, while they get [Page 105] upon their Backs. But their Agility is so obser­vable from what we have seen some of 'em do in Europe, that I will not go about to describe them any further. But for one instance of their Nim­bleness, and Aptness to be taught any thing, I cannot but set down here what I was an Eye-witness of my self, done by an Elephant which one of the chief Merchants of the Company kept of his own, that had abundance of Tricks. And when he had a mind to divert himself, or some special Compa­ny, he would have him brought out by the Men that lookt after him, and knew how to manage him. This Elephant once was brought out upon a Bridge, which was over a very deep River, and a great Loaf was given him in his Mouth. The keeper gave him a sign, and fell a beating upon a Copper Instrument; upon which the Elephant went back, as in a fright, and tumbled down backwards into the River, with a most hidious plunge, and kept so long under water, that he eat up his Loaf there, and he staid so very long under the water, that no body expected ever to have seen him come up again, except those that were used to this trick; at last up he came and swam to Shore, and ha­ving paid his respects to his Master, he threw up the Bread he had eaten, and near a Barrel full of water. Many other Tricks he shewed, but this is the only one that I thought worth relating, as be­ing somewhat strange and uncommon.

I used to frequent many Javians of my acquain­tance, to pass away the time, and to observe some of their most particular Customs and Humours, and to share of their Diversions. Of th' latter none pleased me more, than to see their Balliar Dances, performed by Women who were kept for that purpose, by Persons of the greatest Quality. These Women are of an extraordinary small size, but of the most exquisite Form and perfect Shape [Page 106] that ever was seen: Their height is but between five and six Spans, their Skin as white as the driven Snow; and taking them all together, one would sooner take 'em for Angels, in the likeness of Wo­men, than for Women themselves; for besides their natural Beauty, there is all the artificial Dress that can be contrived. Their Garments are of the sinest Silks, wrought with Silver and Gold, and their Tresses neatly adorn'd with the rarest Orient Pearls, all which doth still add to their lustre. Their manner of dancing is in Masquerade; they have in their Hands some Ebbony Balls strung upon a String, with which they keep time very ex­actly with the Musick, instead of our Castanets; and sometimes they sing with their dancing, which is yet more charming than the rest, their Voice be­ing wonderful sweet. One of these Women costs generally two or three thousand Gilders, they are fetch'd out of the Province of Babylon, about forty miles from Jerico the less; and no other Women are fit for these kind of Pastimes and Dances but they: So they are much made of by the Indian Kings, and Nobility, who spare no pains nor charge to get 'em. Some of these I have seen also at Surat and in Persia, when I lay before Wond Artz, with the Ship called the Gelderland, where we took in Silks in lieu of our Pepper and Spices.

Another sort of Sport they have is Cockfighting, which being so common here, needs no further de­scription.

These Sports and Pastimes are frequently seen amongst 'em, but especially at their Weddings, which are never held without them, together with several other Recreations, and strange Ceremonies, of which I will give you some account.

In the time that I was there, a young Gentle­man, Son to one of the Principal amongst 'em, was [Page 107] married; and being intimately acquainted with him, I was invited to that Wedding. His Wife's Porti­on was considerable, and proportioned to the Young Gentleman's Fortune. The Father gave with his Daughter, thirty Men, forty Women, and twenty Young Maids, all Slaves, besides two hun­dred thousand Cujax, which amounteth to about sixteen Rixdollers, for twelve thousand Cujax are only the value of a piece of eight. All these Wo­men-slaves, the Man may lie with if he pleaseth, but the Children that are thus born, are not at his disposal, but at his Wives, who may sell them, or dispose of them as she thinks fit. But those Slaves Children, which are given in Dowry to the Wife, are in the power of the Husband to order as he will.

When a Marriage is on foot among them, both the Young People confine themselves within, for about six Weeks or two Months: The Parents in that time set out their Servants and Slaves, and make 'em as fine as they can against the Wedding. The Bridegrooms Apartment is all strewed with Flow­ers. Then on the Wedding day he mounts on a Fine Horse, which is set out in the finest manner, and thus goes to his Bride, where all her Friends meet him, attended with the Slaves, Presents and Houshold-stuff, &c. Then a great Dinner is pre­pared, where each of the Young Peoples Parents are to be present, and to make merry. In the mean while the Young Couple are lead to a Room with a fine Bed in it; where they are shut in, and left to their liberty, after which the Bridegroom comes out to the Guests, but the Bride is not seen of any Man after that time.

These Rejoycings usually last four days, during which there are some Comedies acted after the Chineese manner.

[Page 108] Among all their Sports, there is their baiting of a Buffle, which pleased me very well, but that it so frequently occasions much mischief; because their way is to leave them loose, and to set seve­ral English Dogs upon them. I saw my self once two Buffels let loose in a small inclosed piece of ground, with five Dogs against 'em. One of the Buffels desended himself very well of the first Dog that came at him, and tossed him up a vast height; but a second coming upon him, before he had well rid himself of the first, and seizing him fast by the Testicles, it so enraged the Buffel, that he run directly to a little Shed, that stood there in a Corner, upon which three Blacks and two Dutchmen had got, the better to see the Sport; and throwing all down before him, and the Dogs still holding him fast, three of them, viz. two Javians, and a Dutch Carpenter, were trampled to death, and indeed almost all to pieces: And the other Javian, with the Admiral's Baker, came off luckily with no other wound, than what they got by their fall: They had no other way to put an end to this, or to part 'em, but by firing upon them altogether; for now the other Buffel was deeply engaged too: So that with their Musquets they killed the two Buffels, and two of the Dogs, and unfortunately another Javian. So that this Sport ended very tragically, and it generally proves so, thro' their want of management.

The next day another ill accident happen'd; for as there was in that place a great Mast, which the English had taken formerly out of a Ship, and set up there, in order to get up, and spy the Ships a-far off at Sea. One of our Seamen would needs go up for a frolick, and being come almost to the top, one of his holds broke, and let him down, and was (as you may well imagine) killed with the fall. Upon which Admiral Tack immediately [Page 109] ordered this Mast to be cut down, and another to be set up upon the Speelwick Bastion, which was much less than the other, and not near so high, but commanded a farther prospect, the Bastion it self being very high, and upon a much higher ground.

While I resided in the Hospital at Bantam, which was some Months, several of our Compa­ny, which we had left at Dorjasse, dropt in by degrees, having destroyed all in their way; and being all come in, they were almost all sent back again to Batavia, especially all the Blacks; so that there were not left, both within, and with­out the Castle, above five thousand Men to keep the Garrison; which was little enough for so great a place, it being as far as I can judge four­teen or. fifteen miles in circuit: and the number of its Inhabitants was computed to be 700000, besides the Foreigners, which might amount to half the number more.

Towards Land the City lies open, but to the Sea it is guarded by a very strong Wall six yards broad; besides some hundreds of Bastions, little Forts, Redoubts, &c. all which are very well pro­vided with Cannon.

All things were now in good order, and the Go­vernment very prudently managed, so that all those that were in the Companies Service, even the Soldiers themselves, had no reason to com­plain. But their Condition was much mended, their Provisions were cheap, and their Usage and Treatment very civil; and I must confess, that I had all the enjoyment I could well wish: But notwithstanding all this, I was still dissatisfied and restless, and wanted to be going to visit some other parts of the Indies. But it was in vain to wish, for I was under Obligations not to move yet.

[Page 110] The time now drawing near, that our Captain was to return to Batavia; a Council of War was held, where it was resolved, that a general Mu­ster should be made, and that those who had ser­ved out their time, should come out and claim their liberty: But withal notice was given them, that if they would engage themselves afresh, they should not only be kindly received, but should have their Pay raised by four Gilders.

Then our Captain Tack went back to Batavia, to be President of that City, and Captain Harzing succeeded him in his place of Governour of Ban­tam.

About this time the Muck Speelers were very troublesom about the City, and daily committing great disorders. Their way is to make themselves mad by eating of the Herb they call Avion, i. e. Opium: Then ye shall see 'em run about the Streets, like Men distracted, and kill all they meet. But our custom was, as soon as we spied them a coming, to cry out Amuck, Amuck, upon which every body stood ready with his Weapon in his hand; and these Blockheads would run themselves upon a Pike, or upon a Musquet, and be shot through, and in the heat of the Fury, run it may be an hundred or two hundred paces before they dropt. And these Disorders could not by any means be prevented, tho' the Company had made it death for any one to be found with any of that Herb about him, in any part of the East-Indies.

There being now no more Action here, nor any Novelty that this Place afforded me, I was very desirous to be gone. But I found the only way to attain my wish, was to get some Sea-Surgeon in the mind to exchange Places with me. Wherefore I waited impatiently for the coming in of any Ships that were to go to Batavia: And in a little time the Tidor, from Bali, came into the Road of [Page 111] Bantam. She had no sooner cast Anchor, but I was with her to welcome her, and to feel the Pulses of her Surgeons; but I found their Designs were much the same as mine, and they were all dispos'd for a longer Course; so that I found no hopes there of success: But being told that they expect­ed another Ship in toward night, if the Wind did not cross 'em, wherein were four Master Surge­ons; my hopes quickly revived, and I resolved to stay there that Night; in the Evening the Ship came in according to their expectation, and the next Morning early I went on board of it; and after the usual salutations, I applied my self to the Master Surgeons, and freely declared to 'em my Intentions. One of 'em, a Gentleman of Delf, at first liked my Proposal, and after some further discourse, was fully in the resolution of changing with me, which did not a little rejoyce me. The thing being thus agreed upon, he asked leave of the Captain, after having acquainted him with his design; and having got his leave, he came away with me to Shore My business now was to have leave my self, which indeed I had moved for at a distance before, but not doubting of having leave given me when-ever I should desire it, because I had behaved my self well; and what made more yet on my side, I had now and then greased the Chief Surgeons Fist: I deferr'd speaking for it directly, till I had met with one that would change with me. No sooner had I declared my Mind to the Chief Surgeon, but he gave me an ample and ho­nourable Testimonium to carry to the Governour, who with a Complement of Thanks, gave me a Pass, and entred the other in my Place. So I took my leave of 'em all; and having got my Chest and Hammock ready, I got me a-board my new Ship, called the Enckhuysen, it was laden with nothing but Rice, and had but twenty eight [Page 112] Seamen, besides the Officers, and us four Master-Surgeons.

I parted very chearfully from Bantam, the only thing that I was loath to part with was, a little Summer-House I had order'd to be made in the Garden of the Hospital, which was very delight­ful. It was made of Bamboos, and so contrived, that I might have removed it very well; but be­ing I could not move that with it, which made it so extream pleasant, I left the whole standing for my Successor to enjoy, but not without grudging it him heartily. The Top of it was cover'd very neatly with Fig-leaves, and the Sides were sweetly shaded with Pepper-planks, which hung like a Vine over the Windows, and made it extreamly agreeable. But now that I am speaking of this Pep­per, it will not be amiss to give you a description of its growth, &c. This part of Java is the most famous for it, and the great Blauwe Peper Bergh, which I have so often mentioned, hath its denomi­nation from it, and signifies Blew-Pepper-Mountain, it being full of it; there the best of all grows. Indeed Malabar, Malacca and Sumatra do produce vast quantities of it too, but it is all white and long, like the Canary Pepper, and is not to com­pare with the Javian Pepper for goodness; and for that reason hardly any but the latter is trans­ported into Europe.

They plant it at the bottom of other Trees, to which it clings in the nature of our Hops, and winds round as that does, but higher. Its Leaf is like that of the Orange-Trees, but less, and of a more pleasant Green, and tasts pretty sharp if one bites 'em. The Fruit grows much like Grapes, tho' (every one knows) much smaller, and closer to one another▪ They are ever green till they dry, which is in November, December and January, at which time they gather 'em, and spread them upon [Page 113] Mats in the Sun to dry; then they run 'em thro' a Sieve, and pack 'em up ready for the Merchants to take away.

Now, tho' Pepper is as plenty in India as Stones in the Streets, and only serves for Ballast very of­ten, and to pack up other Goods tire; and altho' sometimes several whole Shiploads of it be thrown into the Sea, and many hundred thousand pound weight of it burnt; yet dares no Man in the ser­vice of the Company take one single Corn of it, but every one is obliged to buy it of the Indians, who deal with the Company for it: And the same rule is observable in respect to other Spices. But now the Enckhuysen lay still but one day, so that the next morning after I had boarded her, we weighed Anchor and sailed to Batavia, with a half wind. It lies but six Leagues from Bantam, yet were we seven days before we could reach it, for we were ever and anon forced to cast Anchor and weigh it again, which fatigued our Men mightily.

Being now come before Batavia, our Master went immediately on Shore, and the next day our Ship was unlading. I went to Shore too with all speed in a Chineese Praw, and went to wait upon the Head Surgeon there, one Mr. John Streckel­berger, who was my old Acquaintance; but I found him now raised to the highest pitch of Pre­ferment the Profession is capable of there, which was the place of Overseer General over all the Sur­geons in the whole Indies, in the place of Dr. Kle­yer. I told him upon what design I had left Bantam to come to Batavia, which was in order to get me a Deputation to some other part of India, that I might travel farther still. He seemed very ready at the first, but afterwards he desired me to come again in three or four days time.

In the mean while I went to visit all my old Acquaintance in the Fort where I once lived, and [Page 114] to divert my self with 'em. But unhappily I took out an old Gentleman with me, one day, to go to a small Island hard by, where there were a great many Oysters; we had got a good many, but as we were coming back, it blew at so excessive a rate, that our Boat was turned over. The poor old Gentleman could not reach the Shore, meerly for want of strength, and so lost his Life within a hundred yards of the Land, but the old Chineese and I c [...]me safe to Shore, and the Boat was dri­ven quickly after us, so that we took that up. In­stead of paying the Chineese, I beat him soundly for being the main cause of all this. And from that time I never saw him more; without doubt he run away for fear the Fiscael should call him to an account for the death of my Companion.

This was the fourth time, that God in his in­finite goodness delivered me out of that Element of Water, once in my own Country, once in Africa, once in the River of Bantam, and this time at Batavia.

It was now time to go and wait upon the Sur­geon General, to know what was determined as to my affair. When I came there, I was surpriz'd to find a Deputation to go and Board the Phoenix for Banda and Amboina, for besides that it crossed my design, which was to go to Japan; I knew that those two Countries were the most unhealth­ful of all India. However, after a little pause I resolved to go thither or any where, rather than to stay there. So taking my Orders with me, I went aboard the Enckhuysen, and told by Brother Sur­geons how I was serv'd, who instead of condoling with me, laught at me very heartily.

I was now to be gone in two days time; so I made haste and provided my self with Arac, Tobacco, and Long-Pepper preserved; all which are found to be of greater use in those unhealthy [Page 115] parts than in any other: And having made all other necessary Provision, I went on board the Phoenix.

The next day we weighed Anchor, and sailed from Batavia, the wind N. E. passed the Streights of Sunday, and in three Weeks time we arrived before Banda, which is reckon'd to be three hun­dred Miles from Batavia. There fell nothing out worth any notice in our passage thither, but that a poor Seaman was blown down by a sudden puff of Wind from the Fore-Mast upon the Anchor, which tore his very Guts out of his Belly.

CHAP. VIII.

AS soon as we were come into the Road of Banda, our Master went ashore; my Legs which had been swell'd for three or four days, were now so sore, that I could not stir, else I [Page 117] would have gone with him with all my heart; but my Indisposition augmenting, I was forced to be carried ashore. There my Swelling increased, all upward, and my Belly was now swell'd to the highest degree that could be, ready to break: And in this condition I continued the space of three weeks, (so that I was left here very comfortless, for the Phoenix was obliged to be gone) and after that the Distemper seized me so in all my Limbs, that I wholly lost the use of them; and during a quarter of a Year I could not bring my Finger to my Mouth; so that truly I despair'd of ever re­covering the use of my Limbs, (altho' I was not sick inwardly) and therefore I often prayed to God to take me to himself. I was carried every day to the Bagnio, where several other Patients with me were set upon Seats, all in a ring, with Blankets wrapt round about us so close, that nothing but our Heads stuck out; there was a great Fire of each side of us, which made the heat intolerable, and then we were held over the steem of some medicinal Herbs, which were boyl'd for the purpose; into which infusion they threw thirty or forty red hot Cannon Bullets, which raised such a steem, and made such a smother, that not one in a hundred was able to bear it, but they were forced to be taken out, and carried away upon Quilts made for that purpose. I was taken out thus in the beginning, but when I came to be used to it a little more, I bore it out bravely, and found it very helpful. So keeping to this for some weeks, I recover'd apace, and then they begun to anoint my Feet with Oleum Terrae, and prescribed me to drink frequently a small Glass of Bitter Brandy, or Arac infused in Bitter Herbs; by which method, with the help of God, I perfectly recover'd.

After this I went to satisfie my curiosity, (which was the occasion of my coming) and to see the [Page 118] Country. But I shall decline giving any descripti­on of it, because it hath been done already suffi­ciently by others, especially by Johan Hugen Van Linschooten. Only I wil give you a short account of the Noble Fruit which this Island is famous for, viz. the Nutmeg and Mace, which the Inha­bitants, whether Dutch, or Freemen, or Slaves, are obliged to deliver yearly to the Governour, and is sent afterwards to Holland, and other parts of Eu­rope, and to Persia, and other places of India.

The Tree on which the Nutmeg grows, is al­most like the Pear-tree, but doth not spread so much, and its Leaf is somewhat rounder. The Fruit is much like a Peach in bigness and looks, of an extraordinary fine taste, and delicate smell, when it is ripe: On the out-side is a thick hard Shell, like the Bark of a Tree, over which the Flower grows. When the Nut begins to be ripe, it swells so much, that the first Shell bursts open. The Flower is of fine Red, and very agreeable to look on, especially when the Tree is pretty full of Fruit. Sometimes the Mace comes off of it self, and when it sticks to the Fruit, they gather all to­gether; and in the drying of the Nutmeg, the Mace drys and falls off, and changes its lively Red into that brown Yellow, which we find it hath here in Europe. The whole Fruit is very proper to pre­serve, and is an excellent Confite.

While I was at Banda, a couple of Fellows were executed for having killed their Mother; the death they were put to was very terrible; they were fasten'd upon a Wooden Cross, and their Limbs were broke with an Iron Bar, and there they were left to expire.

After I had spent three Months here, in pretty good health, the Ship called the America came to Banda; so that having now the opportunity of compleating my Voyage, which my sickness pre­vented [Page 119] me to do with the Phoenix, I embraced it readily, and went in her for Amboina. I was glad to leave that unhealthy Country; and tho' I had, and shall ever carry with me severe tokens of the Plague of that Country, I was glad to come off so well as I did. In four days time we came before Amboina, where our Ship was straight loaden with Cloves. I went there on shore to look about me; and while the Ship was lading, I had time to exa­mine how they grew, and what I could not be an Eye-witness of, I had from my old Friend the Serjeant, whom I made mention of before, from whom I got those Bottles of Oyl of Cloves, which cost me so much care and trouble, and at the last I was forced to drop them into the Sea.

The Clove-Tree is much like the Laurel-Tree, the Blossom is White at first, then it turns Green, and after that Red. While it is green it smells so fine and sweet, that nothing can be compared to it. These grow mighty close to one another, and many of 'em together, all within the Blos­som; when they are ripe they gather 'em, and dry them; then they are of a brown Yellow. Those Cloves which they do not gather, as not being ripe, hang on till the year following; and those they call then Moeder Nagelen, i. e. Mother Cloves. Where these Trees grow, there grows no kind of Grass, or any green thing nigh; their nature being such, that they draw all the moisture about them to themselves, and so do the Cloves likewise, as I have often seen my self, that a Tub of Water be­ing set in a Ware-house that had store of Cloves laid up in it, after they were pickt and cleans'd, in three or four days time the Water would be all gone out of the Tub. The smell of 'em is so strong, that some People have been suffocated with it when they have been busie with too great quan­tities of 'em, and in too close a place.

[Page 120] Our Ship having taken in all her Lading, we left this place, and made directly for Batavia, and ar­rived there happily in a Fortnights time; where our Ship was immediately unladen, and all the Cloves put aboard the West-Friezland, in order to go for Holland.

Here an Order was sent me to change my Ship, and go in the Old Europe, the same Ship that brought me from the Cape to the Indies. I went with her to the Island Onrust, which is a place fit for careening of Ships; where she was to be fitted up, being very old. The Island hath its name very justly, Onrust, signifying no rest, by reason of the continual disturbance, which the Sea causes to the Inhabitants, who are only Carpenters, Smiths, and other such Artificers for Shipping. For the Island being very low, and the Sea Ebbing and Flowing every two hours, at very uncertain heights, gives the Inhabitants no rest or security: And every new and full Moon, the Sea drives 'em up a vast way; but so unsixt are its Bounds, that they are forced to be continually upon their Guard: Which be­sides the great labour, and great quantity of work that lies upon their hands, makes it truly very restless for them.

There were two Master Surgeons besides me be­longing to the same Ship, and we had all our Pati­ents ashore: The only pastime we could have, was catching of Tortoises, of which there are vast num­bers there. When it is fair, and the Sun shines bright, they come out of the Water, and lie in the hot Sand. So when they were all very quiet and settled, we came upon them of a sudden with Sticks and Iron Bars, and turned them upon their Backs, as fast as we could, for then they cannot stir. When we had done catching 'em so, we took them out of their shells, and put them in Pickle, and kept them in Barrels or Pots, with Salt and [Page 121] Vineger. This was our daily Food, and very good, but some of 'em are far better than other some. The biggest we caught was more than three Men could compass, and a loaded Wagon might safely have gone over it without breaking it.

Besides these, there are also a great many Sharks, which do much mischief; of which I gave you an instance before in the poor Chineese, that was diving for Iron, and was devoured by 'em. There is much fishing for 'em. And the manner of catch­ing them is, by baiting several very large strong Hooks, with the whole Liver of some other Fish, which the Sharks will not fail to swallow Hook and all, being extream greedy, and so they are taken. The Tail is all that is eaten of this Fish, and that is not very palatable neither; but the whole is eaten sometimes by Seamen, in case of necessity, for want of other meat: But its Liver is very useful for many things in Surgery.

Our Ship being now thoroughly refitted, we re­turned to our old Anchoring Place at Batavia; where we found a Ship newly come from Holland, that had not yet cast all her Anchors. I took in all hast a Chineese Praw, and went on board of her to see if I could not meet with any old Ac­quaintance there, and to hear some News from our Country: And there I heard the first account of Stransbourgh being taken by the French, which was a very great surprize to us.

As soon as our Ship had taken in all Necessa­ries here, she was ordered to sail for Ceylon, at which I was mighty joyful, and accordingly I recrui­ted my self with Provisions, and went on board: Then we left Batavia with the first fair Wind, and in five Weeks time we happily arrived before Co­lumbo, which is the Chief City of the Dutch in Ceylon. It is one of the most commodious Ports of any in the Indies, where Ships may lie safe many [Page 122] years, and come in at will, with the Sea-wind, and run out when they please, with a Land-wind. Yet there are a great many Rocks there, but they are only dangerous to Strangers; for which reason, when a Ship comes thither, that hath never been there before, she is obliged to fire three Guns; whereas if he is acquainted with the place, he need fire but one. This is straight answer'd by a Gun from a Watch-Tower, that is on one of the highest Rocks, about two miles distance from the City, where there is always a Pilot, and his Men ready, who as soon as they spy a Ship coming, display a Flag in token that they must come no further, and then they go and bring the Ship in.

At the Mouth of the Haven lies a Fort or Castle, called 't Swart, i. e. the Black Fort. It was first built by the Portugueze, but under a spe­cious pretence of building a thing of a very dif­ferent nature. For when the King of Candy, who could at that time have prevented their work, sent to know what they were about; they told him they were only building a Play-house, and under that colour carried on their work, and pro­vided it with large pieces of Cannon, which they brought to Shore in great Hogsheads; and so be­came able to maintain themselves there.

I do not design to enter upon a description of this Island, because it hath been done very par­ticularly by others, and especially by Chr. Schwit­zor, whose Relation is now published with mine, to which I refer you.

While our Ship was lading with Cinnamon, and several other Rich Commodities, I went on Shore most of the time; where I took my diet at a Freemans House, where I had it extream good, and well ordered, and for a very small price.

[Page 123] The great Commodity of this Island is Cinna­mon, which is the Bark of a Tree, much of the bigness of an Olive Tree; the Leaves are much like the Laurel, but somewhat smaller; the Flower it bears is white, and the Fruit is like the Black Olives of Portugal. The Tree hath two Barks, the Cinnamon is the inner one of them, which is peeled off the Tree, and cut in square pieces; then laid in the Sun to dry, which makes it rowl up together, as we see it in Europe, and changes its colour, which is at first near upon Ash-colour, into what we find it of here.

When the Trees are peeled in this manner, they are let alone for three years, in which time they have regained their Coats as before. The Trees grow wild, without planting and cultivating, and make a sort of Coppice of themselves; and re­quire no other hand than that of Nature to make them beneficial to Man.

There is besides this, a sort of Cinnamon, that grows in Malabar, and is called Canella de Matte, but it is a bastard kind, and nothing near so good.

None of the Spices, neither the Cinnamon I have been speaking of, nor the Cloves, Mace, Nut­megs, Saffron, &c. may be carried away by any private Person upon pain of death: And it hath cost some Men their Lives for attempting to bring them over; as I saw an instance of one who had got a small parcel of Borrobone, in order to take with him home, and was executed for the fact. This Borrobone is a Root growing in great plenty in Iava, and is made use of instead of Saffron by all the Inhabitants; and it hath all the Vertues of the best Oriental Saffron; it is cut and dried, and looks like Ginger.

The other Great and Rich Commodity of this Place is Pearls, which they fish for after this man­ner, The Company hath some thousands of Di­vers [Page 124] for that purpose, which are divided into so many Companies, and to each of them there is an Overseer. These Men are all divided, so many to each Boat, and so they go to the Oyster. Banks; where stripping themselves, every one of them tie a small Basket round their middle: Then they bind a piece of a certain Root they have, that is very hollow, and of an Oyly substance before their Mouths, so that it resists the water a good while, and gives them some time to breath. In this manner you shall see 'em all go down with wonder­ful quickness to the very bottom; where they fill their little Baskets with Oysters, then come up again as nimbly as may be; and when they have a good quantity of 'em, they carry them to Shore, where they lay 'em out in the Sun; there they open of themselves, and in them are found some­times many Pearls, sometimes none at all.

Some of these Divers, more skilful than the rest, will, without the help of those Roots, keep under water almost as long as they that use them.

When their days work is over, they come to Shore all together in good order, delivering faith­fully all the Pearls they have got to the Officers that are appointed by the Company, which finds all these Men with Provisions, and other Necessa­ries, and allows some of them pretty good Sala­ries besides.

In the whole fishing Season it cannot be but, there must happen several accidents, and that ma­ny Men lose their Lives in the Sea among the Rocks; you hear almost daily of some such mis­fortune, and every day gives subject of lamentati­on and complaint to some new made Widow or Orphan. Yet notwithstanding all this, there is no want of Men, ready to take to serve in this dange­rous employment, some being forced into it by the Dutch, and others by their necessities.

[Page 125] The Oysters in which the Pearls are found, are fine, white and smooth; I have known 'em find three hundred and odd of Pearls in one of 'em. When they have a mind to give them a fine co­lour, they take Rice, and beat it to dust with Salt, and rub them with that, and it makes them as bright as Christal, and so they will continue.

There is another sort of Oyster in Ceylon, which is called by the Inhabitants Changa, by us Mother of Pearl; this they polish very fine, and make fine drinking Cups of it. It is also of great use for many Ornaments, especially that which comes out of China, Bengal, Ormus, Gammaron, &c. as we see most frequently on those pieces of work, that come from thence into these parts of Europe.

There is likewise another manner of fishing, which is more tedious, and therefore less used. Yet I have seen it practised in a River that was thirty or forty Fathoms deep. Two Ships were laid aside of one another, at about eight or ten yards distance; and a Beam being laid across them, whereon there is a large Pully fix'd; they hang a large Bell thereon, in which the Man sits, (upon a cross Seat fix'd within the Bell) and so the Bell is let down; there is a little ringing Bell fixt upon the top of the Beam, and the Man hath a Cord with him fasten'd to that, and to his Body; as soon as he finds the Air begins to fail him, he pulls that little Bell, which is a token to the rest to pull him up; and when he hath clear'd that place, they move a little further, and fix there again till they have got all they can.

Having spent my time ashore, I went on board again, and then the other Master-Surgeon took his turn, and I went no more on shore, but only once, when my Comrade sent me word, that there was an Elephant of the Governor's was to shew a great many Tricks, of which I have given you a relati­on before.

[Page 126] In a matter of five Weeks time, all our business being done in Ceylon, we all got aboard, and set sail for Batavia again, where under the Almighty's Protection we arrived safe, after a kind Voyage of three Weeks. But we were no sooner arrived, and cast our Anchors, but we fell into an extream dan­ger. Our Butler, according to custom, and by the Skipper's Order, went down to fetch some Arack for the Seamen, and as he was drawing it out of the Bunghole, with a sort of small Pump, which they had for that purpose, either by a Snuff of the Candle, or by the Candle it self, the Arack took fire; and that spreading like Lightning, set the whole on sire; for the European Brandy doth not burn near so violently as Arack doth. All our Men were immediately at work to put it out, but all in vain: It got a head after so furious a manner, that it set fire on the Ship it self, and it was not long e're that was all in a flame. We had then nothing more to do, but to look after our selves, and to endea­vour to save our own lives; and it was a great mercy we could do that, for we could not save the least parcel of our Goods, nor one of our Chests, much less any of the Company's Goods. This was a mighty loss to the Company, who had abun­dance of Cinnamon, and rich Cinnamon-Oyl on board, all which helpt its own destruction, and in­creased the Fire: For no sooner had we left the Ship our selves, but the fire took in the Powder-room, where there was some Tuns of Powder, which blew up the Ship and tore it all to pieces, and threw some of its Cannon above a quarter of a mile up into the Air. Thus, when we thought our selves secure, and past all danger, and pleased our selves with the thoughts of our success, we were all on a sudden mortified with this great ac­cident, and all our Joys destroyed, with the utmost peril of all our Lives. But God be praised, that [Page 127] no Man got any harm, but every one of 'em were saved by means of a good number of Small Boats that were sent to our Relief. The Butler, who had been the occasion of this, was seized by the Judge Advocate, and for ought I know, was forced to serve the Company all his life long for no­thing.

After this I had Orders sent me to go upon the Fort, called the Hollandia, which is by the New Gate. There I had the care of the Sick and Wound­ed; and was set over a Young Man, whom I had formerly known at Dantzick, and was here mar­ried to a Daughter of one of the Kastizen.

These Kastizens are those that had a Dutch Fa­ther, and an Indian Mother. When an European marries one of these Kastizees, and hath any Chil­dren by her, they are called Mastizees; and these may wear the same Garb that the Dutch use. Of this latter sort, there are many thousands in and about Batavia.

An Old Freeman, whom I used to converse with frequently, and was very intimate with, undertook once in friendship to advise me to marry one of those Mastizins; who, as he told me, was worth above forty thousand Gilders. This proffer did not much displease me, but it was an Old Woman, he told me, and the Widow of an European Officer, who had served the Company. Hearing of her Age, made me not so eager to see her as I was at first, when he proffered to carry me to her. But the very seeing of her disgusted me so much from Ma­trimony, and my Friend, that I never had a cha­ritable thought of him ever after. I thought at the first of her, that it was an Ape of the larger size, that had been the wonder and pastime of Mankind for some hundred years: And asking him, whether he thought me fit for nothing but the procreation of Baboons, I left him in a [Page 128] mighty passion, and would not so much as speak a word more about the matter.

When an European designs to marry any of those People, He and the Woman must appear before the President of the Council, and bring their Con­tracts, (which are to be drawn up and signed by a Publick Notary) to him, to have his consent to the consummation of the Marriage; likewise a Me­morial of the Goods of each of them must be shewed him, and registred: And when they have obtained leave, the Wedding is generally kept about a fortnight after.

Besides, that this baulk had turned my Stomach for some time against Matrimony, I was not very much inclined to it, because a Man is obliged to settle, and spend his life in India. For I had a de­sign to be going further still; and by the means of some Presents, now and then, to obtain leave to go to Japan. For which purpose having made some close applications, and used the means I mentioned just now, I after some time had orders to get me ready to go thither, on board the Ship called the Asia, which was to go in a fortnight to Formosa, and from thence to Japan. So I went and provided my self with all necessaries for that Voyage, it being no small one.

According to the Orders given, we set sail in the Name of God, on St. Steven's day, with so fair a South-wind, that by the next morning we were got three miles beyond the great Island Java, and passed by the small Island Carousing.

The next day we saw the famous Coast of the Island Borneo, and leaving that on the right and Temabo, Tumbolan and Ananibo on the left, we steerd our Course between them, till we came into the open Sea of Paragoa; where leaving China on the left of us, we sailed directly upon For­mosa. But e're we could reach it, we had very [Page 129] bad weather for some days, and were in extream danger; for besides that, the Sea it self is one of the most dangerous by reason of the many Rocks there; we went thro' one of the dreadfullests Storms that was almost ever known; insomuch that we lost both Bolt-Sprit, and Sprit-sail, and one other Sail. As we were drove to this extremity, our Master and Steersman advised together, whether they should not make what way they could to an Island that lay on the right Hand, and within sight of us, to see if by that means we might not save the Men and Cargo. So it was agreed upon, that we should make thi­ther with only our Mainsail, But the night com­ing upon us, before we could come near it, we lost all hopes of safety; for the Tempest increased with the darkness of the night, and we were most of us in despair of our Lives, and for my part I never was less fond of Travelling, than at that time.

Yet my hope was, that as God had often preserved me from Eminent dangers before, so he would not forsake me then in this Condition; Thus we Con­tinued till near Morning, when our Seamen concei­ved some hopes of attaining to Land, and accordingly by break of day, we discovered the Island Manilba within two Miles of us, and by the help of the Light we made shift to weather the Gulf of Ma­nilba, which as soon as we were got into, we gave God Almighty thanks for his great Preservation.

Here we resitted our Ship as well as we could ex­pect, and got a new Mast, and in Eight days time we set Sail again with a fair wind Early in the morning, so that by next day we left China on the left, and the next Morning were in sight of For­mosa, whither we came on safe, and cast our An­chors before the Fort, called the Zealand.

Our Master went ashore, and did all his business in a fortnights time; during which time I was most [Page 130] upon Land, but it being needless for me to give any Account of that place, which hath been so Amply described by others; I will wave it, and pursue our Journey.

We set Sail again with a fair wind, and sail'd for Three days along the vast Coast of China, which we had still on the left of us, and when we came before Cucheu we cast our Anchors, and lay still Two days there.

And then continued our Course, so that the next day we passed by the Island of Chanquoish, and Steering between the Island of Fuego, &c. We in few days came before the City of Nangato, where we again returned God thanks, for having brought us thro' that dangerous Voyage. Notwithstand­ing that our ship was so tattered, and that we had lost 14 of our Men; and had 20 sick, among those of us that were left.

We were forced to leave our Chaplain behind us at Batavia, for the Javians will not suffer any Nation to bring any of their Teachers along with them into their Territorys. So that we were for­ced to make use of one of the gravest of our Com­pany, who was Assigned to read Prayers daily in the Ship, and assoon as we came to cast our An­chors, we had strict Orders given by the Master to hide the Book very carefully, that had been used in the Voyage; and to keep all other Religious Books close out of sight, lest we should go in danger of our Lives, if they should discover any of 'em about us.

CHAP. IX.

VVE had scarcely dropt our Anchors before Nangato, but we had some Japonneeses Boarding us with their Canows. They visited our Ship from Top to Bottom, by Order of the Empe­ror; and according to their Custom, secured all our Sails, and all our Powder and Bullets; dis­mounted our Cannon, and took off some of the Princi­pal Tackle of our Ship, and carried them on Shore with them. Thus they serve all the Ships that come thither, and thus they had done to 3 or 4 English and French Ships, that lay there: But every bit they take away is faithfully returned, when they are ready to go off again.

When we had begun to unlade, a parcel of Japon­neeses came to us to offer us some Women, and askt us, if we would not have some of 'em while [Page 132] we stay'd there: But no body hearkned to their Proposal but the Master, and the Book-keeper.

The goods were unladen by the Japonneeses, of which a certain number is allotted to each Ship: So that our Men had little or nothing to do. The Master went on Shore, as soon as the Ship was come nearer to the Town, and lay'd up there: But he came back every day an Hour at least, or Two, before night: For all the while that we lay here, the Japonneeses held a continual Watch aboard all the Ships that were in the Port. I can­not undertake to give you a large Account of Ja­pan, because it would require a larger Volume then I intend; nor do I think it necessary, because so many have done it before me; but what I obser­ved most particularly amongst 'em, will, I hope, be sufficient to satisfy the Readers Curiosity.

When I came on Shore, the first place I entred into, was a publick house, where they drunk Tea, and that very plentifully; having rested there a while with my Companions, we went to take a view of the Town; where we saw abundance of Joyners, and Japanners Shops, set out with Wonderful vari­ety of rich and Exquisite work, as Scrutores Cabi­nets &c. inlay'd with silver and gold, and most admirably lackerd, all which made as fine a Show, as ever I saw. Some of these pieces of Work were valued at some Thousands of Gilders. In that kind of Work they out-do all Indians whatever, and indeed in all manner of Ingenuity and Cunning, insomuch that it was a Proverb among the Dutch, that tho' a Dutch Man was Cunning, be might go to School to a Japoneese.

They do not trouble themselves with Linnen or Silk Manufactures; by reason that they are brought over to them in such abundance from other Coun­treys, [Page 133] that they have 'em as Cheap, as in the places where they are made.

Our Ship the Asia, was laden with such kind of things, and took in Exchange, what Japan affords, as Copper Stafetiens, Silver, Gold &c.

Their Manner of Saluting us seemed very strange to me at first; for whereas the Chineeses, and other East-Indians used to shew their respect by clapping their hands together against their Breast or Fore-head, these People pull'd off their Shoes, and set them­selves down on the Ground, for they look upon it as the greatest piece of Incivility to receive any Per­son Standing.

Whereas other Nations think fair Hair, and white Teeth great Ornaments; these are of a quite diffe­rent Opinion, and think none agreable, but those who have the Blackest Hair and Teeth: and they use all the Art they can to make them so; their Notion in this being directly opposite to ours, take­ing Black to be the Livery of Mirth and Pleasant­ness, and white of Grief and Mourning. They have but very little Hair on their Heads, being always carefull to pluck it out by the Roots from their Youth. In short, all their Customs, Language, Dress &c. is as different as can be from all other People.

There is a certain Antipathy between them and the Chineeses, they cannot bear with one another; when they go to War against the Tartars or the Chineeses, they never give Ground, and will sooner be Cut into a Thousand pieces than Fly: and if Thousands, 10 or 100000 are Cut down, they are immediately Recruited: For their Law forbids them to yield to, or Flee from, any Enemy. Their Countrey is so Populous, that one who hath not seen it cannot hardly believe it

The Sea Port of Nangato, was at our first coming so full of Birds, that it was almost covered with 'em, [Page 134] and all the Ships that lay there as it were Blockt up with them; they were very Tame, insomuch that as our Boats went to and fro to Land, they would but just give us way: the Reason of that vast Quantity is, because they never kill any of 'em to Eat, for their Law forbids them strictly to Eat any thing that is Tame, as Oxen, Cows, Hens, &c. But any thing that is Wild, they may and do Eat. So that these Fowls being harmless, as well as Tame, they do not so much as disturb them; which makes 'em Increase to that prodigious number. They are in Shape and Colour much like our wild Pigeons, and have the same feet with Ducks.

The night before I was resolved to go on Board again, there fell out an unlucky Accident in our Ship. Some of the Seamen had saved their Porti­ons of Arack for some days, designing to have a good Quantity together for Punch, and the place where they went to drink it being very dark, they got themselves a Lamp, which they lighted, and Imprudently hung up upon one of their Hammocks; One of them being a little Intoxicated, and lazy, lay'd himself down in that Hammock, and the rest of the Company pressing him to drink in his Turn, he did now and then take his Cup, but at last his hand growing more and more unsteady, he spilt part of his Cup over the Lamp; which by Misfor­tune hung over their Bowl. So that the whole taking Fire, and they not in a Capacity to look carefully about them, the Fire took hold of the Hammocks, and burnt several of them. But by the Assistance of the other Seamen it was happily stopt from doing any further Damage.

The men who had occasioned this were immedi­ately clapt up in Irons: And some days after they were brought to publick Punishment, according to the Custom of the Sea: Which was to receive from every [Page 135] Person of the Ship 90 Blows on the Breech, with an Anchor Rope.

And had the Master not been very favourable, it would have fared much harder with them. How­ever, as mild as the punishment was, it made them in such a Condition, that they were forced to keep their Beds for several Weeks; and most like to Die: Neither could any of 'em ease Nature, or make Water, for several days.

While we lay here, I was Invited on Board an English Merchant-Man, and there had great proffers made me if I would have gone along with them; the proffer was the more Advantagious, because they had lost their Surgeon in the Voyage, and had but a Young raw Boy with them that could hardly spread a Plaister. But I would by no means heark­en to their Proposal, because it was as much as my Life was worth, and what was yet more, I should have been Perjured if I had accepted of it, and for­sook the Company.

In this Port dyed three of our Men, and a Car­penters Boy. Some Japonneeses carried them out of the Harbour in a small Boat, into open Sea, where they threw 'em over: For they are so far from suffering any Forreigners to be Buried among them, that they will not permit them to be thrown so much as in the Water that is near them. We had here such a Terrible Storm all on a sudden, that if our Ship had not been well provided with Anchors, and the Tempests lasted but a very little while; it had certainly been lost. For in that lit­tle while, of four Anchors that we had, we lost Two.

The English Ship I was just now speaking of, foundered, at that time 7 of her Men were drowned, and the rest very hardly escaped. The next day they refitted our Ship again; during which time, I had an opportunity of going on Shore again for three or Four days.

[Page 136] In that time there happened to come some Jug­lers to Nangato, who shewed the finest and the most dexterous Tricks that I ever saw, both of Le­gerdemain, and of Activity of Body; but of what they Showed of the latter an Instance or two, will not be unacceptable. One of these Fellows had a Bam­boo Cane, of about 6 foot length tied to his Middle, and as he was Standing still, another Fellow leap­ing on a sudden with his feet upon his Shoulders, climbed up to the Top of the Cane; and there lay'd himself out at length upon the Knob, which was on the top of the Cane, of about the bigness of a Goose's Egg, stretching out his Arms and Leggs, and whiring round 3 or 4 times. The Man upon whom the Cane was tied fast, walking all the while to and fro, and never offering to touch the Cane with his hand.

After this there came a second who stood upon his head, with his feet directly up in the Air, and then a third came and got up and stood upon the Soles of his feet.

Then another set himself firm upon his Leggs, and there came one of them and stood upon his head, with his feet up in the Air.

Lastly, they took a Board all stuck with sharp Nails about two spans length; over which a Fellow raised himself upon his hands so neatly, that his head did not touch one of the Spikes. These Tricks being somewhat extraordinary, and far more surprising than what I have yet seen in Europe, I thought it might not be amiss to give you an Ac­count of them, tho' I am sensible that some who think all Impossible which they have not seen, will be apt to censure it, rather than believe it.

This last time of my being ashore, I chanced to come by one of their Religious Assemblys, into which my Curiosity led me to go, in hopes of see­ing [Page 137] some strange Custom: But there was nothing ve­ry peculiar. There only came in one of their Priests, who set himself down in the midst of the place, and a great many People being gathered about him, he made a kind of Sermon or Oration to them, which I hearkned to very diligently; but could not under­stand a word of what he said. Nor would any one of that Assembly give me any answer when I asked them what it was that he had been saying to them, but all went off like Mutes; they do not at all care to enter into any discourse with Christians concerning Religi­on, which I often attempted to bring them up­on: And indeed it is not safe for Christians to talk to them on that Subject, as we had all sufficiently been Informed 'ere we came to Land here. Yet I could not forbear to touch a little a upon't sometimes, with one particular Acquaintance I had got there, who was a grave, sober, understanding Man: And he would often express very favourable Sentiments of the Christian Religion, and did not stick to tell me once (fetching a deep sigh) that he wished he could be at liberty to Embrace it, but withal conjuring me not to discover him; because it would cost him his Life, if it was known that he had such a desire.

My time now grew short; and I made haste to buy what I wanted; but when I came to look about in their Shops and Ware-houses, I was so Tempted with the sight of their Fine-works that I bought a great deal more than I at first designed to do. What I bought, tho' of the Finest-work, I had exceeding Cheap: Which was another Encouragement to me to lay out my Money. These Work-men are but very poor, as indeed all the Trades-men in the Country are. Some of 'em do not live better than Beggers, and a little Charity Transports them into such humble Ac­knowledgments, that if at any time I gave any of 'em the value of Two-pence of our money, I could [Page 138] hardly keep them from falling upon their knees before me to thank me. There is no middle Rank of Men among them, of any value, even the Mer­chants being not lookt upon: But on the other side, their Gentry or Nobility are valued and Respected at a more than ordinary Rate: And in their gate and behaviour one may observe such a Grandeur, or rather Haughtiness, as is scarce to be seen any where else.

Our Ship being now full laden with Copper, Lack­er'd work, Jappan-money, and other Commoditys, the Japponeeses came again to us, first to visit the Ship, and then restored us all our Cannon, Powder and Bullets, and our Sails; all which they brought us on Board again, and the next day, we set sail out of the Port, tho' it snowed hard, and the Wind was some­what Rough.

The next Morning we saw three Suns in the Hea­vens; but the Brightness of the two unusual Phoeno­menas the two seeming Suns was not comparable to that of the real Sun; all three of them were seen within a large Rainbow.

The 2d. 3d. and 4th day we failed by the Island Ximo, and coming to a small Island of about 6 miles compass, we cast Anchor, to wait there for a Wind. Some our Men went on Shore, and brought back some Eggs with 'em, which Water-fowls lay usually about the Shore. They were as large as Geese eggs, and we found 'em extraordinary good.

The next day we went off with a good Wind; 2 or 3 days after, we were all of us Surprized to see something Floating, and hundreds of Fowl upon it; but coming nearer to it, we found it was a vast big Fish, cover'd with those Birds.

We found here but 18 or 20 fathoms Water; so that we were dayly and continually forced to use the Plummet: Till a fresh Storm came upon us which obliged us with all speed to hand all our sails.

[Page 139] The Tempest was so furious for a time, that we thought no otherwise but we should have been swal­lowed up: But God Almighty, whose Compassions never fail towards them that call upon him faithful­ly, was pleased to deliver us out of our distress, by stilling the Winds, and after some time we came to a small low sandy Island, called Kruys Island, where we dropt 2 of our Anchors.

In this stress of Weather we lost one Man, who was Tossed off the Maintop Mast into the Sea. The Billows carried him quite out of our sight, else we had been obliged by our Sea Articles to have put out the long Boat and to have gone after him, tho' we run the risk of loosing all the Men of the Ship. But be­ing we could not see him, we were not obliged to seek after him; and it was more prudent to give him over for lost, than to venture 7 or 8 Men more when there was no Prospect of doing any good.

It Snowed very hard: so that we lay still here 2 days, and on the 3d. day, we set sail directing our Course towards Formosa. In our way thither we came by a large Rock almost cover'd o're with Fowl, we went up to it with our long Boat, and caught above a hundred of 'em: if we would have stayed a while, we might have caught thousands, for they hardly fled away from us: But most of 'em crept into their nests, which were nothing, but the natural Cavitys of the Rock, without any straw or any kind of Lining in them; they being so easy to come at, made us conclude, that they had hardly ever been disturbed by any Man.

At Noon our Steers-man took the Suns altitude, by which we found that we were within 40 Leagues of the Island Formosa, whither we were Steering. It was as fine Weather, as we could wish; but the Wind being against us, we were forced to clap upon the Wind to make the best of it, and get a little forward, [Page 140] till we came to have the Wind upon the beam, which in 3 days time brought us before the Road of Zea­land. There we put some Rice ashore, and stay­ed but a day and a half, and at night we put out of the Bay, Firing 3 Guns to take our leave. While our Gunner was doing this, he had left a measure of Powder in the Boys hands who stood behind him, and a Seaman coming by with a Pipe of Tabacco in his Mouth, going to peep into the Powder case, let fall some of his Tobacco amongst it, which burnt him dreadfully, and threw the Boy backwards to the ground. It was well this did not happen in a greater parcel, and that there was no more harm done. But for this the Seaman was taken, and was severely puss'd: That is done by laying 'em flat on their Belly, and stricking them with a Rope across the Breech.

The next day we Steer'd between two high Rocks, that were about half a League asunder: The Wind from that time continued fair for us during the space of 8 days, in which we passed by the Island Manilha, then we came into a Wind, which was very trouble­some to us; for it filled the Air with nasty stuff as thick as Snow, this Wind came over some small Islands that lay 2 Miles on the South of us, which are called the Stof Elyanden. When the Wind is pretty high, and sits in that corner, if a Ship goes too near them, it is almost enough to Smother Men. But God be thanked we came safe thro' it, and with a favourable Wind came into the Sea of Para­gua; we kept on our Course to Borneo, and from thence to Great Java, whence we quickly reach'd Batavia; which happily compleated our Voyage in 5 Months.

Being Arrived, our Ship was unladen: Our sick Men carried to the Hospital, and I at the same time went on Shore, and took all my Medicaments with [Page 141] me, but we had not been here above a fortnight, but an opportunity offerd it self to me, either to go along with a small Fleet to the Straight of Sunda, or else with another which was to cruise between Malacca and Sumatra. I had my choice, and having declared my desire rather to go with the latter, I re­ceived my Commission. The reason why these two small Squadrons were sent thither was, because we were informed, that the French and English being disguised at the disturbance we had given them in Bantam, were coming out against us.

After we had been some Weeks a Cruising there, now toward Sumatra, then towards Mallaca, some­time to the Island St. Maurice and Madagascar, with­out Meeting with any either French or English, Captain Vander Bors, who was our Commadore or Ad­miral, resolved to go with the Fleet to Achem, and to lye still there, only he orderd that one Ship should be Cruising about, and bring Intelligence, and the whole Squadron which consisted of 11 Ships should take it by turns.

While we lay here we had a most dreadful Storm for the space of 6 whole days. The Sciam was cast away, Men and all, except a few of 'em. The Zealand having lost all her Anchors, was drove upon a Shelf, where she stuck. We went in haste to help her Men, and we did save some of 'em: But at last the two long Boats which we had sent to their Relief being Tossed violently against each other, Split in pieces, and all the Men in them were drowned, which were about 130.

As for our Ship, we were forced to Swaddle it with a four double Cable Rope, lest it should have Split, by the violence of the Waves, and to keep constantly Pumping, six and six at a time, changing Men every quarter of an hour. And whereas one Man used to suffice at the helm, we were forced to [Page 142] have 10 to keep our Anchors from twisting altoge­gether and breaking. The worst of this was, that we were not far from Land, and we were just of the Windward of'm: For we had been much safer if we had been in open Sea. But that is safe enough every where which God takes into his keeping, and it pleased him at the end of 6 days to send us a fine Calm again, wherefore we went immediately to Pray­ers, and gave God thanks that he had thus deliverd us.

The next thing we did was to give the Men some Refreshment, one chief part of which is always a good portion of Arack, and that being done we sent word to Batavia, what a poor condition we were in, to which we had for answer, that we might come away for Java again: For that two Ships were lately come thither from Holland, which had brought information, that there was no report there of any likely-hood of War, and that we needed not to fear it in those Parts: But only that England required some Millions of Money from Holland, for the dam­age the English had sustained by their means in Ban­tam; and that in case the Dutch did not come to a Composition, a War would most certainly follow.

While we lay still before Achem, I went often to Shore to refresh my self with the excellent Fruits of that Country. The Religion, Manners Customs, &c. of that People are much the same with the Javians.

In a Village not far from thence, where none but Fisher-men live, I saw Men that had one of their Leggs as big as most Mens middles; when they used to hold them up, it would Shade their whole Body from the Sun, and yet would these Men run as fast as Horses. I sometimes layd my hand on those Leggs of theirs, and they felt just like a Spunge.

By that Village runs a very fair and pleasant Ri­ver, which empties it self into the Sea, near the place where we lay at Anchor, along the sides of [Page 143] which are a great many strange Tree, which bear a Fruit they call Wild Ananas 3 times a year, when the Fruit is ripe it is extream pleasant.

Our Fleet, which consisted now of no more than 9 Ships, set sail for Batavia, where we Arrived in a fortnight: And found the other Fleet come three days before us. I had changed my Ship, and was in Business in the Hollandia, where I had a great deal of work, and most of my patients Afflicted with sore Leggs. The Surgeon that did belong to it dyed in this Voyage, and I the rather chose that Ship, because it had already received Orders to go to the Isle of Bali.

Before it went off I went to Shore to take my leave of my old Acquaintance; and there met with one that was lately come out of Europe, a Native of Ulm, a place I was well acquainted with; and it being a day which was kept there as a Festi­val, we kept it here also amongst our selves, and diverted our selves very well: Among other news he brought over with him, the most considerable was, that the Turks were beaten from before Vi­enna; which did not a little contribute to our Joy and Satisfaction.

CHAP. X.
Account of his Voyage to Surat, and return to Ba­tavia which he leaves again to go to Bengal, Pe­gu and Aracan. Roses of Jericho.

IN two days time we set Sail with a fair Wind: And the same day before Sun-set we passed by the Island Onrust, then came between the Island Toppers-hoedie, and Bantam along Great Java into open Sea: And in 18 days time we reached the Island Bali, and cast our Anchors before the Capital Town of the same name.

In our former Voyage to Banda and Amboina, we passed by this place and came within 8 Miles of it; But the Wind being then so fair for us, we would not touch here, but made the best of our way for­ward: Otherwise we should have called here of Course, as most Ships do, to take in fresh Water, and other Refreshments.

Here we unladed our Ship, and exchanged the Commodities for those of the Countrey: Which were chiefly, Silk and Cotton wrought, most of the Peo­People [Page 145] here being employed in Spinning and Wea­ving.

They are a very Strong sort of People, somewhat Blacker than the generality of other Indians are. They use no other Weapon when they fight but Ar­rows, which they carry always about them in a kind of quiver. These Arrows are so contrived, that when the Man who is Wounded with 'em goes to draw them out, they break; besides that, they are so Artificially Poyson'd, that it is present death without any Remedy.

They permit themselves to be sold, to any Nati­on over all the Indies, for Slaves; while I was there I bought a young Girl of a Merchant, for 18 Rix­dollers, and took her with me to Batavia, where I could make her earn me two Shillings or 18 Pence a day.

They are exceeding Brutish People, and the Simplest of Heathens. Their God is what ever they first cast their Eye on in the Morning, so that it is still variable, sometimes a Cow, sometimes a Tree, sometimes a Dog, or a Bird, &c. This they keep in veneration for all that day, and pray to it with great earnestness upon all emergencies.

They know nothing of Marrying amongst 'em. But as it is among Brutes, Men and Women are in common to each other, which makes the Country very Populous. Yet each man hath always some one whom he looks upon as a Principal Consort, and by the Custom of the Country she is obliged to such a severe and Rigorous Ceremony upon the death of her Mate, as would very ill go down with those who make a profession of more faithfulness and a more Honourable observance of their more so­lemn Engagements: And I have seen them acquit themselves of it with the greatest Resolution ima­ginable; I mean the Burning themselves, when their reputed Husbands Corps is committed to the Flames.

[Page 146] The manner of it is thus. When the Man is dead, they sow him up in a Cotton cloath, and car­ry him up to the Top of the House, where they keep him four or five days; during which time the Woman hath time to prepare her self, that is, to take her leave of her friends; and all the while some old Women who are hired for that purpose, are sitting at the door, crying and howling. Then they dig a great hole near the River side, which they fill with Wood, and having laid the Corps up­on it, they set fire to the Wood. The Woman all this while having taken her farewel of all her Rela­tions, and having got a whole bundle of presents and recommendations to their friends in the other World, she binds up all her tokens together in a Cotton Cloath, and when the Fire is throughly lighted, she throws her self therein.

These tokens are different according to the Con­dition, Inclination, or degree of Relation of the Person they send to; as one Man shall send his Wife Money, the other Flowers, the other some other small present, all which she promises to deliver faithfully. There stands round the Fire several Per­sons with their Instruments of Copper and other Metals, on which they make such a horrid noise, that there is no hearing of the Womans Shreeks, be­sides there are Men ready with Vessels of Oyl to pour into the Fire to make it Burn more vehement­ly, that she may the sooner be out of her pain.

When they are thus consumed to ashes, they are taken up very clean and thrown into the River with another consort of howling and crying. I know there hath been several Accounts of this given by others after a different Manner, but what I have here given is as I have been an eye witness of it my self.

Here grows some of the sinest Fruits in the World, and in great plenty, so that I eat my fill of 'em. These Fruits are a Refreshment of no small value to [Page 147] an European, and it makes him have a much great­er esteem for those remote and Barbarous Isles, and it is very often the only thing for which one would value them; it is as observable, that the more Bar­barous the Country is, the more it excels in choice and delicate Fruits, as this place may well serve for an example, and all the Isles thereabouts, which are Inhabited by the most Brutish sort of Men. And some of 'em by Men who devour one another, and make a feast of their Victory; as at Susu, which lyes here hard by, and likewise in the Country of the Hot­tentots near the Cape of Good Hope. I have often wisht for some of them since I parted with them, and that they had agreed more with our Climate, so that we could have them in Europe.

Our business being done, we left Bali; And quick­ly gained the Cost of Great Java, from which Ba­li lyes but eight Leagues distance; and in eight days Sail we arrived at Balavia again. We had all the way the sight of the Island we left, and some­times could see over it in a very clear day, it not being above sixteen Miles in compass.

When we came to Shore I was very kindly rece­ved, and placed into the Hospital at Batavia; there be­ing just then a vacancy by the death of the chief Surgeon of that place, the Council was pleased to choose me in his stead, and to give me the care of it. Here I had five Masters Surgeons under me, and my Station was every way much more agreable than hi­therto it had been; but that which pleased me the best, was that I had both time, and opportunity to serve God; and tho' it was only the Reformed Re­ligion that was exercised there, yet I took a great deal of Satisfaction in going to serve God with them, when their Assemblys met; which was three times a Week. But I could rather have wished there had been a Church of my own perswasion (which is the same that Luther maintaind and profess'd) for [Page 148] then I believe I should never have troubled my self to have come back into Holland again, and I dare say that thousands more would willingly continue there, rather than undertake such dangerous Voyages to come back, if they could but have the free exer­cise of their Religion, as they have in Holland, where all Religions are tolerated; and it was ever a wonder to me, that the same liberty was not granted in Batavia, which is as wisely and politi­cally govern'd as any City in the World, and keeps as good an order in all things, notwithstanding the great variety of its Inhabitants; having within it, besides the Natives of the several parts of the Indies, vast numbers of Turks, Persians, Tartars, Chineeses, Siamers, Moors, Japoneeses, Armenians, Arabi­ans, &c. Yet is there no other Religion allowed, but that of the Reformed, and at their Assemblys are all the Soldiers obliged to be present, of what perswasion soever they be, and forced to be there every Sunday by Turns, under the Eye of an Officer, and then they put their Shoes on, whereas they wear 'em but-rarely otherwise.

There are besides the Church in the Castle two other Churches, where they Preach in the Portu­gueeze and the Maleysh Languages the first for the conveniency of the Burghers, the other of the mixt Nations, who generally speak that Language.

Yet for all this liberty of Religion is not given, there are many hundreds, who when their time is ex­pired, bind themselves a fresh rather than venture the danger of going home again, tho' they lay their Re­ligion aside for ever for't. The frequent news of of Ships being cast away, and loosing one half of the Fleets, and sometimes the whole ones, increa­ses their fears daily. While I was at Batavia my self, I sent a Letter to my Relations, by one who intended to pass thro' Ulm, where they lived: And [Page 149] of this Fleet he went in, half was lost by the way, tho' he got safe home, and to my great surprize brought me an answer to it himself, about two years after that: Just as I was preparing to come into Holland my self, he told me he was come over again to end his days there, for he found that the Air of his Native Country would no more agree with him.

While I was thus settled here, I got very con­siderable practice among the Free-men, besides my fixt employment; and especially among the Chinee­ses, whom I found by much the most generous sort of People and best to deal with. It was common for them to give me three or four Rixdollars for letting of 'em Blood, and forty or fifty Gilders for curing the least Wound. But of all the Patients I ever had, I cannot but mention one, who for the od­ness of the Punishment which was inflicted on his Adversary, is well worth the Relating.

I was once in a Chineese's house drinking of Tea, which is drunk in great quantitys there in Tea-hou­ses, very good and very Cheap. On a sudden two Chineeses fell to high words, till at last one of'em took a pot full of Boyling hot Water, and threw it all upon the other, and all Scalded his Face, and some other parts. I took the Man home, and cu­red him in a few days, for which he gave me thirty Rixdollars ready Money and did me all the kind services he could, often inviting me to his house, and treating me very civilly. The other who had used him thus basely, was Condemned to have twelve of the longest Hairs of his Beard pull'd out, or else to pay thirty Golden Cubanz which is in value 300 Rixdollars (each Cubanz, being worth 10 Rixdollars, and the Golden Coyn of the Great Mogul's) but this Chineese being a Man of Substance, chose rather to pay the Money than to part with so many precious hairs out of his Beard, and they are all of them so fond [...] [Page 148] [...] [Page 149] [Page 150] of that Ornament, that it would have been as Rea­sonable to have ask him for twelve of his Teeth. Besides this, he was obliged to defray all the charges my Patient had been at, and to stand to all damages.

There was all this while a fine Ship preparing for a Voyage to Surat, and I having a great desire to go that Voyage, because it is lookt upon as very safe, and hardly ever attended with bad Accidents, I ordered my affairs so as to get leave to go: Upon which I sent my things on Board the Gelderland, for that was the name of the new Ship which I was to go in.

On Easterday in the Morning, all things being ready, we set Sail by break of day, and took our farewell with three Guns, but we reacht no further by night than the Island Onrust, and for want of a Wind, were forced to lye still there four days. At last we weighed our Anchors, having a small gale of Wind, which carried us past the Isle Sumatra: And as we came by the Island Engano, it ceased and left us without a breath of Wind. Thus we left the Ship to run a drift, and our Men were all idle for three or four days, during which time we had Engano still in sight of us, for we moved but very slowly.

In this while many of our Men took notice that one of our Souldiers (for we had fourteen of them a Board besides Seamen) a Venetian Named Nico­lao, used to be frequently with two Boys that be­long'd to the Ship, and those three would meet in private ever and anon. The Boat-Swain took a particular notice of 'em, and watcht 'em narrowly; at last he discoverd the end of their Meeting, and Surprized them in the Act of Sodomy; Upon which he went and informed the Master of what had passed. Immediately after the Venetian, and both the Boys, one of about eighteen, the other about twelve year of age, were seized, and layd up in Chains, [Page 151] and upon Examination they all confess'd that they had been guilty of that abominable Sin ever since their departure from Batavia. I and the other Master Surgeon were then of the Council, and by them, we were orderd to visit them, and we found it but too true, upon which the Sentence was pronounced against all three of 'em, viz. that they should be cast into the Sea, and accordingly early the next Morning after Prayers, the Venetian was brought forth: And one of the Boys tied to his right side, and the other to his left, and in that Manner thrown in altogether, and were never more seen by us.

The Boys were very penitent, and much affected with their guilt, and Prayed with the Chaplain very heartily, and shed Tears in abundance: So that there were but few of us, that could refrain weep­ing at the sight of 'em. But the Venetian was not at all concerned; and when he stood upon the Plank, ready to be thrown off, he begged for nothing but a draught of Arack. The Master told him, he should have drink enough in an Instant, and desired him to consider of his latter end, and to provide for futuri­ty, but all Remonstrances were in vain to the last, and so he was thrown over.

There was another, who was suspected of the same crime; and upon Examination he confess'd he had intended it, but never was guilty of the act, him the Council order'd to remain in Chains, and to be set on Shore on the next Wild Island we should come at, which was Ouro, which was accordingly done; when we Landed him there, we left him some Water, Bisket and Tobacco to serve him some days, and a Gun; he begged heartily that we would ra­ther take away his life: But it was not granted.

So we went forward with so fair a gale of Wind, that we lost sight of that Island before night. We passed on between Ceylon, which we left on the right, and the Maldivy Islands which lay on the [Page 152] left, and Steering round the Coasts of Malabar, and Bisnagar, we came with good speed to Surat after five Weeks sail, where we cast Anchor.

Our Ship was immediately unladen to make room for other goods: And our Merchants went on Shore to their apartment, which is always ready for 'em here, as it is in all those places, where they have Factories: And there they have all necessary Ware­houses; Apartments, Servants, &c. fit to receive them when ever they come.

Surat lyes about 800 Leagues from Batavia, and belongs to the Emperour of Indostan, otherwise cal­led the Great Mogul, who calls himself Lord of all the Indies.

It is remarkable and strange to observe how the Seasons of the Year are here divided, their Winter on­ly shows it self by its constant Rains, for half a year in one part of the Country; during which time it Rains almost daily more or less; and while this sort of Winter lasts in one part, it is Summer and fair in the other parts of the Countrey, so that they have it by turns. The days and nights are always near equal, of twelve hours each, what difference there is, is not perceptible.

All this while our Ship was taking her lading in apace, but it was not great, most of it was Persian Money; when she had all in, we set Sail without delay with the first fair Wind, and in fourteen days time we passed again by the Coast of Malabar now on the left. Thence we sail'd about the Cape of Gomori, which lyes extended to the South, and after that, we came to Punto de Galle, which is very com­modious for all the Ships that pass that way to take in any Refreshments. There we took in fresh Water and other necessarys. We found there an English Ship, called the Sina, come from Bengal, and bound for Cameron in the Persian Sea.

We laid four days here, before Punto de Galle: [Page 153] And then the Wind blowing fair for us, we run out of the Haven, and passed the next day by the Maldivy Islands, of which it is computed that they are above a thousand in number, and in seven days sail we came to the Island Ouro, where we had left the Souldier. We cast Anchor there, and sent out the long Boat with some Men to look after him, but they could not hear or see ought of him: So we continued our Course towards Great Java.

While we were in open Sea about 100 Leagues off Malacca, we had during three Weeks time such a Calm, that we thought we should never have had a breath of Wind more. So that in all that time we did not get a League forwards, only the Sea Wind moved us a little to and fro, but did us no good. For, tho' it may seem strange to those that are Ignorant of it, it oftentimes happens that the Main Sea, especially that part of it, where no Bot­tom is to be found, is in a very great agitation, tho' there be no Wind at all to be perceived: And I my self have often seen in the stillest VVeather, the VVaves heap'd up on Hills, and so furiously high, that no Storm can raise them higher, and of­ten times there is as great Danger, and as many Ships are there cast away; especially those that are not well laden.

During this Calm, we suffer'd more than ever we could have done in the most Terrible Tempest, for we were under the Line, and the excessive heat cau­sed several to fall Sick, and what was worse still was, that we had made no great provision of Water by reason it was lookt upon to be but a short Voy­age; So that with heat and thirst, we were all in danger of being suffocated. Our Water was now so far spent, that a draught of it cold not be had un­der a couple of Rixdollars. At least it came to that pass, that there was a necessity of setting two Centinells to guard the Water-Cask; out of which [Page 154] they used to distribute every man his portion, and to set four Locks upon it. And when the Portions were given out in the Morning, it was not above one quarter of the measure that it used to be.

In this miserable Condition I have been forced to to give two dozen of my Silver Buttons off my Wast­coat, for one draught of Water, and to gnaw bits of Wood, hoping I might suck some moisture out of it. In short, it put us all upon trying all the ways we could imagine to allay our excessive drought; we had now but six Barrels of Water left, and we saw no prospect of Relief, so that many of us often wish'd that our Ship would sink down right with us, we neglected not to call upon God, and to send up our Prayers to him constantly thrice a day, that he would have Compassion on us; and as this was more becoming Christians than the rash wishes which our desolate Condition forced from some, if not the greater part of us: So it was that undoubtedly which was most Effectual, for our merciful God sent us a seasonable relief, and surely because we cried unto him in our trouble, he delivered us out of our Distress.

The Moon, which shined very bright, was all of a sudden a little over cast, and at length a Black Cloud came, which deprived us wholly of the sight of it, and gave us mighty hopes that we were go­ing to have some Rain. This gave us all new life, and set us all at wotk to spread out our Sails ready, sastening them by the four corners, with a Bullet in the Middle, to receive the VVater; thus we stay­ed between hope and fear for about three hours; at last the weather grew very cool, and the Clouds gathering together, the Sky was all darkned, and suddenly the rain came pouring down upon us: But never were Men more heartily glad tobe wet to the skin. The first VVater that came thro' the Sails was very bitter; so we threw that away: and then [Page 155] we fell to filling of our Vessels, which done, we hoysted up our wet Sails, and run briskly before the Wind.

One may Imagine what Joy it was to every one of us to have our miserable Condition brought to such an happy End; nor did we fail to give due thanks to the great Author of it, who had so mer­cifully, heard us. VVith this VVind we were not long 'ere we reach'd the Island of Engano, so that we after three Months Sailing passed the Streight of Sunda, and arrived happily on the Road before Ba­tavia.

The Master and the Steward, who had been so imprudent as not to provide the Ship with more Wa­ter, was called to an Account for it, and punished for their carelesness, and had a good round fine laid upon them, which was to be deducted out of their wages, by little and little till the whole was payd.

This same Ship being design'd for Bengal, Pegu and Aracan in a very little while, and some of the goods being ready to load, I left all my things on Board, designing to go that Voyage too. And ha­ving provided my self with what Medicaments I wanted, in about a Months time we left Batavia, and came in nine days before Pegu, where we cast Anchor. We had but very little business there, so that we stayed there but three days, and set Sail again, and came to Aracan; and thence went to Bengal, which is but eight Leagues further. There we cast Anchor just at the mouth of the River Chaor, which mixes with the Ganges, about a mile before it throws it self into the Sea of Bengal. About eight Leagues up that River, lyes Verma, a Town of con­siderable Trade: Some of our Merchants sailed up to it; But I went not with 'em.

About forty Miles from Bengal, between the Ri­ver Ganges and Perselis lyes a place, called Loha­nack; where there are whole Fields of those Flow­ers [Page 156] called Roses of Jericho, or the Rose of Jerusa­lem, and the Lady's Rose. They are quite green; when you gather them, they close together straight and keep so, while they are dry, and when you put them into Water, they open as at first. They are good for many uses; but excellent for Women in La­bour, and facilitate the Birth, by being only put un­der the Woman. I could have had abundance of 'em for little value, of the Inhabitants. They say the seed of these was brought over by a King out of Syria, where they grow in abundance about Je­richo. I do not find they grow any where, but in these places I have mention'd; they have endeavour­ed to Transport them into several places, especial­ly in Great Java: But they die and come to no­thing, the ground ought to be very full of nitre.

As to what Relates to Pegu Aracan or Bengal, I will not undertake to give a description of either of the places, because I did not stay there long, and besides they may be seen at large in Linschooten's Travels, who hath been very particular in his ac­count of'em.

CHAP XI.

AFter our Ship had got in her Complement of Sugar, Salt-peter, and Opium, we set Sail and went from Bengal to Masulipatam, belonging to the King of Galconda, whose Son keeps his residence at Pentipoli, lying not far from thence.

The Inhabitants are most of the Mahometan Re­ligion. The Air is very healthy one half of the year, when the Northern winds blow constant: But the Southern winds, which blow the other half of the year, fill the Country with distempers. We were theré during this latter Season, and felt the dismal Effects of it. We had already lost nine of our Men, and the rest were most of'em ill of Agues or Drop­sies. But blessed be God, I was not at all indispo­fed. The ill State we were in, made us make all the haste we could to be gone, and hoysting Sail, we departed, and came in four days time before the Island Nicoparas, here we sailed in very great danger; for all the Sea there abouts is full of Rocks [Page 158] that lyc three or four fathoms under Water, and little small Islands, some of which are almost cover'd with Water. A little before we came by there, the Lion, a Ship of 470 Tun, run upon one of them, and was Split in pieces: But we past them all safe, and Steerd between Sumatra and Malacca, and thus got to Batavia; where I return'd to my former post. I used to go and visit the other Surgeons that had the care of some small Forts about us, and when they had any Patients that were dangerously ill, and their case desperate; they were sent to the Hospi­tal at Batavia by vertue of a warrant from the Go­vernour, which they used to get for that Purpose.

Near the Fort Jacatra, where I used to go often, is a piece of ground which the Chineeses bought of the Dutch, and cost them abundance of Money, in which they bury their Corpses: It was called the Chineese's Church-yard. I remember there to have seen a Grave made for one of the Richer sort of 'em, that amounted to three or 4000 Gilders, nei­ther are they raised high, or costly in the Ornaments they bestow on 'em, but only they dig them of such a vast depth, and line the Grave from the very Bot­tom with fine square Stone cut for the purpose, and so strong is the Work, as well as neat, that it is as if they did design never to move from thence. I omit the other particulars of their Ceremonies, &c. Because others have done it before me.

All the way from that Fort to Batavia, is so plea­sant and diverting by reason of the continual variety of sweet Walks, Curious Gardens &c. that it is a perfect earthly Paradise, and there is none comes to Batavia but goes to see it, and is exceedingly Charm'd with the sight of it.

A pleasant accident besell me there once. An Officer, who was at that time a Patient of mine, a loose debauched Fellow, who followed no prescrip­tions, [Page 159] and therefore made all my remedies ineffectu­al to him, being at the head of a Company exercising the Men, and having got I suppose a cup in his head, seeing me come towards him to be a Spectator a­mong the rest, Saluted me at first sight after a kind of an insolent manner, and then gave me some Scur­rilous Language, and told me, he thought I under­stood my business but very indifferently, since I kept him so long under my hands. I told him he talkt like an Impertinent Fellow, and that all the means of the most skilfull Surgeons in the World would be in vain to him, while he was always drunk and lived such an intemperate life, and observed no rule. In short, I told him that my Art was to cure Men, and not Beasts, and that he might seek a cure else­where; this enraged him so, being spoken at the head of his Company, that he came and struck at me with his Cane with all the eagerness that might be, but 'ere the blow fell upon me, I closed in with him; and having no VVeapon in my hand, I wrested the Cane out of his, and flung him upon his back, as he was getting up again, the standers by parted us, and there was no more heard of it for that time.

This spread about among all the Officers, and the Account of it being little to his advantage, and giving sometimes occasion to some to jeer him with his adventure, it made him stark mad; and set him upon thinking of revenge. I expected it, and therefore avoided him, whenever I could han­somely do it. But one day we chanced to meet in a Chineeses house, where we dined; nor did I see any tokens of his Resentment all the while we sat together, so that I was apt to think he designed to pass it by. But when he had drunk a little largely, and the ill humours were set a Floating, he begun to make little insolent Reflections upon me, which [Page 160] turned at last to down right abuses. This did not suffice, but he must needs urge me to come out to him in the Street, and going out first into it himself, with his drawn Sword in his hand, he vapourd and call'd me all the Cowards he could think of, who durst not come out to meet him. I wore no Sword, as indeed none of our profession did: But I had a tuck Cane in my hand, which I used to wear; but especially since my first quarrel with him: And be­ing forced to it, at length I came out to him, and with my unwildy weapon after some passes on both sides, I struck him into the left side, but glancing against his ribs, I just larded him, and that was all; but he keeping his ground, I made another pass at him, and fortunately run him into the Shoulder, and disarm'd him; upon which he was carried into the Chineeses house.

Assoon as this was made known at Batavia, we were both of us taken and brought bound into Bata­via, and there had before the Judge Advocate, who, having examined us and our Evidences, passed Sen­tence upon my Adversary in an instant, which was, that he was to be kept in Chains for three years, and to work among the Slaves; and to forfeit his Salary for the time, which was to be distributed among his Company, which was accordingly put in Execution, as soon as he was perfectly recovered, and that was in a few VVeeks time.

My cause being much more just than his, and my Sentence being suspended for a while, I thought I might come off Tolerably well; but when I con­sider'd with what severity they had dealt with him, I could not but expect something proportionable would fall to my share. But it was not long 'ere I was put out of doubt, and my Sentence was pronoun­ced. I was to stand before the Corps de Guarde at Jacatra three days after one another, with six [Page 161] Musquets hung about me, and to forfeit three months Salary to the Judge-Advocate, and to do for that time the Duty of a private Centinel, standing such hours as were allotted me, with a Musquet in my Hand.

This was tolerable, and better than I expected; but it seems it was rather contrived for me, that I might not go altogether unpunished, than as a pu­nishment deserved by, and suitable to what I had done. One may see by this punishment that was inflicted on me, that a Martial Genius reigns there; and that they are much given to a Military Disci­pline; for there was no manner of relation between the Musquet and me, nor indeed did it agree with me at all. But some of my Friends gave me hopes, that they would soon get me released; and by their means, orders were sent me to return to my Post, after I had exercised the Musquet during two Months; by which a Month of my Sentence was remitted me.

A little while after I was restored, Orders were sent to the Sumatra, the Ship I was last in, to get ready in eight days to go to Bantam. I put my self in a readiness to go with her, being desirous to see how the Place stood since its great disorder. The last day we were to be in Town, being Sunday, I went to Church, and heard a most admirable Ser­mon preach'd by the worthy Mr. John Conradus; after which I took my leave of my Friends, and then took a Praw to carry me aboard the Su­matra, which had her full Lading in, which was all Provisions, and most of that Rice. The next Morning the Wind being very fair for us, we set sail, and came that very Night into the Road be­fore Bantam. I went to Shore with the first Boat, and was much pleased to see all the Parts of that City so neat, and in so good an order, that there was not the least sign of its late Misfortunes to be [Page 162] seen. I staid there that night, being told that the next day eight Javians were to be executed for killing some Dutchmen in the Country; and ac­cordingly four of them were broke upon the Wheel; the other four were tied fast together, and turned down headlong off the Castle-Bridge into the Water.

While this was doing, there was a vast out-cry of a sudden of Fire: The Houses being all of Cane, the first House had in an instant set sire to several others; so that the Uproar increasing, the Magistrate set double guard upon all the Conveni­ent Posts and Gates of the City, to prevent further harm; and lest this might be intended to serve for an Insurrection: But both the Fire and Noise ceased quickly after.

I went on board again, and hearing that the Young King was in a few days to make a Visit to the Governour, I desired a Friend to give me no­tice the night before the day on which it was to be; and notice being given me accordingly by my Friend, I went to Shore.

The manner of his Pomp and Magnificence was, I thought, very well worth my sight; and it may not be disagreeable to the Reader to have a short ac­count os it. As soon as ever the King had set his Foot out of the Castle, all the Cannon were dis­charged, great and small, all round the place.

The first that walked before him were four Am­boineeses, carrying Bucklers and Swords in their Hands; next to them went a Company of Javians, then a Company of Balingers, with Assagyen; after these came six Javians, who carried a Chair finely wrought and gilt: then followed six Persian Horses, with Trappings richly covered with Gold and Silver; after them four Amboineeses, with Escutcheons and Swords in their Hands; then the Young Prince; or King's Son, of about eight Years of Age, on Horse­back; his Horse was set out after the noblest man­ner [Page 163] I ever saw: He was attended by some hundreds of Women, each of which had something in their Hands; some, Golden Cups; some, Flowers; others, several Fruits of the Country; these were followed by the Company of Dutch. Then came the King himself, riding on a very fine Persian Horse, sum­ptuously accoutred, and sitting with that Majesty, that one would have thought him Lord of the Universe. Next to him went a great Company of Women; then another Company of Dutch; and a Company of Javians, with their Krizzen and Assagyen, which ended the Procession. All this mighty Shew and Formality, was a very great sur­prize to me, considering that King's Station, and that his Dignity was meerly titular. But that Pomp and Grandeur did not give him so much lustre, as it did those under whose subjection he was forced to live: And in that consideration, I suppose, the Dutch were willing enough to amuse him, with this vain shew of Power and Greatness. When the Guns were fired, one of the Men, not being so care­ful as he should have been, had one of his Arms shot off, as he was raming in the Powder. As soon as the young King heard of it, he came into the Hos­pital himself to see the Man drest, and to charge the Surgeon to take great care of him, and ordered an hundred pieces of Eight to be given him; promi­sing withal, that if he cured him, he would give him a Pension of two hundred pieces of Eight year­ly; which was an argument of a good tender Na­ture and Generosity, notwithstanding some of his Actions, before-related, might represent him as one of a cruel and barbarous Disposition.

It was not without Wonder, as well as Pleasure, that I beheld the great Restauration and Improve­ment of this Famous City, which once lay in so ruinous a condition; and to see such plenty and abundance there, where some time before there was [Page 164] such a scarcity of necessaries, that many Men were ee'n famish'd. And certainly of all the hardships of that War, none was to be compared to that which we underwent for want of Water. I was once forced to give as much Mony for one single draught of it, as would have bought a Butt of Wine in some places. And such was our lamenta­ble condition, that a Man would have given his Life the next hour for a draught of Cold Water to prolong it till then. So that when Water could be got at any rate, those who had the greatest share of Plunder, would give all they had for one single Cup of it; and thought themselves happy they could purchase it upon such easie terms: And thus after all their labour, they were but little the better for all that Booty they had gotten.

But what was the most dismal of all was, that it was not to be gotten sometimes, tho' one had had the World to give for it: And in those extre­mities, many of our Men drinking out of some Pools that were not wholesom, some being Nitrous or Saltpeterish, and others being poisonous Water, it threw them into such Distempers, and put 'em into such Tortures, that it would have grieved any one to have seen the miserable condition they were in.

In the Wars with Kartiri, which were a little before my coming to the Indies, the poor Soldiers were in as bad a condition to the full. So that a Man would wonder, that the same Persons should willingly expose themselves to such difficulties a second time; as most of our Men did, who were in both Expeditions. But what will not necessity put a Man upon, especially when it is a little en­liven'd by the hopes of some fortunate Success? And I believe, that the good Fortune of a certain Drummer in those late Wars, served in a great measure to animate the whole Body of our Army. [Page 165] For this Drummer lighted fortunately of the King of Kartiri's Crown, for which the General at Ba­tavia gave him thirty thousand Gilders of Dutch Mony; and gave him his Freedom, and a Pass to go into Holland, where he was to have his Mony paid, tho' the Poor Man ne're liv'd to enjoy it, for he died in the Voyages; but the Mony was duly paid to his Sisters, who lived at Middleburgh, ac­cording to the agreement made with the Deceased. And I make no doubt but every one of our Men, that knew this, were in hopes of getting at least a Crown for their share too.

I was one of four who had almost got as consi­derable a Booty, but we lost all by our want of cu­riosity; for three of the Admiral's chief Attendants, and I, being just come into Bantam, after a little fatigue, we went to take a Nap in a Warehouse that stood open, we laid us down upon a great Chest that stood there, and never dreamt that there was any thing of value within it; but we had not been there above half an hour, when an Officer was sent from the Admiral to demand our Bed from un­der us, which we readily yielded. We were strange­ly surprised when we saw a Party of Men ready to convoy it to the Admiral, before whom it was open'd; and out of it came seven hundred Leathern Bags full of Cubangs, which (as I told you before) are pieces of Gold, worth ten Rixdollers apiece. You may imagine then how silly we lookt upon one another, when we heard this; and how angry we were with our selves, that we could complain of the hardness of our Bed, and were not so wise as to shake up the Feathers. But to be short, we lost very simply a Treasure which we might have had very fairly, and without opposition, if we had but been so prudent as to search into it at first.

But it is time to return to the Sumatra, which was now ready to go off; so that with the first [Page 166] fair Wind we set sail, and got safe to Batavia again, where we found a Fleet of seven Ships in a readi­ness to go home, i. e. to Holland. (as the custom is to send some such number of Ships home every Year, sometimes more, sometimes less at a time.) I was glad to have the opportunity to send some Letters by 'em, and I did so; but charging only one Friend with 'em, my Friends in Holland never re­ceived any of 'em. But what made me the more negligent was, that I was near the time of my free­dom, and in full design of going over my self in a very little while. As soon as that Fleet had hoisted sail, I went to Church to join with the Prayers of the Congregation for the Fleets Prosperity and good Voyage, as there is always on those occasions.

Our Ship lay still at Anchor here for three Weeks, which made me very weary of it; at last we had Orders to go with a smaller Vessel, call'd the Bali, to a small Island, about four Leagues from Batavia, to fetch Timber to repair the Ships that lay at the Island Onrust, and to carry it thither. This Isle hath nothing but Timber upon it: Here we spent our time in catching of Tortoises, with which we feast­ed our selves rarely; and having carried what was requisite to the Isle of Onrust, we return'd to Ba­tavia. The Bali being but a small Vessel, we ran up the River, with ease, to the very Gate of the Castle. The Chief Surgeon of India's Lodging be­ing very near to us, I took the opportunity to wait upon him, and desired him to take care I might be appointed to go with the next that should be sent to any distant part of the Indies, where I had not been; which he promised to do, seeing it was my desire.

He represented to me sufficiently, and I knew it well enough, that I had a better Post already, and that any Post at Land was more considerable than the best at Sea; and that those who had a settled [Page 167] Charge there, were more regarded, and better esteemed. But I was for seeing of strange Coun­tries, and variety of Things; and besides, a conti­nuance upon Land, required a continual expence, which the Sea doth not give such opportunity for. But, in a word, I would not have been penn'd up in one Town only, as some are there, for all the Credit and Advantage they can propose to them­selves, or attain to; and indeed except in Bengal, Surat, Camron in Persia, Japan, or some few other places, it is hardly worth a Man's while to rest in hopes of being advanced; for Preferment goes there by Favour, as well as in these parts of the World: And when it doth so, I think no wise Man will de­pend upon it.

Thus I continued upon the Bali, and as soon as she had taken in her lading of Linnen and Striped Stuffs, together with some Chests of Mony; we fell down the River and set sail for Bantam; whi­ther she was bound. We were above two hours sail; but we were forced back by a contrary Wind, which blew so excessive hard for the space of two days, that we were very happy, that we ridded our selves out of it so luckily. As soon as it was over, we set sail again, and in forty eight hours we reached the Road of Bantam, where we immediately unladed.

When we went to Shore there, we saw some thousands of Javians got together at the Mouth of the River: We were a little surprized at first, not knowing what the meaning of it should be; but coming nearer, and seeing several Hollanders a­mongst 'em, and then discovering their Nets, Hooks and other Instruments, we found they were only catching of Crocodiles. When we landed, we saw several they had caught and knock'd in the Head already; their King was amongst 'em to see the Sport. No body can think what a strange kind of [Page 168] a Noise these silly Javians made, and how they rent their Throats at it. Whereas my Comrade and I had caught almost as many without any kind of Noise, and not half that Trouble.

The Bali was only to unlade here, which being done, we set out fot Batavia again; and as we came by the Island Onrust, we heard all the Can­non fire, both in the Castle, and in the City; we could not tell then what it was for, but we kept going on; and not long after, when we came to cast Anchor, we heard that the Fleet from Cameron in Persia was safe arrived, and had brought the good news with 'em, that all the Old Differences between the Viceroy there, and us, were perfectly adjusted; and that there was a Good Correspon­dence settled between us. And another Ship was come in from Holland, which had also brought the good news of the quarrel being made up between the English, Danes and French, and ourselves con­cerning the Injury done to them at Bantam: Which good news coming together, could not but make us all exceeding joyful. So that all the Streets of Batavia were all illuminated with Bon-fires, and Fire-works. The latter were chiefly the work of the Chineeses, who delight much in them, and are so ingenious at 'em, that one would wonder, espe­cially being a People who never have any Instru­ments of War, where Powder is used. They like­wise entertained us with their Comedies, which are very diverting, if seen but seldom. We Ger­mans had over and above these good news, that which more nearly concerned us, which was, that of the good success of the Emperors Arms against the Turks; so that some of my Countrymen and I joined so much the more chearfully in the common Rejoicings, which continued all that Night. The next Morning the General Camphuysen went to the Maleysh Church, where publick thanks were return'd [Page 169] to God for our Prosperity; then the Service being over, the Guns were again fired round the City and Castle.

Three or four days after, as I was returning to see my Patients on board the Bali, I met with a Compa­ny of Soldiers that were going on board the Fles­singen. These were very prettily accoutred with Silk-Stockings on their Legs, and Shoos made of Sail-Cloath: These Men were designed for Camron, Surat and Macaran, to fill up the vacancies there of such as keep Guard before the Houses of the Company. But I would not have a private Soldier to fancy by this, that they are all to meet with such treatment there; for this good usage is only to a few, that are to credit the Factories in those places; and those are some of those that have a great many Friends, and great Recommendations: Whereas many a brave Soldier is forced to spend his time in Bantam, Amboina, Banda, and other un­healthy Islands, where they must trudge it without either Shoos or Stockings, and it may be perish mi­serably.

Our Ship was once again order'd to go to Onrust to carry Rice, and other Provisions; which we did, and returned in four or five days.

As we were come back, it was my fortune to fall once more into the Sea; for as I went to ease Na­ture on the outside of the Ship, according to the usual way, I held fast by the Rope, which broke, so in I dropt. The Ships Crew was more ready to laugh at me, than to lend me their Hand; and I was doubly put to't, to swim with my Breeches down; but at last my Comrade threw me out a Rope, by which I got up, and praised God for my safety. This made me more careful for ever after; and that the Boatswane might be more diligent to see for the future that such things were firm and strong, the Master gave him a severe reprimand, and laid a Fine on him.

[Page 170] After this I went to pay another visit to the up­per Surgeon; and from thence went to Sup with an Acquaintance of mine in the Castle, and took a Friend with me. I was to go into the Town to lie; so my Friend and I took a Praw to carry us thither up the River. In the way we came thro' the Boom, which is a String of Trunks of Trees chained to­gether, which block up the River from one side to the other, so that there is no passing thro' without an Officer, who stands there to let you thro', who first visits and searches you, and then too you must pay so much, according to the bigness of the Ves­sel; and this goes to the Company, who make some thousands of Gilders yearly out of it.

The next day we went to the Lottery, to see what Gaming there was; that was most full of Chineeses, who, as I said before, are the greatest Gemesters in the World. Whoever is a loser there, the Company is sure to be the winner; for there is a Mony-Changer appointed by them, who sits to keep order amongst 'em, a kind of Groom-Porter; and every throw that is thrown with the Dice, there is two pence paid to him for the Company. And notwithstanding that some of those who ruin themselves at play there, might be supposed to fall into a passion, and cause some disorder, yet there is never any disturbance heard of; it being no less than Death to make any in that place: For with­out that severity it would never be free from it, especially when poor Soldiers lose sometimes their whole Pay in one Night, which they have done ve­ry hard service for a Month or two, or may be more; or when a Chineese loses all that he is worth, even his Wife and Children, nay his very Beard; nothing being more natural, than for Men in that condition to fall into excessive Passion. But they dare not give it any vent there, nor make the least noise.

[Page 171] I could not refrain neither, but ventured six or seven Ducatoons, which were gone in the twink­ling of an Eye; but I presently gave over, and took my leave of it for ever.

Thence I went to reside for a few days at a Friends house, and a Countrymans of mine, one Mr. Buschbach, who had got his Freedom, having compleated his time in the Company's Service, and was in very good Circumstances. He was a Man of an exceeding kind and generous Temper, and a constant Patron of all the Germans that came to Batavia, and never weary of doing them all the service that lay in his power. I was a little indis­posed at his House, so that I sent word to the Ship, that if they were ordered to go any Voyage be­fore I got better, they should give me notice of it, that they might be supplied with some other Per­son to go in my stead. But blessed be God I reco­vered in a few days, which I think verily was in some measure owing to my Friend's care, and his facetious diverting Company; for I never met with more agreeable Company in my life.

His House stood upon the Vierkant, a place so called from its being a Square, where the Rice Mar­ket was kept, and feveral other Provisions, being just at the Mouth of the River, and therefore most commodious for all Country People to bring their Fruits by water, as well as for the Fisher-boats to bring their Fish thither. There is also a small Dock for building of little Vessels. And all Vessels what­soever that come by here, must come to Shore, and be visited by a Centinel that stands there for that purpose, and is relieved every hour; and in case any of 'em should attempt to slip by, his Orders is to fire upon them.

CHAP. XII.

BEing pretty well recover'd, tho' as yet some­what weak, I return'd on board, where I spent my time but after a melancholly manner, and most of it lying in my Hamock; yet I gathered strength apace, and in some days got perfectly well.

There an Order came to me to remove on board the Tyger, which was to go to Macassar; this I re­ceived with a great deal of satisfaction, and accord­ingly went out with her. We had not been three hours under sail, but such a violent Storm came [Page 173] upon us as brought our Main-Mast by the Board with such a force, that we thought our Ship was dash'd in pieces; and this continuing for some time, we were obliged to cut our Gears, and hand in what we could of our Sails.

Our Master was not for going further, so we went back to Batavia; and being there refitted, we set Sail out again; and in three days came before Japara, which lies likewise in great Java, seventy Leagues eastward of Batavia.

This Place, which was once the Residence of the mighty Emperor of that Empire, is as much under the Dominion of the Dutch, as Bantam is. And that Emperor likewise is no more such, than meerly in Name and Title; and is as subject to the Dutch Go­vernment as the King of Bantam is, of whom I have given you an account. So that this whole Island, which is above five hundred miles compass, is al­most all in subjection to the Dutch Company. The Religion, Manners, Customs, &c. of the Inhabi­tants of Japara are much the same as of those of Bantam.

Here we provided our selves with Water, and Wood for Fuel; which being done, we wound up our Anchors, and set sail: The next day we passed by the six Islands of Luboce, leaving them on our left, and Java on the right; and arrived to the Island of Madura, which is about ten Leagues from Java. There we staid a while, and then we set for­ward again with the first Gale of Wind, and passed by some hundreds of little Islands and Rocks, which are called Pater noster, some of which we went over, whilst the Sea beat most terribly against those Rocks which stood a little above the Water, and made us very much affraid, we having no other way, but thro' them: So that we were continually sounding with the Plummet. We fell foul of the Rocks four times notwithstanding all our care; but [Page 174] God be thanked, without any damage. The best of that course is, that there is scarcely ever any stormy Winds there, by reason of the great heat the Sun gives. A few days after we got before Macassar.

Macassar is a considerable Kingdom, and well go­vern'd. The Dutch, English and Danes have all free­dom of Traffick there, as well as the Indians of all parts. It lies on the Island Cebebes to the South, and reaches about an hundred Leagues; under the Line, it hath Borneo on the one side, and the Molucca Islands on the other.

Here lay an English Ship, which had lost both her Surgeons in the Voyage, and were in great want of one to take care of their Men; they applied them­selves not only to me, but to the Resident, to per­mit me to leave my Ship, to go with them, but it did not lie in the Governours power to free me from my Engagement in the Dutch Company. However they being drove to such necessity, I went and lookt after their Patients, and I left all that was proper for 'em with one of the Ship, together with written Instructions, how, and when to make use of 'em; for which they thanked me heartily, and gratified me very generously.

There happen'd a Fire one Night in one of their Negerys, which was all consumed in an instant, be­ing built with nothing but Bamboos, and gave so great a light, that we thought it was the Day break­ing upon us again, and put us into a kind of Con­sternation, till we knew what it was.

The People, Natives of this Island, are scatter'd thro' all parts of the Indies; and all Nations are de­sirous of 'em for their Slaves, becuase they are ex­ceeding faithful, diligent, and good natur'd, and make the bravest Soldiers, as I have seen it my self in the whole time of the War of Bantam, where they daily signaliz'd themselves, both by their Cou­rage and Conduct. They are likewise the most pro­fitable [Page 175] sort of Servants. I have had two of them, who have got me half a Ducate on a day; so that these are lookt upon as the most valuable of all the Indians; and therefore are used with the greatest care and humanity that may be. The hardest and most slavish part of their Work, is generally put upon the Malabarians, who are an ill-lookt sort of Peo­ple, like the Caffers. They are so black too, that they are often taken for Moors: Whereas it is a Na­tion of Asia, but dispersed here and there over all the Indies, as the Jews are in Europe.

The right Moors are those of the great Mogul's Country, and the places adjacent, as Bengal, Surat, Golconda, &c. but they very seldom or never go out of their own Country; nor doth any body dare to take them for Slaves. As there is some of 'em as black as a Coal, so there is some as white as any European whatever. They are most of 'em very civil, handsom and well shaped, courteous and gen­teel in their Behaviour. They are great Merchants, and very sincere in their Dealings; and those I have had to do with, I have always found very generous and grateful. I had once the Son of a rich Moor under my hands, while I was at the Hospital of Bantam: He had broke his Leg, and had been left to the care of some Surgeons of that Nation, who had done him no good. The Father at length de­spairing of the skill of his Countrymen, sent for me, and shew'd a great deal of rational concern for his Son's condition. I went to the Boy, and ha­ving examined the Fraction, and found it to be bet­ter than I imagined; I told the Father he might take Courage, and that I did not doubt but I should in a little while set his Son upon his Legs again, with the help of the Almighty Creator of Heaven and Earth; (making use of those Terms, because it is in that Idea especially, that the Moors worship God:) Upon which he bowed and lift up his Eyes [Page 176] towards Heaven. I sent for my Boy, and with the assistance of a Moor, I set the Bone of the Boy's Leg; and having done all that was necessary for the pre­sent, my Young Patient found ease immediately. This gave the Father much satisfaction, and he im­mediately presented me with twenty Spanish Mat­ten, telling me that was nothing of my pay, but to encourage me to take what carel could of his Child. Thus, with God's assistance, I cured his Boy entirely in six Weeks time; and without asking me, what I expected, he gave me thirty Cubanz into my hands, which amounted to three hundred Rixdollers, and ask'd me whether that satisfi'd me. I told him it did extreamly well; and truly well it might, for in our Country we knew nothing of such large Fees as those are. If we had but a few such Patients there, it would keep a great many at home, who are now forced to ramble abroad, meerly to get their liveli­hood.

But I return now to my Ship, which was ready to set sail again for Batavia, and waiting only for a Wind. Therefore with the first Easterly Wind, we set out of the Port of Macassar, and running happi­ly thro' the Pater-noster Islands, we came to Anchor before Japara, where we found three Ships come from Batavia, three days before us; and had brought some Soldiers from thence, to quel an uproar that had been made at Japara, in which above twenty Dutch had been killed by the Inhabitants, who at­tempted to throw themselves into the Fort Sambura. But by the means of the Governor, and this Auxilia­ry Force, all was quieted, and the Ringleaders sent away to Batavia, where they receiv'd their due re­ward. Some of them were broken upon the Wheel, some had their Ears and Noses cut off; and were sent chained altogether to some Islands to spend all their Life in burning of Lime, and there to remain perpetual Slaves.

[Page 177] I Landed before these Wretches were sent away, so that I saw 'em go along Chain'd together: But that which was the most dismal to see, was the La­mentation and sad Out-cries of these poor Fellow's Wives and Children, who conducted them to the Water-side.

All being thus settled again, the Company aug­mented the Garrison, and fortified thosePlaces which needed it most, to prevent any such Disorders for the future. It is a wonderful Thing, that such are not more frequent; and that whenever they happen, they are so soon Calm'd, considering the vastness of the Dutch Dominions, which are so scatter'd here and there, and so far asunder; but it is to be ascrib'd to their vigilant, and wisely Model'd Go­vernment; without which, they could not support the weight of their several Dominions, which con­tain several Empires, Kingdoms, and large Pro­vinces, (all which would be too tedious to setdown) and it would amaze one to think, what a vast num­ber of Deputies, Presidents, Governours, and Of­ficers, they are forced to maintain for the Preserva­tion of their Power; besides some Hundreds of Ships: And, I dare say, by good Computation, they have above a Hundred thousand Men by Sea and Land. But as their Expence is great, so their Wealth is unaccountable; for where-ever you go, you shall not see one Thing in a thousand, little or great, but if you ask whose that is, all the answer is, the Company's.

We departed from Japara, and came the next day into the Road before Batavia, and an hour or two after us, came in the Ship that had those Re­bels on board: so that there we saw them Executed, and disposed of as I have said already.

Before our Ship was quite Unladen, here arose a most terrible Hurricane, which tore most of the Ships off their Anchors, and drove two of them [Page 178] upon some of the little Islands, that lie near there; one of which being old and decayed, was dasht in­to pieces. It lasted but half an hour, and so the Damage was the less, else there would hardly a Ship have escaped: Ours had cast out five Anchors, two of which we lost; and two of our Men being in the Long-Boat, the Storm coming upon them so sud­denly, could not make to the Ship, but the Rope breaking, were torn off from us. When the Wind ceased, we went to see after'em, and found our poor Seamen still alive, but that was all, tied fast by Cords to the Boat which floated with the bottom upwards; So that all were recover'd: But it was a Miracle, that being so far spent as they were, and not able to help themselves, their Brains were not knockt out against the Boat; or that they were not devoured by Sharks. Besides all this, abundance of small Vessels, Prawen, &c. were cast away; and many Persons drown'd.

The next day I went to shore with the Master and the Factors, who design'd to stay there all Night, and ordered the Seamen to go back to their Ship. I desired they might stay till the Evening, because I had a mind to go with 'em. But it being pretty dark, and the Wind very high, our Seamen keep­ing up the Sail without Fear or Wit, we were all over-turn'd, within a Stone's throw of the Ship; but by the Blessing of God, and the speedy Assistance of the Ship's Crew, we were all took up Safe.

The next Morning I return'd to Land, where I was no sooner come, but a Muck Speeler, who had done a great deal of Mischief, and put the People in an Uproar, came running by me, and by good Fortune did me no harm; but kill'd a Boy within 20 Steps of me, and was presently Shot himself in the Head, and dropt down; but it was after he had kill'd five or six People: Nothing saved me but the corner of the Street, by means of which, as he [Page 179] run so furiously, he over-shot me, and got past me before I could get aware of him; and so, God be prais'd, I was safe, but ever since I was always upon my guard at Turnings and Crossings of Streets.

Here I spent my time with a great deal of variety of Diversions, as Fishing, Walking, Shooting, go­ing by Water, and chiefly seeing my Friends: Most days I took a Praw, and went to some small Islands that lie hard by there, where the chief Fishing is to be seen. Upon one of these Islands lived a rich Chi­nese near to the Chinese's Temple. He having a nu­merous Family of Children and Servants, I had fre­quent Business in his House, and got a great deal of Money by him. One Night, as I had taken my leave of him, and was going home, I saw a bright Flame at a mighty distance, and heard some Shoot­ing: Being Landed, I took some of my Friends with me to a high part of the Shore to see it. We were all amazed to think what it should be, and in giving our several Opinions, we spent all the Night look­ing upon it. In the Morning the Flame could no longer be seen; but we hearing still a Gun go off now and then, we went and acquainted the General with it, who order'd a Boat to be set out with 20 Men and an Officer, ready to go at Night, in case the Flame appeared again, and the Shooting continued. As the Day shut in, the Flame begun to be seen more and more, and somewhat nearer than the Night before. I desired the Officer that I might go with him, which he readily granting, we set forward, and made directly up to the Fire: Coming nearer, we saw it was a small Bark and People in it, we Hail'd them, upon which they gave over Shooting, but made us no Answer. This made us the more Earnest to get up to 'em, and to Board 'em, which we did: And there we saw a most lamentable Sight, eight poor Englishmen, three of 'em Dead, and the five others little better, not able to speak [Page 180] one Word, but endeavouring to mutter. We took them into our Boat with us, together with some Chests of Tanges and Larines, (which is a certain Mo­ney of that Country) which they had in their Boat with them; we used them as gently as we could, and made all speed possible to the Place from whence we came, and there gave them all Kind of Refresh­ment. It was five or six hours e'er they came to themselves, so as to speak: At length they gave us an Account of themselves; and told us, they be­long'd to an English Ship that came from Bengal richly laden, and was Bound for Batavia to joyn the English Merchant-men that lay there; but com­ing by the Island Engano, it being hard Weather, they were thrown upon a Shelf, where their Ship was sunk, so that of 78 Men they had on Board, but 15 got into that little tatter'd Boat, and that of them there was but those we saw left; the rest having perished one after another for want of Wa­ter, which they had not had a Drop of in 15 or 16 days time.

When we had this Account from them, we took them to Batavia, and carried them to the English House, where we were heartily Thank'd, and treated with great Civility: Besides all which, the next Morning a Reward was sent to every one of the Soldiers, and to the Officer: And as for me, Having been very Helpful to them, and managed them with some Cordials, and taking Care lest their sudden Refreshment should do them an Injury, I had 20 Ducatoons sent me as a Present.

While I remain'd here, there happen'd nothing more worth taking Notice of: And now Orders were sent me to repair on Board the Bergen in Nor­weegen, which was to go Commadore, with two other Ships bound for Odia, the capital City of Siam; so that I went and provided my self with all that was necessary for the Voyage: Which being done, [Page 181] I went on Board my Ship, the Fleet being ready to go off, and we should have set Sail the very nextday, had not the Ekersloo, one of our three Ships, sprung a Leak, which obliged us to stay while they took all the Goods out of her again, and mended her, which was a whole fortnight.

This done, she had her Lading put in again; and then we went under Sail with a favourable Wind, and next day pass'd by the Isle of Lucapara; and thus we continued our Course with good Success for about eight days: But as it is almost impossible for two or three Ships to make so considerable a Voyage without some Lett or Misfortune; the Ekersloo struck upon a Bank of Sand, which frighted us all very much. As soon as she gave us notice of it by firing a Gun, for we were a good way before her, but had happily Steer'd aside and miss'd the Bank, we immediately set out our Shallops, and went to her, and found there was no Remedy but Unlading her; which we did with all speed, and bestowed the Goods, partly on Board of our Ship, and partly on the other: It was a great happiness that the Wind was not very high, else we could never have done this. When all the Goods were out, we made shift, by means of casting Anchors, to get her off the Bank; and having examined her within, and found she had no Damage done to her Keel, we put the Goods on Board of her again, and continued our Course, thanking God we had escaped such a great Danger, by the favour of the Wind, which still continued good for us.

This happen'd to us in our Course to Tumbolan and Ananibo as we sailed between Borneo and Ma­lacca, from which in three days we reach'd the Island Matuna. As we pass'd by it, we saw some Ships before us, which we concluded were Chinese Jonckers; About night they pass'd by us directing their Course towards Borneo, which made us think they came [Page 182] from Cambodia. At break of day we saw five more, who likewise past by us about Noon, and steer'd their Course towards Malacca.

When we were come up to the corner of that Island, we took the Elevation of the Pole, and found we were to Sail more to the Northward; and in a short time we came to the River, which runs through the Kingdom of Siam, up which we sailed as far as the Town Bontempia, and there we cast Anchor. Our Master and the Factor went straightway in the Long-Boat to the Chief City Odia; which is 30 Leagues up the River; as soon as they were come back they went to Unlading.

I then went on Shore too, and visited the Dutch Factory there. The House which the Dutch Fa­ctors have there, is amazing both for its Largeness Beauty, and Strength. Above, are all the Lodgings, which are wonderful Stately both without and with­in: Under, are the Warehouses, which are of a vast bigness, and richly stored with all manner of Commodities.

The City of Odia is very large; but most of the Houses are very low: So that all the Towers of their Temples (which are computed to be above Five thousand) being rais'd much higher, and be­ing all easily seen by reason of the other Buildings being so low, seem altogether like a Forest in Win­ter. It is impossible for any one to conceive what vast numbers of People is continually moving about in that City, insomuch, that a Man who is newly come, would be apt to ask what's the matter, and take that for a gathering of the Mob, or an un­usual Croud, which is but the usual Concourse of the Town. It is seated upon the River Menan, which is likewise fill'd with Ships, Praws, &c. This River is of the same Nature with the Nile, the Niger, and the Ganges, and like them, over­flows all the Fields about Odia, and makes them ve­ry [Page 183] fruitful; spreading it self over great part of the Country, by means of several Arms or Creeks which Providence hath ordered for that purpose. And besides this Advantage which this Inundation affords to the Country, it is a mighty Fence to the City Odia; because the River over-flowing at cer­tain Seasons, no Enemy can Besiege it but for some Months, during which the City is always able to defend it self, being extraordinary well Situated and Fortified.

Through most of the Streets run fine Channels, as at Rotterdam, so that one may go with a Boat from one part of the Town to the other, which renders it mighty Commodious for Trade; I may say, that considering all things, there is not a finer City in all India.

Our Ships having now in little more than a Fortnights time unladen, and taken in their full Lading, which consisted of several Commodities, as Buck and Roe-Skins, Jappan-Wood, &c. we fell down the River, and with a fair Northerly Wind set Sail homewards again.

The next day it Snowed so hard, and the Wind was so high, that we were drove almost upon Land 'ere we could be aware of it; but by good Pro­vidence we came off without any hurt, and in 11 days came up with the Island Puloaura; where we lay still three days refreshing our selves, and then continued our Course. We arrived at Batavia in three Weeks: We were hardly come into Harbour when we saw the most dismal Spectacle that can be. The Ship the Elephant, which rode at Anchor hard by us, laden with Powder and other Ammunition design'd for Bantam, by some Accident took Fire; and in an instant blew up into a thousand pieces; so that of above 80 Men that were on Board her, there was not one left alive to tell how it came. It was the most dismal sight methoughts I ever [Page 184] had seen, to behold so many humane Bodies toss'd at such a vast distance into the Air, for some of them went over our Ship, and so did several large pieces of the Ship likewise; and what made it the more dismal, was, that no manner of help could be afforded them.

Instead of going ashore with the rest, I went on Board a Ship that was come hither some days be­fore us from Cameron in Persia, because the Chi­rurgeon which belonged to that Ship was a Coun­tryman and intimate Acquaintance of mine, and we had been together in several Expeditions in the Wars of Bantam. He was over-joyed to see me, and I was no less pleased to find him well. Af­ter many Questions past on both sides, we came to give one another an Account of our Adventures since we parted, which gave him occasion to tell me, that he had had pretty good Fortune in all his Voyages, but that he had narrowly escaped Death in a place where he thought himself most secure: For, saith he, When I first went to Shore at Cameron, I went with some of my Companions to the Factor's House, and having spoken with them I had Business with, we went into a Cabaret or pub­lick-House; whence, after we had staid an hour or little more, we thought to go back to our Ships; but ere we could get to our Boats the Night catcht us, and we were set upon by a company of Cut­throats. They out-did us in number, and were well Arm'd, whereas none of us had any Weapon about us, so that we could make but a fruitless Re­sistance. Flight being the best Remedy, I presume we all attempted it; but three of us only escaped their Hands, yet not altogether neither; for I had several Blows from 'em, and was run through in two places; the two others had their share too; but neither of us three got any further hurt, and we have great reason to thank the Almighty God [Page 185] who delivered us out of their Hands; for whatever they did with the rest of our Company, which were five more, we never yet could learn what became of 'em.

He likewise speaking of Cameron, told me, That while he was there, there had been such an Earth­quake as had thrown down several Houses, and kill'd several hundreds of People.

Our next talk was about our own Country, to which we having both of us an Inclination to re­turn, we agreed there in an instant to take our Measures about it; for both of us had served the Company our due time, and some Months over. So we went together on Board my Ship, and from thence we took a Boat to Shore, and went together to wait upon the Head Chirurgion, to acquaint him with our Design, and to desire him to Em­ploy us now on Land till the Fleet went off for Holland. He received us with great Civility, and did what we requested of him; and gave us part of the Hospital in Charge, as I had had before. This being done, We went each of us to our re­spective Ships to take our leave of 'em, and to fetch our Things, and return'd in the same Praw to Batavia, where we repair'd to our Post, and proposed to our selves to take such Care, that there might be no Cause of Complaints, least they should prove an obstacle to our Designs, as it frequently happens.

We had not been long here, but a Ship arrived from Holland. All the People that came in her, which were above 200 Soldiers, besides Seamen, were presently landed, and drawn up before the Castle-Gate, till an Order came from the General for them to march up to his Apartment in the Castle. I went to see them, for as the Reader may well suppose, every Body is desirous to hear how Matters stand at home, and is in Expectation [Page 186] to meet with some Acquaintance. I found one there whom I had some Knowledge of, a Mer­chant's Son of Suabia, but had lived a long time at Amsterdam, where I had seen him.

When I had given him the Welcome, and he me an Account of his Voyage, he rejoyced me with the good News of our Victories over the Ottomans.

While we were Talking, the Order came from the General to let them march into the Castle; where they had each of them their several Posts and Stations assign'd. But as all New-Comers have three several Days liberty to refresh themselves, I took my Acquaintance with me, to shew him the Civility of the place, (which is commonly speak­ing, not very great). I took him out designing to go to a Negery, about two miles from Batavia: But as we were going up the River in a Praw we had taken, we met some Javians coming down in a small Boat, making a mighty noise with some little Bells. We ask'd them the meaning of it; they told us that it was a Wedding, and that that was their Musick. So we resolved to go back with them, and see the manner of 'em: They went to an House about a quarter of a Mile out of the Ci­ty. We were invited to come in. The House was all set out and strewed with Flowers, and several Mats made of Rice-Straw were laid upon the Ground, on which they were to have their Dinner.

After a great many Ceremonies were past, which I have given an Account of already, a Buffle was brought, which the Bridegroom knockt down, and the Bride took a Knife and cut his Throat. Then they by turns cut pieces of the Flesh, which they gave to the Cook to Dress, giving him at the same time Instructions how they would have it done, and Herbs to do it with. Some of it was ordered upon our Account, but we neither of us [Page 187] cared to be Sharers of such a tough Entertainment, and they being but a meaner sort of People, we thank'd them for the Civility they had shewn us, and so left 'em.

From thence we return'd to Batavia, for the day was shutting in; and no New-Comer may ab­sent himself from his Post the first Night, where­fore we deferr'd our designed Walk till the next day.

That night one of the Castle-Gates was open'd, (which is a thing seldom known) to let out the President of the City; who, together with some others of the Council, had been at Supper with the General.

CHAP. XIII.

THE next day we took a Chinese Praw to pursue our Design, and went up the River to the Negery. In our way, we came to a strong Current, which being very shallow, the Head of our Boat struck upon a Rock and turn'd us over. We were in no danger of our Lives because it was not deep, but we were Duck'd over Head and Ears; but we got up and drew our Praw to Land, and so got in again, and went forwards.

We went there into a publick House that stood not far from the Water-side upon an Eminence, which afforded us a very agreeable Prospect, and sat us down in a very pleasant Arbour, with Cedar-Trees, Limon-Trees, and other Green-Trees of [Page 189] that kind all about us. We caused a Dinner to be got ready for us of what the Country afforded; which was Fish and Fowl, Eggs, Herbs, &c. Our Liquor was Suri, which is a Juice drawn from the Coco-Trees; with that, we made very good Mas­sack and Lemonade, by the help of some Sugar, Spices, Limons, and Oranges, which we had in good plenty.

I having a mind to make my Friend merry, and to divert him with variety, I sent for some Gom­gomers, (the Musicians of that Country) and some Javian Baliar Dancers, who made us a great deal of Pastime. The Baliar Dancers, which come from Babylon, I have spoken of before; but these were Javians, which are a sort far inferiour to them, and differ from them much in the same manner as there is between a Dance performed by a Dancing-Master and one danced by a Rustick: But what was most Diverting to us, especially to my Friend, was, some Tumblers and Jugglers that were amongst 'em, who shew'd us several Tricks, which do usual­ly so much surprize, even those that see them, that I know a Man runs some risk in relating of them. However, some of their most considerable Tricks of Activity I cannot wholly pass pass by.

They were five in number: One of 'em laid him­self flat down upon his Belly, upon a Mat they had spread on the Ground, and in the twinkling of an Eye, raised himself upon his Legs; then laying himself down again as before, he rais'd himself af­ter the same manner, and stood upon his Head on­ly: After this he laid himself upon his Back, and gave several Leaps in the Air like a Fish. The other four did the same Tricks over, one after the other, and still better and better. After this they took a Ladder of about 12 Rounds, and set it against one of 'em; one of the other four got up to the top of it, and laid himself a cross it; the [Page 190] second went up, and sat a-cross theother's Shoulders; the third climb'd up and pitch'd himself on his Head, upon the Head of the second, and there stood with his Feet directly upwards; upon which, the fourth came, and stood upright on the Feet of the third; And after playing several Tricks there, he leapt down on the Ground, and stood still; the next Fel­low, that was still standing on his Head, gave a spring upwards, and falling down, lighted on the Shoulders of him that stood below; the next, who was on the Ladder came down likewise with a Leap, and fell a-cross the Shoulders of him; and so did the fourth and last, who had been the first on the Ladder: He that had stood all this while, and held the foot of the Ladder, took it and climb'd up with it to the top of the other four, and there made a sort of Harangue to us in Japponnese, which con­cluded the Sight. There was a great many other Tricks intermixt with these, which were well worth the taking notice of; but I thought these would suffice to shew you, how far these Men out-do any thing we commonly see in Europe.

This being over, we call'd for our Reckoning in, which came to no more than Two thousand Butgis. An European at first is frightned at such a reckoning as this, and thinks that such a Sum of Money should be enough to Treat a King and all the Nobility, or to defray the Charges of a Lord Mayor's Feast; but he must understand, that these Butgis are but little thin pieces of Lead, with holes in the middle of 'em, a certain number of them is put upon a String to save the trouble of telling them over upon every occasion, and three Hundred of 'em are worth but Two Pence of Dutch Money; so that our Dinner amounted but to 13 or 14 d. Besides this, our Musick and Dancers cost us a Shil­ling, and we gave a Ducatoon to the Juglers and Tumblers; having paid all, we went back again down the River to Batavia.

[Page 191] At this very time the Streight of Sunda was very much infested with Pickaroons; They had only Praws or small Boats of their own, with which they run with ease in and out of several Rivers of the Kingdom of Bantam, and did a great deal of mischief about the Islands of Toppers-hoedie, Dwars­in-de-zee, and others. They used to wait there for their Prey, and when they had gotten their Booty, they made immediately to their lurking holes, where finding safety for a great while, they were at last so bold, that not a Ship could scape them; and the more, because the Company never concerned them­selves about it, nor took any Measures to suppress them. But at length, the Bali, (the Ship in which I had been some time before) coming that way, bound for Jambi on the Coast of Sumatra; and be­ing obliged to cast Anchor near the aforesaid Islands, these Pyrates joyning their Forces together, came and surrounded her, and notwithstanding a stout Defence made on Board the Bali for some hours, they made themselves Masters of her, killed all the Men they could come at; and having taken what they could conveniently carry away, set it on Fire.

While the Ship was all in Flames, a Ship from Malabar coming luckily by, made towards the Fire to see what it was. Two Men, who in the En­gagement had hid themselves below Deck, and were now got out, but knew not how to dispose of them­selves, stood upon the Fore-Castle ready to throw themselves into the Sea to avoid being burnt: But they sent them a Boat, by which means these poor Creatures were preserved; and being brought on Board the Ship, they continued their Course to Batavia, where they gave the General an Ac­count of what had happen'd.

[Page 192] The Company now being Sufferers by this, thought fit to send after these Pyrates, which they never minded before, while they came by no loss themselves, and while the Fishermen only, &c. were in danger. Immediately two Men of War were ordered to go after 'em, together with eight small Boats well Mann'd, to give them Chace. It being requisite there should be Chirurgions more than ordinary in those Ships, and this being like to be a short Expedition, and near home, my Friend and I, who could not be employed in a long Voy­age, were appointed to go with them. We were very well pleas'd with our Commission, and accord­ingly we got ready our Chests, and went on Board the Ceylon, which carried 300 Men, and 48 Guns: The other Ship was about the same Rate. The Boats had each of them from 60 to 70 Men, and about 16 Patterero's.

When we were got past the Island Onrust, we kept along the Sea-shore till we came beyond Ban­tam, and there we lay before the Mouth of some Rivers, as close to the Land as we could: And so as to lye to the Windward. At Night we divided our Fleet, and sent two of our Boats out to Sea to entice the Pirates out after them, if they should chance to see them, and we stood ready to clap in between them, and the River; so to cut off their Pass, and hedge them in. We lay two days close to the Shore, within a Stone's throw of Land, but very safe, with no less than 60 Fathom Water. Atlength, about Sun-set, we saw five Boats making Sail towards our two Boats, at about two Leagues distance from us; upon which we moved altogether forwards, along the Shore; and by that time it was quite dark, we made directly towards 'em, taking still care to be between the Shore and them.

[Page 193] The next morning we saw them by break of day sailing by a small Island. They having found out our Design, were endeavouring to make their escape, for the two Boats we had sent after 'em were far­ther from 'em than we were with the whole Fleet: So we joyned together again, and our eight Boats sailing much faster than the Men of War could, pursued them so tightly, that notwithstanding these Rovers had several Oars with them, (which they use to make use of in a Calm or in case of pursuit) yet by Noon our Boats were all got within a quar­ter of a League of 'em; so that the last of 'em were forced to yield or fight. We with our great Ships were within a League of 'em all, and turn'd round a small Island, during which we lost sight of them: But our Boats all this while having got ground, they begun to thunder amongst 'em; so that in a little time, two of the Pyrates Boats were seized. Then we came in sight again, and took these two Boats into our Charge, and brought the Men on Board of us. Our Boats having made some stay, while they engaged these two, the other three were got away again pretty far. However, ours were not long 'ere they came within shot of 'em, and so pursued them that they came to a close En­gagement, and after a sharp resistance, at length became Masters of them.

We lost in all 28 Men, and had 30 wounded; but we kill'd 200, and wounded above 50 of theirs. The rest we carried to Batavia.

There was at first near 900 of 'em; of which nine were Dutchmen, and two Danes; one of whom had been a Captain of a Man of War. We caught both the Danes, but we had but three Dutch­men, the six others were killed in the sight.

Being come to Batavia, they were all put into Prison, and Examin'd. They confess'd, that they had their Habitations in some Negery's, about the [Page 194] Blaw Peper-bergh, and discover'd several of their Companions thereabouts: Upon which they sent Soldiers both by Sea and Land towards those places; and in three Week's time they brought back with 'em some thousands of 'em, most of 'em being Javians.

Of the whole, one part was broke upon the Wheel, some were Quarter'd, some were Whipt, some had their Ears and Noses cut off, and some were burnt in the Forehead. The three Hollan­ders were Hang'd: The two Danes Beheaded: and a great number of others were sent to severalIslands; to Burn Lime, Hew Stone, &c. and there to re­main Slaves all their Lives. Their Wives and Children were served after the same manner, that it might more effectually prove a terrour to others.

About this time came into the Road of Batavia a Ship from Madagascar, which brought with her two and twenty Savages from the Island St. Galle. They were much uglier and much more brutish than the Hottentots at the Cape of Good Hope; their Speech was hardly articulate, but confused like that of Children, and as if they Sung. They had no Hair on their Heads, only a rough scabby Skin. They were strong, tho' excessive Lean, and had scarce any thing but Skin and Bones. Before their Privy-Parts they had a Wild-Cat's Skin, which reach'd down to their Knees; for in St. Galle there are multitudes of Wild-Cats.

They were shut up all together, like Beasts in a Stable, and were fed with nothing but raw Rice and Water, which it seems was too good for 'em; for in a little while they all died. A nastier sort of Men I never saw; for as I said, except their Head, they were Hairy all over to their very Hands and Feet. Their Face was very red; but their Teeth were very fine and white: Their Eyes were very large; and their large Ears slit in five or six places. [Page 195] About their Neck and Feet they had some Twists of Sea-Rushes; which their Women made use of likewise to bear up their long swagging Breasts. I believe the World doth not afford a more Sa­vage Wild sort of Men. St. Galle, from which they came, lies about 1300 miles from Batavia, and about 300 from the Cape, on the side of the Island Ma­dagascar.

Some time after this, a Javian Hermit, who lived in a Cave on the Blaw Peper-bergh, came to Batavia to speak with the General; and refusing to deliver his Message to any of his Attendants, he was ad­mitted and brought before the General, with whom he spent some time alone. His Business with him, was to make a discovery of a Plot, which several Javians had laid to surprize the City of Bantam, and to put all the Dutch Garrison to the Sword: Upon which the General dispatch'd an Express to the Governor of Bantam, to Command him to be upon his Guard, and to let him know that he should have a Reinforcement sent him speedily by Sea and Land.

The Company upon this conceived a great Sus­picion, that the young King might be in this Con­spiracy; But it was upon a close Enquiry, found to be a meer surmize; and all his Actions shewing so much the contrary all along, they continued to treat him with the same Respect as before: For all the Ring-leaders of this Plot were detected, taken, and punished according to their Deserts; but not the least thing could be found that might any way reflect on the young King.

The Hermit did not Care to return to his Cot­tage again: So the Company promised him, that he should never want if he would continue with them; which he accepted of readily.

[Page 196] He spake seven Languages; to wit, Turkish, Ara­bic, Persian, Moorish, Chinese, Maleish, and Javian; and had Travell'd over most parts of Asia and A­frica. He had lived 15 years in that Cell; and it was a wonder how a Man should continue there so long with any thing of safety; considering the ma­ny Tygers, Leopards, Serpents, and other devour­ing Creatures that are in great numbers all about that Mountain.

His Dress was very much like that of the Arme­nian Women; so that one would not have taken him for a Man; and besides that, one might have mistaken him, even tho' one was near him, because he had pull'd his Beard out by the Roots: He was very thoughtful, spake but seldom, and very grave­ly. He had above twenty pair of Shooes made of Pastboard, hung about his Girdle. Instead of a Hat, he had a sort of a Turbant wrapt about his Head made of strip'd Cotton, about twelve Ells long, as the Moors usually wear.

As to his Diet, he Eat moderately, but loved to have all very good. Whatever he Drank, he poured part of it upon his Head, which was as bare as the Palm of a Man's Head, which was as bare as the Palm of a Man's Hand. The Lodging that was ap­pointed for him was over against mine, so that I had some Conversation with him in the Maleish Language. But he was not free of his Discourse, except sometimes in the Relation of his Voyages, and the Description of the Countries he had seen; as to the rest he seemed reserved. I ask'd him one day, how he came to be an Hermit; to which he replied, just as you come to be a Surgeon. But to have done with my capricious Gentleman.

I was sent for to one of the General's Servants, so that I had once more an opportunity of seeing the General's Garden, which was one of the finest that ever was seen; for all kind of Asiatic or In­dian Trees and Flowers, in which were two Parts [Page 197] set aside, the one for all manner of Wild-Beasts; the other for all sorts of Birds, of all which, an ac­count would be too tedious: In short, I can hardly think of any rare Creature that was not there to be seen.

Two days after this, my Companion and I, and two more, went a shooting, about two or three Leagues into the Country, along by the Powder-Mills, upon the River Jacatra: And as we had pretty good sport, and kill'd a good quantity of Pigeons, Rabbets, &c. we were going to a Negery to refresh our selves, and make Merry with our Pro­visions, we spying a Rabbet making towards a little Wood; two of us went after him, while the others went forward to get that Dress'd which we had kill'd. As we were in pursuit of our Game, my Friend one way, and I the other, I came to a nar­row River's side, where I saw a Man sitting in a Melancholly posture, with his Eyes on the Ground. Hearing him groan and sigh, put me to a stand, and ask him what he was; to which he answer'd me with a deep sigh, that he was a poor Hollander. I askt him what he did there, and whither he de­sign'd to go. Ah! Sir, says he, I know not where I am, nor which way I am to take, but surely Pro­vidence hath sent you to my Relief; and seeing I have the Happiness once more to meet with a Christian, I beseech you to direct me, (if there's any way for't) how I may come to you: Saying this, he fell upon his Knees; so I told him, I would get him over, and bid him stay there. My Com­panion had made his shoot, and was gone to the rest: So I went up to the Village, and got a Praw, which I sent to bring him over to me; and as soon as he came over, he gusht out in Tears, and Embracing me, thank'd me most passionately for my seasonable Assistance. I desired him to go along with me to some Company I had, which he did; [Page 198] and gave me a short account of himself by the way. My Company wondred who I had got with me, but when they were informed what he was, we all help'd to Comfort him, and treated him as we did our selves. In that while he inform'd us of the par­ticulars of his Misfortunes: The sum of which was, That being come over from Delst, in the Company's Service, as Carpenter, he had been employed in the Kartirian Wars; and as he, with three more, were sent out to take a View of some part of the chief City of that Kingdom, they had the ill Fortune to fall into the Hands of the Enemy, who carried them away Prisoners to Tuban, and there Sold them to a rich Chinese, who was just come thither in a Ship of his own: That Chinese carried them all four to China, to the Sea-Port Town call'd Quancheu; where after seven years of hard Slavery, they found an opportunity, and made their escape from thence in a small Boat to the Island of Manilha; where they luckily met with a Ship that was coming to Batavia, but as they were got almost within reach of it, and within four miles of Land, their Ship struck upon a Shelf, and there sunk; and he knew of none that had saved themselves but he alone. The Relation of this dismal Story did affect us so, that we were as Melancholly as himself.

Our Dinner being over, we return'd to Batavia, and took this poor Man with us, and presented him to the General, who appointed him a Post under the Gunner of the Castle, till further Orders.

I need not give the Reader the particular Ac­count which he gave us of his Slavery, it being much the same with what we use to hear concerning that Condition, and may be found in most Books of Travels, especially in those of Ferdinandus Men­dez Pinto, who gives an Experimental Account of all sorts of Slavery, having been himself, taken 13 times, and 17 times sold, in the space of 21 years.

[Page 199] About this time three Ships were getting ready, to go and make a discovery of a certain Island which lies Northward of Japan. There had been some Ships sent thither some years before, but they had all miscarried; some by the way; others (as it was reported) by the attractive power of the Mag­netic Mountains were drawn violently to Shore; so that to avoid that danger, they contrived the Building of these Ships, without Nails or Iron Work. When they were ready, they Beat up for Volun­teer Seamen, promising them for an Encourage­ment a Twelve Month's Pay over and above their Wages; half of it to be paid presently, the other half when they came back. This raised Men in abundance, and as fast as they could wish; and in three weeks time, the Ships being ready, went un­der sail with 220 Men on Board of 'em.

It is said that Island was first found out by the Portugueses, but that they were forced to abandon it by reason of the excessive Cold and multitude of Wild-Beasts; for it lies Northward of Tartary. But the Gold, which as it is reported, comes in great store down several Rivers of that Country, was (I presume) the only Motive which set the Dutch upon making these dangerous Attempts, and upon ventring a second time, after such bad Success. What became of this last Expedition I never heard; for there came no News of it to Batavia before I came away from thence.

Soon after this, a great piece of Roguery was carried on at Bantam, which unhappily proved successful. The Dutch had there under one of the Bastions, a great Magazine of Powder, and they had unfortunately at that time above 100 Tun of it in the Magazine. A Javian undertook to get in by breaking of the Wall, which he was forced to do by digging a way under Ground quite to the side of it. Every day he closed up the entrance [Page 200] into his Hole with Earth, so artificially and so soft­ly, that no body perceived it, and that neither of the two Sentinels that stood on the Bastion heard the least Noise at any time. When he was got in, he took a Bamboo-Cane that was hollow, and fil­ling that with Gun-powder, lighted it at one end, and the Fire coming to the Powder in the Cane, gave a great Blow, with some Flame, without doing any further harm for the present. This alarm'd all the People, who presently went to search every corner of the Bastion, to see what the matter was, and there the Bamboo-Cane was found, and the Powder that was in it was consumed: But no sooner had they open'd the Vault-Door, but the Wind finding a free passage, took some sparks of Fire a­long with it, which lighted among the Powder, and in an instant set that on Fire, and blew up the whole Bastion with 16 pieces of Cannon, and above 200 Persons.

An Account of this Accident was quickly sent to the General at Batavia, who presently sent Men thither; together with Orders to the Governor, and to the young King, to make a diligent En­quiry after the Author's of this Villany: And in a short time, three Javians were discovered to be the Men; who were brought bound to Batavia, and con­fess'd, That they were the only Contrivers of that Action; upon which they were all three Condemned to Die. He that had set Fire to the Cane, was brought upon a Scaffold erected for that purpose, and there Pinch'd with red-hot Tongs from the morning till towards the evening, at which time he was cut into Quarters; so that that day was spent in Torturing of that Fellow only. The next day the second was served in like manner; The third was Broke upon the Wheel.

[Page 201] We thought the time long now 'ere the Ships went off to Holland, or at least till the time was fixt for their going; which we expected daily should be done: However, we had got our Names upon the Roll, and having time enough, we ven­tured to take a small Journey together to visit the Hermits Cells; for which purpose we took some Javian Guides with us. The Road, we found as it was told us, very commodious, having a great many Inns, and good Accommodation, till we came to the Wilderness where these Hermits dwell. Within six or seven miles of which, we came to two Villages, one on one side, the other on the other side of the River; in the middle of which was a very high Rock, upon which was a Javian Temple. We went to see it, and found there only one Reverend Bard, who resided there all the Year round. That Temple was used only two days in the Year, viz. Their New-Year's Day, and the Feast of Mahomet, whose Sect they follow: And on those Days, there is much Praying and Worshiping, and great Processions made.

Having taken a View of this, we went on, and came to a Village that is near the Blawen Pepper-bergh, from which we had not above 2 or 3 miles to the place where the Cells are. In that Village we staid the latter part of that Day, and all that Night, in order to spend all the next day in sa­tisfying our Curiosity; and accordingly we got thi­ther early the next morning. There we saw a great many pretty Caves, cut out of the Natural Rocks, and very Artificially contrived. We had been told, that they were poor little miserable Holes that were not worth the seeing; but we were not a little surprized to find them so neat and de­lightful, nor less pleased to see how successfully they had imitated Nature; insomuch, that it was hard to judge, whether Nature or Art had had the [Page 202] chiefest hand in the ordering of 'em. These Cells were most inhabited by a sort of Men, who in imitation of their Founder, Devote themselves to a perpetual Austerity, Mortification, and Self-Denial, as he himself had set them an Example; assuring them, That the Chastizing of the Body, would conduce very much to Felicity, and would infallibly draw down God's Blessing upon them; so that he was look'd upon as a great Saint; and his Followers are valued at no less rate all over that Country.

They wore long Gowns after the manner of the Armenian Priests, or the Bonzen in Japan. They spend all Day and Night in lifting up their Eyes and Hands to Heaven, intimating, That they Desire nothing here below. The Javians that were our Guides, told us, That they used to Eat nothing but Boil'd Herbs, Beans, Roots, and such like Fruits: And that on some Days, which they call their Feast-Days, they eat Flies, Mice, Scorpions, and Spiders, drest with a Juice prest out of a cer­tain Herb that grows there in abundance, which looks very much like our Sorrel. In this poor Condition they live and die; but in the highest Esteem and Veneration among all the Javians: So that they never fail to be Canonized after their Death, and their Bodies are burnt with great Solemnity, and with all the respect imagi­nable; every one thinking himself happy, that can but come and throw in a Bundle of Sweet-Herbs upon the Corps.

Some of those Hermits, thinking that the more they mortisie the more they are acceptable to their God, Eat nothing but green Herbs and Roots, and that very sparingly; which makes them look so nastily, that it frightens one to look upon them, and kills them quickly too.

[Page 203] When we had seen all we could see, we came away time enough to reach the two Villages again before Night; where we staid that night; and the next morning we set out early, to get into Batavia as soon as we could; because we had a mind to share in the Rejoycing that was to be that day, it being the General's Birth-Day; wherefore we took a Praw, seeing the Wind and Tide was for us, and with a very quick passage down the River, came to Batavia just as the People began to move. All the Burghers and Freemen were in Arms, and drew up before the General's Lodgings in the Castle, where after the Discharge of all the Cannon about the Castle and City, they saluted his Excellency with several Vollies of Shot. Each Nation then came in a distinct Body with Presents to the Gene­ral; as first, the Chineses, Siamers, Japonneses, Ma­cassars, Amboineses, Bandaneses, &c. and even the Javians, who are not permitted to set a foot in the Castle on any other time, were then let in; but all these come but after the Company of Burghers and Freemen, which is composed of Dutch, Ger­mans, English, Danes, French, Portuguese, and other Christians, born in the Indies, who altogether make one Body. These Presents are Magnisicent, and one may judge they must needs be very conside­rable, when the very Soldiers who stood to their Arms under the Castle-Gate, had some Hundreds of Guildens given them.

Besides this, all the Streets were full of Lights, Bonesires, and Fireworks; wherein the Chineses em­ployed their utmost Art and Skill: And for three or four days there was nothing but Feasting and Treating one another.

The time now being come that the Fleet was to go to Holland, and the day fixt, viz. the 12th of February, (in case the Weather should permit it) my Friend and I made our Applications to be or­dered [Page 204] on Board of one Ship, if it might be thought convenient: And according to our Request, we were assign'd on Board the Ship called the Ex-change; which did not as yet lie before Batavia, but was resitting in the Island Onrust, and was ordered to get-ready to go Commadore of this Fleet, as she was to have gone with the last Fleet which went on the 22d of November 1684. but that she was disabled. Thus we had time enough to make Pro­vision for our Voyage.

The Ships being come into the Road before Ba­tavia, some days were appointed to Address our Prayers in the most solemn manner to the Al­mighty for his Protection, and to Beg of him that he would preserve us from all Dangers; which was Religiously observed in the Dutch and Maleish Churches.

After this, the General gave Order that the List of those who had served out their time, should be called over; and publick notice of it being given by the Clerk of the Musters, those who were to go, appeared all with their Arms in good Order, and by Beat of Drum were led into the Castle, where they deliver'd their Arms into the Hands of the Armourer: Upon which every Man of 'em was presented with four Rixdollers, as a Gratuity over and above each Man his Half-year's Pay. Those that wanted more Money, and desired to have it might be furnisht with it, so it was less or not more than what the Company owed them, abating or allowing 20 per Cent. and giving an Acquittance of his Money so received aforehand, made and signed before a Notary Publick.

CHAP. XIV.

I Had made Provisions of all things necessary for my Voyage, but especially of preserved Pepper, Arack, and Tobacco, which are the chief Things for such a long Voyage as that is. I took with me a good quantity of China-Ware, some pounds of Tea, and some Murus and Parcallen, (which are a sort of very sine Linnen) off the Company, upon my own Account, which amounted to a great deal of Money. After this, I went to take my leave of all my Friends, and amongst others, of our Coun­tryman, of whom I made mention before, who en­tertain'd my Friend and me with all the Expressions of Love and Friendship that could be imagined. He gave me a Seal-Ring and a Letter, desiring me to deliver them to his Wife at Ʋlm, in case I got safe thither; so we parted with Tears in our Eyes all three of us. He conducted us two to the Vier­kant or Square, from whence we took a Praw, and went on Board the Exchange; where a Review was made the next day, to see if there were no body [Page 206] wanting. All being found there, Orders came the next day, that we should weigh Anchor, and go a Quarter of a League into Sea, and there cast An­chor again.

Then was there again a Day appointed to Im­plore the Blessing of the Almighty; which was du­ly observed, both at Land, and on Board our Ships. Then the Masters of the Ships and the Factors were invited a Shore to take their Farewel Dinner with the General, and to receive his Orders for Sailing, and to take their Oaths of Fidelity: After which, they repaired every one to their several Ships, with Orders to set Sail with the first fair Wind; but the Wind was so changeable for three or four days, that it made us weigh our Anchors, and drop them again four or five times. Some of our more debauch'd Seamen, and others, did so fret and fume at these frequent Disappointments, and grew so very impatient, that they could not forbear vent­ing their Rage in very undecent and prophane Ex­pressions; for which, the Master, a good old Man of near 90 years of Age, reproved them very sharply, and threatned them severely if they did not refrain from such Words; telling them, that this was not the way to obtain their Desires, but that they ought rather to Pray to God to send us a favourable Wind, and patiently wait his Will and Pleasure.

About 12 of the Clock, in the 5th Night, the Wind came good for us; whereupon, our Master as Commadore, ordered a Gun to be fired as a sig­nal for the two other Ships to weigh Anchor with us. So we all went under Sail together, for in the Voyages homeward, the Ships are always obliged to go together; and tho' the one may be a quicker Sailer than the other, yet she must not run away before the rest; but she is forced to Furl some of her Sails, so as the slowest of 'em may keep pace [Page 207] with her; and nothing excuses their parting from each other but a Storm, or hard Weather; after which they are to rejoyn as soon as possible.

The next day we came and Anchor'd before Bantam, about a League from Shore near the place where we lay when we went in pursuit of the Py­rates. Our Boat went on Shore, and I went with it, to see some of my Acquaintance there, and to take my leave of them. Notwithstanding that the Steward had given me very strict charge not to stay, and told me two or three times he was just going, I could not part from my Friends readily, and when I came to go, I found my Spark gone; and was told he was gone off half an Hour before, with eight Cows, and other Provisions that he was come for. When I heard this, I was ready to die with Fear and Grief; and had no other Remedy, but immediately to Hire a light Praw with 16 Oars; When we came out of the River of Bantam into Sea, we saw our Ships just ready to Sail; for the Wind was very good, and then they loose no time: However, I pluckt up a good Heart when I saw 'em, and encouraged the Javians to pull stoutly, and promised them six Rixdollers amongst 'em over and above the Bargain, in case they overtook our Ship. This made them Row like Tygers, and by that time it was Night, as the Ship was got up to the Island Dwars in the Zee, we came in reach of her, at which the Javians set up a full Huzza, and I was so transported with Joy, that I could not but joyn with them very heartily. As soon as we could come to fasten by her side, I went to get up; but unfortunately made a false step, and tumbled down again into the Boat, and so Sprain'd my Leg, that I was forced to be drawn up into the Ship, and lie still for some days.

[Page 208] The next day, three of the Cows were kill'd and distributed among the Ship's Crew. Some days af­ter we passed the Streights of Sunda, and came to the Prince's Island, where we parted with our Convoy Ships, and sent them back to Batavia.

As we came by the Prince's Island, which lies at the furthest corner of Great Java, we came into open Sea, and the Wind being right good for us, we continued our Course forward, not being wil­ling to loose so fair a Wind as we had then; so that we did not put in there, nor would we stay to send in our Boats for a Recruit of fresh Water, as it is Customary; but made the best of our way, and fired three Guns to wish each other a good Voy­age.

We steer'd our Course now directly towards Cape de Bon Esperance, Hall'd in our Long-Boat and Shallop, and took in our Anchors, and fitted our selves for the Voyage.

When we were got out of sight of Great Java, a second Review was made of all our Ship's Crew, which amounted to Eighty eight Persons in all, viz. the Master, the Upper Steersman, two Under Steers­men, and two Mates, to relieve them from Duty; two Quarter-Masters, to Order the Watches, which I have given an Account of in the beginning of this Book; a Factor; a Book-keeper; and a Clerk or Assistant; An Upper Chirurgion, (my self) and an Under Master-Chirurgion; a Steward, who di­stributed the Allowances of Meat and Drink to every Person according to the Master's Orders; a Cook and a Scullion; a Gunner with four Men and Boys, who were likewise to help the Steward; a Serjeant; two Master Carpenters, and three Mates, a Boatswain, and his Boy, a Schieman and his Boy; a Provost; four Boys; the eight Soldiers, and 32 Mariners; We had no Chaplain, but we had Prayers duly Read by the Book-keeper: There was ano­ther [Page 209] Master of a Ship, and a Master Chirurgion; but neither of them had any Post in our Ship, they were only Passengers.

We came safe with all these People, till we got past the Island, called St. Paul of Amsterdam: After which our greatest concern was, to pass safe through the Latitude of Madagascar, or St. Maurice; which, as I have already told you, is very subject to dread­ful Storms and Hurricanes, most Seasons of the year; insomuch, that more Ships are lost there­abouts, than any where again.

Having escaped this place likewise, tho' we met with hard weather, we came at last, after nine weeks Sail, in sight of the great Promontory of Africa, the Cape of Good Hope, which rejoyced us much. One of the Carpenter's Men had the good fortune to spy Land the first of any; for which good Tydings, the Master presented him with two Ducatoons and a Quart of Canary, as it was ever the Custom on Board our Ships, to gratifie those that first discover Land. We immediately loosned our Anchors, and fasten'd them to their Cables, and made directly towards Tafel-Bay, which lay about 20 miles from us. The next day we were within two Leagues of it, it being a very great Snow, and the Weather being very Calm, which was very extraordinary, it being for the most part very Blustring there all the year round. We hall'd out our Boat, and Long-Boat, into which having sent some of our Men with Oars, they hall'd our Ship into the Haven. This took up half a day, and when we were come to a place where we could cast Anchor, we did so; and hoisted up our Flags, after which they at Land did the same likewise up­on the Tower of the Castle.

Then our Master went to Shore, and gave the Governor of the place an account of our Success thus far on our Voyage. Here we found three [Page 210] Ships from Holland, and one English Fly-boat, riding at Anchor. We were immediately supplied with some Sheep, Fruits, and Herbs, which were very welcome Refreshments, and many Hottentots came on Board of us; some of which, our Men made se­veral little Presents to. Our Men were likewise permitted to go on Shore by turns, to refresh them­selves: Some of our Crew were sent on purpose, that they might go into the Wood to fetch some Fuel, and others were sent for a Recruit of fresh Water.

When I went ashore, I found the place extraor­dinary full of People, but mostly of those Soldiers, which belong'd to the Dutch Ships that lay there. They were brave lusty Men, and very brisk, ha­ving met with nothing but good Success in their Voyage thither. Some of their Men were Sick, and carried into the Hospital, which was pretty full. I went to see it, and told near 200 of them there; most of which were forced to be left be­hind, not being recover'd before the Fleet was ob­liged to go on, on their Voyage. These Ships be­ing gone off, the Town was left as thin as might be, and every thing was as cheap again; so that we had more conveniency of making our selves Merry. I spent here some time very pleasantly, my Landlord being a very honest Fellow, and ex­traordinary obliging. He was of Newrenberg, and by Employment a Brewer. He having some Know­ledge of me before this, seem'd daily to increase his good Opinion and Esteem for me; and his Daughter, I observed likewise, to become every day more and more obliging, which I look'd upon as a design between them of staying me there: But I was so heartily set upon my Return home, that I might once again Enjoy the free Liberty of my Religion, that I could not be gain'd upon to al­ter my Mind upon any kind of Consideration what­ever. [Page 211] A few days after, I found, that what I had surmiz'd was true enough; and the Father very kindly made me an Offer of his Daughter, and told me what he was ready to do for me if I would stay there; and withal, that he had a great Incli­nation to go into his own Country, which he was loath to do, unless he could by such a means as this, make over his Lands to his Daughter, and put her into Possession of them: For a Freeman cannot otherwise dispose of what he hath; and if he is desirous to leave the Country, he cannot Sell his Estate, but it must fall of Course to the Company; so that he can take nothing over with him but his Personal Estate. But neither the Daughter's Beauty, nor the Sweetness of his Ha­bitation, could have such an Influence upon me as to make me break my Resolution. So that with­out hearkening to him any further than just to thank him, I made all necessary Preparation, and made me ready to go back to my Ship. But I wonder'd that my Landlord could ever have the Heart to part from so pleasant a place as his was to return home, seeing he had that only thing which I wanted, the opportunity of Exercising my Reli­gion publickly.

One day I went out by my self to fetch a walk, and as I went musing along, I found my self before I was aware of it, within a quarter of a Mile of the Lewen-bergh, between which and the Sea, I saw some of those Hutts which the Hottentots dwell in. Upon sight of which, my Curiosity led me to go and see what kind of life those People led. I went into one of 'em, and there I saw a parcel of 'em lying upon the Ground like so many Hogs, and fast asleep: But as soon as they awaked and saw me, they sprung up and came up to me, making a noise like Turkies. I was not a little concerned; yet seeing they d [...]d not go about to [Page 212] do me any harm, I pull'd out a piece of Tobacco and gave it them: They were mightily pleased with that Present, but the way they took to shew their Gratitude, and to thank me, was so odious to me, that I wish'd I had not given them any oc­casion of returning me Thanks. For no sooner had I given them this, but they all lifted up those Flaps of Sheep-Skin which hang before their Privy-Parts to give me a sight of 'em. What with this beastly Behaviour, and what with the nasty stench of their Kennels, (as I think I may properly call 'em) I made all haste to be gone. Some of 'em I found at their Dinner, or rather, Eating, (for that is a word of too much Order and Decency for them.) They had only a piece of Cow-Hide, laid out upon the Coals a Broyling, and to make the Carbonnade more pleasant, they had squeezed the Dung out of the Guts, and spread it finely on the Hide to moisten it, and to give it a relish; and this they take when it is broyl'd, and chop it, and so Eat it. The very ordering of it in this manner, turn'd my Sto­mach so, that I could not stay to see the Eating of it: But I made all the haste I could to be gone. I went from thence directly to the Lewen-bergh, which is a fine pleasant Hill, not at all Rocky, but cover'd over with Grass, and affording a most plea­sant Prospect. Here I sat me down, and took a view of the Country all round me. After I had been there a while, I espied at Sea a Ship making to the Port with full Sails; and presently after I saw the Flag hoisted up in the Castle. Upon this I came down to go towards the Fort, and as I was going along the Shore, there stood a Servant Maid, who was come to fill a little Tub with Sand: As soon as she saw me, she cry'd out to me as loud as she could, Maridi sini Senior: Oh Sir! Pray come and helpme. I ran full speed towards her to help her, and when I came up to her, she shewed me a [Page 213] dreadful long Serpent, that had just then been de­vouring a young Hottentot, and had swallowed him all up but the Legs, which still stuck out of his Mouth. This had put the Maid into a great Con­sternation, and made her afraid that she should be his next Prey: And truly being much in the same Apprehensions my self, I betook my self to my Heels, which the Maid seeing, she gave a dreadful Shriek, and began to run too. That great Shriek she gave brought out some Hottentots that were there­abouts, who came running towards us. As soon as they saw what was the matter, they got them­selves ready to catch the Serpent; and having brought out some long Ropes, they threw them with wonderful Dexterity about its middle, and drawing the Ropes, some at one end, some at ano­ther, as hard as they were able; they held him so fast, that I expected they would have cut him in two. All the while the Serpent Hiss'd in a fear­ful manner, and Twisted it self strangely, but could not slip away. At last came some of the Men with great Poles, with which they knock'd him on the Head. This dreadful Creature was very near 16 Foot long. They fastned it to a Stick, and let it dry.

This being done, I return'd to the place from whence I came.

In my return I met with some Wild Hottentots, who come down thither from the Cafre's Country, about 100 Leagues from thence. They, as I ob­served, are almost Blind in the day time, at least extream Dim-sighted; so that they do most of their Business by Night. In the time that I staid in the Cape, I saw once one of these Wild Prople exe­cuted for Theft: He had some time before stolen some Cows and Sheep from some of the Freemen, without the Approbation of their King, (which is a Dignity they confer upon some one amongst 'em; [Page 214] and whereever they are, tho' but to the number of five or six together, they always make them a King or Captain to Rule over them, without whose Consent no kind of thing is to be done; and in this the Company doth not at all interpose, but leaves them to their own Customs). The Crimi­nal was tied Hand and Foot, and stretched out be­twixt two Posts, about half a Man's height from the Ground; after which some Men came with great Sticks, and beat him to Death. If they hit him on the Head or Breast he is soon dispatcht; but they never give over as long as they find any Breath in him. When he is expired, they carry him to the Wood, and there fasten him to a Bough, and leave him for a Prey to Wild Beasts.

The Ship that I espied coming from the top of the Hill, was an English Fly-boat, which came and cast Anchor by the other English Ship that lay there before. The Master gave us an Account of his Voyage, which had been thus far very pro­sperous. He was bound for Jappan, but was to call at several Places by the way. He put in here to Treat with the Governour, but about what, I could not be informed.

After we had staid herefull three Weeks, which is more by a Week than Ships generally do, every body was ordered on Board in a readiness to be going. Our Master being Commadore, call'd a Council to settle the Orders of their Voyage. The next day a Review was made, where all were found in very good Order, except two that were very sick; but yet, as ill as they were, they would not stay there, but would venture on their Voyage.

The next day, after the Review was made, our Master and Factor, together with the other Masters of Ships, went once more a Shore to wait on the [Page 215] Governor to take their Leave of him; They came back that same night in order to go out of the Bay with the first fair Wind; which happen'd that very night, being the 23th of May; and then we steer'd our Course North-West.

All the next day we had the African Coasts in sight. Our Water Vessels were shut up again, and dealt out by Portions; which was, a Can to each Person once in 24 hours; and half a Quartern of Brandy, or Arack. When we had been a while under Sail, out came a Seaman from under the Hatches, who had hid himself there till we were got out in full Sea. He was but just come to the Cape with an English Ship; and being sent ashore to fetch in fresh Water, he so contrived his Busi­ness as to get in with our Men, being resolved ne­ver to go with the English again. He was an Ham­burgher, a brisk active Fellow: In the hardest of Weather, he was first and last on the Mast, and extreamly serviceable. So that he got the love of every body, and generally had a larger share of the Distributions than any of the rest.

Having now sailed about 10 days, we came up to St. Hellens, where the Ships that are homeward bound from India seldom fail to call; but our Master did not think fit to put in there, partly because we had already made great stays, and partly because we needed no Provisions.

In 14 days we found our selves under the Line, and the Sun stood Perpendicular over our Heads. This was the twelfth time that I passed under it in my Voyages to and fro. As soon as we came there, our Master commanded a White Flag to be hung out; which was the usual Token for all the Masters and Steersmen in the Fleet to come on Board of him. When they were all come together, he open'd their Instructions to them, which were, That contrary to the Custom of the East-India homeward [Page 216] bound Ships, (which was to Steer their Course betwixt Scotland and Hitland, in their return to Holland) they should now go round Hitland, and pass betwixt Fero and Filo, and so keep along the Coasts of Norway, where they should meet with a Squadron of Men of War for their Convoy. And this was accordingly done. But now being our Voyage was made so much the longer by these Or­ders than otherwise it would have been, they be­gan to shorten each Man's Allowance to make it hold out the better.

All this while we got, (Blessed be God) all safe from under the Line, and were not above seven days a passing of it. Whereas it is common for Ships to lie there two or three Months, and cannot stir for want of a Wind, so that what with the Calm, and the excessive Heat, they loose abundance of their Men: But we had but five Men sick all that time.

From thence we pass'd to the Gras-Zee, or Grass-Sea, so called from the Grass which grows there, so that the Sea appears just like a Meadow, and it lookt to us as if we were already with one Foot upon Land. This held for near 100 Leagues toge­ther. We pass'd through it with a very good Wind, and were very glad to get out of it, not­withstanding it was a pretty Sight enough. When we pull'd up any of that Grass, we found it had ve­ry long small Roots.

Soon after this we came in sight of the Islands Corvo and Flores, and at the same time of the North-Star. Being got thus far, each Seaman's Allow­ance began to increase again. But before this Order was given, the Master sent to Examine all the Provisions, and had an Account brought him of what quantity there was left of each particular. He finding there was good store of Arack left, and that we had had a very quick Passage so far, and the [Page 217] Wind continued so very fair for us, that it gave us hopes of being quickly at the end of our Voy­age, was willing to let the Men enjoy themselves a little more, and so order'd that a pretty good share of Arack should be dealt out to every one of 'em. But there being several that were sick, and could not use their Arack themselves, disposed of it to those that were well, who having then too much of that strong Liquor, made themselves exceeding Drunk, and committed a great deal of Disorder: For tho' there is very severe Laws on Shipboard, and those are generally Executed with Rigour, yet such is the Seamen's Temper, that they ever grow more disorderly and ungovernable as they come nearer home. Wherefore our Master being a very good honest old Man, resolved to let none have any more, but those that were in a fit Condi­tion to Drink it themselves; And that this might be observed punctually, he order'd the Under Steersman to stand by every day, and to see every body Drink their own Portion: By this means he put a stop to those Disorders, and prevented a great deal of Mischief.

When we came more and more in sight of the North-Star, we began to be very chearful, and fell a Singing of the Hymn,

Hoe Schoon light ons de Morgen-Star.

But by that time we got a little beyond the Island Fero, the Weather began to seem very Cold to us, tho' it was in the very middle of the Summer, that we could not bear to sit above Deck, till we had got some more Cloaths on. What made us so very sensible of Cold was, that we came from so Hot a Country as the Indies is. Here we observed, That the day was 20 hours long, and that in the four hours that the Sun was below our Horizon, it still gave so much light on the one side, or the other of us, that a Man might make shift to Read any Book of a [Page 218] fair Character any time of the Night, by the help only of that refracted light.

The next day our Master, and Steersmen, judged that we were not far from Hitland. Then we saw continually great Flocks of Birds and flying Fish, which fell down in great numbers in our Ship. So Orders were given to watch on the Main-top-Mast-Head, and about the Evening one cry'd out Land. The Mountains assured us sufficiently that it was Hit­land; therefore we bore directly upon it with a brisk Gale, and no small Joy it was to us, that we were thus happily drawing apace towards our Country.

Thus we kept sailing all the next day along that Coast, within about a League from it, and so past it. Quickly after that we spied four Men of War, which we concluded were our Convoy; and being come somthing nearer, we perceived them to be so by their Colours: Upon which, we hung out ours, and fired some Guns for a Signal. We likewise Hall'd out our Boats to go on Board them, but the Wind hindred us from doing it. All the while we came nearer and nearer, and the Convoy having a small Tender with them, they loaded it with Provisions, and sent it towards us; as it is always the Custom to meet the homeward bound Ships, and to bring them fresh Victuals, &c. to refresh them after such a long Voy­age. They brought some Vessels of Beer, Sack, Butter, Cheese, Tobacco, Pipes, and Brandy.

When these things were brought on Board of us; one Vessel of Beer was put on the one side of the Main-Mast, and another on the other side; and those were free for any body to go to, and Drink at Discretion.

But we did not long Enjoy our selves thus; For as we were just coming to a pitch of Mirth and Jol­lity, such a dreadful Wind arose, as we had not met with any thing like it in our Voyage; and it terri­fied us so much the more, because we were near home, [Page 219] where we thought our selves secure, not dreaming of any farther danger. The night came upon us, and our Ship being very old and crazy, began to spring several Leaks, so that we were forced to keep continually a Pumping. The Weather was so cold, the night so dark, and the Wind so very boisterous, that we were past all hopes, except what we had in God's Gracious Providence, and to that alone we committed our selves. The morning came, but gave us but a small Relief, for the Wind was as terrible as before; and so it pleased God to hold on for four days together without Intermission; at the end of which, God was pleased to Calm the Wind and Seas, and restore us to our former Peace and favourable Gales; for which we all hear­tily offer'd up our Thanks to the Almighty.

Here we lost our Upper Steersman, who had been sick most of the Voyage, and we threw him over­board.

We had after this hard Weather, a pretty good Gale of Wind which brought us quickly in sight of the Northern Coasts. We sail'd then all along by them, and steer'd our Course directly upon Holland, reckoning to reach the Maes in three or four days more. In our Course we met with some Fisher­men, who came a-board of us, and sold us some fresh Herrings. This was to me the greatest Feast I had had a great while, and I think I never liked any thing better in my life. Among those Fisher­men, there was one, that was as he said, 142 years old; and because we scrupled to believe him, he shew'd us an Extract of his Birth out of the Regi­ster-Book: He was as Active at his Business as any of his Fellows.

Shortly after this came a Pilot on Board of us, and by Orders from the Company, took the Go­vernment of the Ship on himself, and dismist the Master: So we came to cast Anchor before the [Page 220] Briel. As soon as we had cast Anchor here, the Deputies of the Company came on Board of us: They are generally two of the oldest that are Deputed for that purpose. These Gentlemen call'd all the Ship's Crew together, and thank'd them in the name of all the Company for their Faithfulness and Diligence in their Service; from which they im­mediately freed them, and promised them that they should be paid with speed: After which, every one was at liberty, and was carried to Shore in some small Ketches that came for that purpose.

Immediately upon this, came other Seamen on Board the Ship, which they call Sjouwers. These Furl'd in all the Sails, and took them down; fired all the Guns and charged them again. All the Pro­visions they found remaining was theirs. Every one of us was forced to leave his Chest on Board, they being all to be brought to the East-India House, and there to be Search'd.

The Wound I had received in the Wars of Ban­tam had of late been a little uneasie to me; and the two Bullets which were ever since that time in my Leg, began to be a little troublesome: But now my Pain increased so fast upon me, that in a very little while after we came to the Briel, I was no more able to walk at all by my self; but was forced to be carried into a House by a Couple of our Men. I was sorry I had not a little more time to Ease my self here; but the rest being ready to go for Rotterdam, I was obliged to be gone along with them.

Being come to Rotterdam, and having within 3 days time received my Chest back again, as all the rest likewise had. I was forced to go from thence to Amsterdam, that being the Chamber where I had engaged my self; and from which I was to receive my Money. Thither I went partly by Land, and partly by Water; but either way with so much pain [Page 221] and uneasiness, that all the Hardships I had under­gone in all my Voyages were not to be compared to that: Yet was I full of Acknowledgement to Almighty God, who had deliver'd me out of so many Extream Dangers to which I had been ex­posed, from the merciless Sea, fierce and cruel Ser­pents and Beasts; and from several Heathens of many Nations more Barbarous than them all, and had brought me again into a Christian Country. And though I was not in Health of Body, yet it was an exceeding Comfort to me, to have so good Opportunities again of making better Provision for my Soul, and to participate of that Holy Sacra­ment from which I had been absent during seven years. Wherefore being in this weak Condition, the chief thing I desired was to have a Minister, and to receive the Communion. My Landlady help'd me to one who was the Minister of the Ger­man Lutheran Church at Amsterdam, from whose Pious Discourse, and Absolution, together with the Blessed Sacrament, I received an exceeding great Comfort, and then very chearfully resign'd my self up to the Almighty's Pleasure. I thank'd my Ghostly Father for his Kindness, and made him a Present of six Ducatoons, some Roses of Jericho, and some China Ware.

My Pain encreasing rather than diminishing, and I growing daily worse and worse, I sent for a Doctor and two Chirurgions, not willing to trust to my own Skill only. And being I was not able to go and receive my Money my self, I was ob­liged to send a Person to the East-India Chamber to receive my Money and Goods, by Virtue of a Letter of Attorney which I gave him. The Mo­ney that was Due to me from the Company did not amount to more than 4 or 500 Ducatoons, which was all the Fruit of my Labours; except some con­siderable East-India Goods I had brought over on [Page 222] my own Account, which I had to Sell: But by that time I had satisfied my Attorney, my Do­ctor, and the two Chirurgions, and defray'd the rest of my Charges, I found my Bag very light. My Doctor did not cost me above Forty Dutch Gilders: The two Chirurgions, who were two of the most famous Artists in the whole City of Am­sterdam, had Eighty Rixdollars; They had taken out my two Bullets, and cleared the Bone of a­bove Twenty Splinters, great and small: For my Lodging, I paid TWO Rixdollars a Week, and had but a very poor Accommodation neither. The Apothecary too came in with a hideous Bill. In short, I should have been but in a miserable Con­dition if I had not had Money: And that went after such a Rate, that in less than Three Months time I had spent above 300 Ducatoons. How­ever, I began to recover a little, and my pain was not sharp as before; tho' I could not go or stand as yet: But as soon as I was able to stir, I was re­solved to continue my Journey, and set out of this place, and endeavour to get home, what­ever befel me. And in order thereunto I took a Coach to carry me to the Ʋtrecht-Poort, where I took Boat for Ʋtrecht, and from thence went to Nimeguen, and so passed through Cleveland to Cologne. By that time I was got hither, I was so fatigued, that I was not in a capacity of moving any further; and therefore I was forced to lie still here for near three Weeks; during which time, I spent a great deal of Money again, and was so weak that I had hardly any hopes of ever reaching so far as home; nor did any Body think I should ever have recover'd. But it pleased God to Bless human Endeavours, so that I recovered a little again; upon which I immediately got my self carried to the Rhine, and there went on Board a Ship which carried me to Mentz, and thence to Franckfort. [Page 223] Some Relations and Gentlemen of my Acquain­tance were so kind as to come to meet me before I got Embark'd on the Rhine; but I was not in a Condition to take notice of them. However, they were so Civil, as to Convoy me along the Shore. When I was come to Franckfort, I was forced to stay without the City two days before they would permit me to enter, and the Weather being very Cold, I made but a poor shift in the Ship all that while: till at length, the Chirurgions came to me, and went themselves to the Burgher-Master; upon which I was let in to the City that very night, tho' late. It being hard to get a Lodging in an Inn at that time of night, some good Friends of mine carried me to a private House, where some of my Acquaintance came to Visit me. One of them got me a Coach, which in seven days time brought me to the place where I so earnestly desired to be, the City where I was Born. There I found all my Dear Sisters alive and well, who received me with all the Demonstrations of that sincere Love and Affection they had for me, and were extream­ly Serviceable to me.

Thus I finish'd my Travels, which had taken up Nine whole years: And by the Faithful Relation which I here give thee of them: Thou mayst not only see, what Dangers and Difficulties I have been exposed to in so many various Adventures, but al­so thou oughtest to Admire the wonderful Goodness of God, who so wonderfully delivers Men, and never forsakes those that put their Trust in him. And not being able to Praise him sufficiently my self for his great and signal Mercies to me, I heartily desire that every thing that hath Breath may Praise the Lord.

CHAP. I.

IT is about sixty years since some rich Merchants and others in Holland, as at Amsterdam, Enck­huisen, Rotterdam, Leyden, Delft, Hoorn, Mid­dleburgh, and Flessinguen, having joyned Stocks, made [Page 226] up a Company, Rigg'd out some Ships, and Man­ning them with Officers and Seamen, sent them to the East-Indies. They have from time to time mightily increased their Strength there, and at length made themselves so powerful, as to wage War, not only against some Kings of Europe, as of England and Portugal; but to be able also to Curb several Kings and Emperors of the East-Indies. And hereby they are already become much more Wealthy than some Kings are, and grow every day greater and greater.

The rich Things which several Persons have brought with them out of the East-Indies, the great Booty which several opportunities offer to Men, the just and exact Pay of those who are em­ployed in the Service of the Company, on the one side; the desire of seeing strange Countries, and the Customs and Manners of People, so far distant, on the other, induce many Men to undertake this Voyage: Besides that, there are many Strangers that come into Holland, who are drawn in by a sort of Kidnappers, to engage themselves in the Ser­vice of the Company, allured by the hopes of great Profit and Advantage.

These Buyers and Sellers of Men, are People that entice Strangers to their Houses, if they see they have but little Money, or are in perfect want, or if they come of themselves through Necessity, re­ceive them, and provide 'em with Meat, Drink, and Cloaths plentifully, till the Ships are ready to go, and the People Embark; Then each Kidnapper brings his Men, sometimes Ten, Twenty, Thirty, to the East-India House, and there gets them listed. Some days after this, he receives for each Man, for his Pains and Charge, a Note of a 150 Guldens, and Two Months ready Pay, which the Soldier or Mariner, whatever he be, must Earn out. And the Note is not paid till it comes to be Due in [Page 227] Monthly Wages. An Account of what Pay is due to every one is sent every year out of the Indies to Holland, and may be seen upon the Books there. But if one of these Men happens to Die in the Voyage, the Kidnapper looses all his Charge; for in such a case, the Company doth not pay him his Note, because it was not workt out.

These Men, to Entice Strangers to go, make them believe strange Stories of the Indies, promise them vast Things, and are not ashamed to go so far as to put a Hammer into their Hands to knock the Diamonds out of the Rocks they shall meet with. Many of these poor Fellows Ruin themselves Body and Soul, by Marrying Indians, and running over from the Christians to some Heathenish King, when they have Habituated themselves to their Customs and Manners: Others meeting with untimely Deaths, amongst Drinking, or other ill Company, which often happens: Others committing what Costs them their Life by Sentence of some Court of Justice. And because these Men trapan that sort of People to go a Voyage that commonly proves their De­struction, they are generally call'd, Ziel-Verkopers or Kopers, that is Soul-Buyers or Sellers.

I for my own part was forced, for want of Money, to be some Weeks at one of these Jack-Call's Houses for Entertainment, paying a 170 Guldens, the two Month's ready Pay being reckon'd in; and I was accepted by the East-India Company on the 15th of November 1675. as a Volunteer, and was made Steward of the Ship call'd Asia: My Pay was 20 Guldens per Month of Dutch Money; and I was to serve them five years in the Indies.

Upon these Conditions, I, with several others, went off from Amsterdam in a little Smack to the Texel, on the first of December 1675. There the Fleet lay that was ordered to go to the East-Indies, which consisted of Five Ships, viz. the Asia Ad­miral, [Page 228] the Macassar Vice-Admiral, the Ʋtrecht, the Cortgeene, the Tidor: We saw besides, a great many English and Dutch Men of War and Merchantmen, that staid for a good Wind.

The 2d of December, I Embarkt on Board the Asia, together with several others, engaged in the same Service.

The 3d Ditto, The Dutch Gentlemen that were Owners came on Board of us, with a very rich little Yatcht, wish'd us a good Voyage, and took their leaves of us.

The 4th there came a Muster-Master, to see if all those that belong'd to the Ship were in it. There was in ours, the Chief Merchant, the Master, the Chaplain of the Reformed Religion, with his Wife and four Children, four Steersmen, one Book-keeper, five Barbers and Chirurgions, two Mates, two Stewards, two Cooks, two Gunners, four Car­penters, three Coopers, two Sail-Makers, two Quarter-Masters, one Serjeant, two Corporals, two Under-Corporals, 150 Soldiers, and 93 Fore­mast-Men, nine Boys to Swab the Ship every day, and one Boatswain; the whole number was 297 men. The Muster-Master having taken a view of all, wish'd us a good Voyage and a good Wind.

The 5th, The Wind blew very strong at North-West, so that we were obliged to drop four An­chors at one time, of which each weigh'd 36 hun­dred Pound.

The 12th of January 1676. The greatest Trou­ble we had was caused by the Ice that came against us in great Flakes from the North, and encompass'd us on every side, striking continually against our Ship, and did our Cables a great deal of Damage. Therefore our Officers having consulted what to do, resolved, That if the Wind did not change in three days, we should leave Ship and Goods, and go back to Amsterdam, with the light Vessels; that the Men [Page 229] as well as Ships might not perish, as it happen'd 15 years ago, when 15 founder'd about the same place.

The 13th Ditto, At Eleven a Clock at Night the Wind changed and blew very fair for us at S. E. upon which a Gun was fired from our Admiral, all the Ships in the Fleet being to be govern'd by it, and was a Signal that every one was to weigh An­chor, and make ready to Sail.

The 14th, early in the morning, sailed first the Admiral, with Flags and Pendants on the Main­mast; after him the Vice-Admiral, with a Flag on the Foremast; and then the Ʋtrecht, with a Flag on his Mizen-mast, and then the other common Ships.

The 15th, An English Fisherman came to us, and gave us Information that there were 16 French­men of War cruising near Calais, with two Priva­teers and two Fireships laying wait for our Fleet. We sent out immediately a Yatch for true Intelli­gence, which came back to us on the 16th, and brought us word, that the Enemy was making up to us. Then we fell back to the Rode of Duyns, and lay under the Cannon of that place, while we prepared our selves for Fight, and to Consult what we were to do: Upon this we had these following Orders agreed on.

I. That all Captains, Seamen, and Officers, should carefully observe what Signals and Commands were given by the Admiral, and Obey them punctually.

II. That as soon as the Enemy came in sight of us, we should draw into the Form of a Half-Moon.

III. That if we should happen to find a strange Ship fall'n in amongst our Fleet, we should give the other Ships notice of it by firing off three of our Demy-Cannon.

[Page 230] IV. In case a Ship should be ready to sink, it should give notice of it by hanging a Lan­thorn on the Foremast, if it were night; or by hanging out a yellow Flag, if it were day.

V. Being the Admiral upon Pain of Death, must not yield himself, nor his Ship, into the Ene­mies Hand; the Vice-Admiral was (in case of a Fight) to be nigh, and second him.

VI. The Admiral was to put up two bright Lan­thorns, and the other Ships but one, that they might distinguish and follow the Ad­miral.

VII. Upon all Occasions, the Officers and com­mon Soldiers were to behave themselves briskly and honestly, and to observe very strictly, these and all other Articles relating to the Fleet, upon their Peril.

The 17th, We lay still, and a French Privateer came up the English Road, and passed by our Fleet, narrowly viewing it, and struck in to Sea again.

The 18th instant, in the morning, Our Admiral shot off one piece, and hung up a Blue-Flag for a Signal to hoist up Sail, which was done accord­ingly, with many discharges of our Cannon in Ho­nour to his Royal Majesty the King of England, which were answer'd from Dover-Castle.

The 19th, We saw the French Fleet about a League distance from us, but when they saw that we were so strong, they did not dare to fall upon us, but made home to Calais.

On the 20th, We lost sight of England and France. The Sea that lies between them two is call'd the Channel, and is 96 miles long. After this we came into the Sea of Spain. The Water there looks extreamly blue by reason of its being so vastly deep. About Noon, the Admiral sets up a white Flag, and fires a Gun, to give notice to all the Captains, Masters, and Stewards, belonging to [Page 231] the Fleet, to come aboard his Ship, which they did; and whilst he treated them, and all were mighty merry, the danger of the French coming upon them being over, the Macassar fell foul on our Ship, and gave us a terrible shake. The Ma­cassar got a great Hole in her side by it, but it was easily stopt again. Towards Evening, our Guests went to their respective Ships, and the Cannon kept firing all the Night.

The 21th in the morning early, The Ships, that till then kept together, parted, each taking their several Course to the Places they were Bound for. Some went to the West-Indies, others to Smirna, Spain, Italy, and Portugal. We that were bound to the East-Indies, being five Ships, kept on to the South-West, having a very good Wind at N. N. E.

The 22th, Our Men aboard the Asia were divi­ded into two parts; the one call'd the Prince's, the other Count Maurice's Quarter, one of these Quar­ters was to watch by turns four hours a piece at Night; when the Watch on the one side wanted to be relieved by some body of the other, two Men sung a Song to awake them.

In the Evening of this day, The Rantsoen (as we call it) began, that is, we came to a set Allowance, which was, to every Person three Pound of Bis­ket a Week, half a Pint of Vinegar, a quarter of a Pint of Lisbon Sallad-Oil, and every day a Gill of Brandy: On some days we had Stock-Fish and Pease boil'd in Water, upon which we us'd to pour a little Oil and Vinegar: But the next morning we had a Wooden-Dish full of boil'd Barley allowed to every seven Men. On Sundays, Tuesdays, and Thursdays, our Dinners was Pork, or other Flesh.

From the 23th of January to the 24th of February, nothing remarkable happen'd, except that the cold Weather had quite left us; And we saw the Fish [Page 232] sometimes driving one another to and fro, and particularly the flying Fish, about the bigness of a Herring, always in fear of being devoured. The longest Flights they could take was about a Musket­shot, and then they were forced to light on the Water to wet their Wings again: By this Flight they escape indeed from their greatest Enemies, the Dolphins and the Porpoises; but then they of­ten become the Prey of Sea-Birds, call'd Boobys: Here we saw Birds and Fishes flying together.

The 25th of February we saw Pico de Canaria, or the Canarie Mountain: We steer'd our Course thither, and came pretty near it by the next day; and then we found that we were 20 Leagues off when we first discover'd it. Otherwise, upon a smooth Sea, we could not see farther than five Leagues in a streight Line. This difference hap­pens from the extraordinary height of the Hill above the surface of the Water.

The 26th, 27th, and 28th Ditto, we had good Weather.

The 1st of March, early in the morning, We spied two Ships with Dutch Flags and Pendants, that were Roving about; but we would not trust them, for we knew the Turkish Pyrates used to Lurk about this Mountain of the Canaries, or the Southern Islands. After a Council of War held, our Admiral, about Noon sailed foremost to take better notice of them, and he quickly found them to be what we suspected.

We were not the only one who made our selves ready for a Fight, but our four Ships that came after, at about a League distance, did the like, and gave us notice by an appointed Signal, that they were prepared. We expected them, and towards the Evening, the Enemy came some­what nearer to us, yet not within shot; all that Night we kept a very strict Watch.

[Page 233] The 2d Ditto, very early in the morning, the Wind blew hard at North-West, by which means we lost sight of the Turkish Ships about Twelve at Noon; and about the Evening it ceased.

The 3d, we made vast way with a good Wind, and about four hours after we spied a Ship, and found by her running she was one of the Turks we had seen the day before; our Master being a very brisk Sea-Soldier, (his Name Peter Vander Woetstiin) found that he could not possibly out­sail this Pyrate; so he lower'd his Sails and staid for him, as much as to say, that he did not fear him. The Turk sailed by us with his Dutch Flag up, as near and swift as he could: He pretended to be a Friend of ours, and set a Renegado to Hail us, and ask us in Dutch, What Ship? And whither Bound? Our Master ordered the Gunner to fire, and the Men fired so briskly with the lower Tire, and batter'd the Mahometan so sorely, that they made all the haste they could to get away, and found work enough to mend the Holes our Guns had made.

The 4th in the morning, about 7 of the Clock, this Turk, batter'd as he was, came up to us again; his Design was to clap us on board, and to Storm us. We having a sufficient Force on Board, defended our selves so bravely, that the Enemy was obliged to run again at night with no small loss. On our side, we had Twelve kill'd and Twenty wounded, Soldiers and Seamen: The wounded were all cured. In the mean while, the Carpenters were employed in Re­pairing what Damage the Enemies Shot had done us, and stopping the Holes.

The 5th Ditto, Our Chaplain Preached a Thanksgiving Sermon for the Assistance God was pleased to give them, delivering them through his Mercy out of the Hands of those Cruel Ty­rants: [Page 234] And after that, our Master and Admiral thank'd his People for the help they had given him with so much Gallantry; and ordered a Bot­tle of Sack for every Man.

From the 6th to the 24th of March, we had very blustering Winds, and a dreadful violent Storm, so that we often thought our selves at the very brink of Death.

The 25th, While that Tempestuous Weather still lasted, the Mate and his Boy were catch'd together acting the abominable Sin of Sodomy: A Council was held upon it, and Sentence was given that they should be tied back to back, (which was done by the Boatswain), and tied in a Sack, and thrown alive into the Sea. As the Minister was doing his Duty towards these Malefactors, representing to them the hainousness of their Crime, and directing them to prepare for Death, the Boy, about 14 years of Age, wept bitterly; But the Mate, being an Italian, about 40 years old, shew'd himself mighty ready to Die, saying; 'Twas bet­ter he should be punish'd alone for his horrid Sin, then that the whole Ship should suffer for his sake.

The 26th, the Wind ceased; But we hardly knew where we were, nor had known it for 20 days time, having not been able to make an Ob­servation since the 6th day: And,

On the 27th, it being very fine Weather, we found that the Storm had carried. us under the Equinoctial Line. Here it is extream unhealthy, and a certain Distemper seized most of our Men, which made them raving mad: In one day five Persons died, one of which was our Chaplain, the other four Soldiers. These Dead Men, were (according to the Custom of our Dutch Ships) sew'd, each Corps by it self, in a sheet, and after our usual Morning or Evening Prayer, (with a Psalm sung at the end of it) thrown in­to the Sea.

[Page 235] The 28th, we had no Wind: On this day, one of our Barbers, and two Seamen died; and two Soldiers, in their raving Fit, (caused by the intollerable Heat) leapt into the Sea; which two of our best Swimmers perceiving, leap'd in after them, and brought 'em into the Ship again: But one of 'em after all this, hang'd himself that very Night by his Bed-side.

On the 29th, The other Soldier that had leapt in the Sea, died, having no regard to any good Advice that was given him, and could not be made to Pray. We had not a Breath of Wind this day, nor

The 30th and 31th: These two days we threw over-board our late Chaplain's 4 Children, 4 Chi­rurgions and Barbers, a Carpenter, and 10 Soldiers.

The 1st, 2d, 3d, and 4th of April, the Calm held us still; And in those four days we lost a Steersman, two Carpenters, the Serjeant, and 30 Sol­diers and Seamen; so that we expected every Soul should Die out of the Ship.

The 5th Ditto, it pleased God to deliver us from that fatal place by a favourable Wind at West and by-South. We had still a great many sick Men, and not enough in health to be able to Brace our Main-Sail, tho' the Mortality ceased; so we were forced to make shift with our small Sails. That day we caught with a Hook one of the great Fishes called Sharks, that rowl'd and toss'd about our Ship. We design'd to dress him, and refresh our selves with it; but when we cut it open, we found in the Belly of it our Serjeant that we had thrown over-board, not yet dige­sted. The sight of this so turn'd our Stomachs, that none could find in their Heart to Eat of the Fish; so that we threw Man and Fish into the Sea again. It is observable, That these great Fish have always some small ones to go before [Page 236] 'em, that are called by the name of Pilot-Fishes, and swim in and out of the Shark's Mouth. And when a Shark is catch'd, they cleave to his Back like a Burr.

But I must not omit what happen'd to my self. As I fell Ill and was in a Swoun, he that look'd after the sick, took me for Dead, and fetch'd a new Shirt out of my Chest, and was putting it upon me; The Sail-maker too was a going to sew me up; and he handling me a lit­tle roughly, after all his pushing and tossing of me, I open'd my Eyes: Those that were about me were not a little startled; and said, it was high time for me to open 'em; for if I had winck'd but a little longer, over I had gone. Our chief Merchant gave me a Glass of Sack, which refreshed me very much.

From the 6th to the 18th of April, we had a very fair Wind and good Weather. In that time we saw some of the Northern Capers, and a great many Whales, which kept us Company till we came on

The 20th, within sight of the Devil's Mount in Africa, which is very remarkable for its height.

The 22th, We came happily into the Road near the Land call'd, Capo de Bonne Esperance, or the Cape of Good Hope. And here we met again with two of our Ships, Cortgeene and Tidor, which had been parted from us, and we had not seen, since the 2d of March. They gave us an Ac­count, That they had been busie with the Turk­ish Privateers that fell upon us, and that they had wetted their Feet; which was, that they had sunk 'em. However, They took up 36 of their Men that could Swim best, and brought them along with them. This News gave us a great deal of Joy. The Prisoners we sent hence imme­diately to the Robin-Island, to gather Mussel-shells, and others, for the burning of Lime.

CHAP. II.

THE 23th of April, early in the morning, I went on Shore of Africa with our Admi­ral: From this place to Amsterdam they reckon [Page 238] usually 2000 miles. At this Cape we lay still nine days, and in that time provided our selves with Water, Wood, and other Necessaries. As to the Qualities of this Land, by what Observation I could make of it, I found it to be: First Fruitful; And for that Reason, our East-India Company hath caused some years ago, many very strong Places to be Built there by the Water-side, close under the Duyvel's-bergh, Lewen-bergh, and Tafel-bergh, well stored with Soldiers, and all things ne­cessary, and are sufficiently provided against the In­cursions of the Wild-Men; so that their Ships go­ing to and from the Indies, may safely, and with­out any danger, put in there at any time, and take in Provisions, whether it be of Cattle, Water, Wood, or other Refreshments. And here are al­ready a great many Boors that are come from Hol­land, and by reason of the great Priviledges that are granted them, have settled there, and have Tilled the Land and made it very fruitful, for a matter of 20 or 30 miles round about those Places. Secondly, Very populous: The Inhabitants are called wild Africans, or Hottentots. Their Colour is like that of the Egyptian Heathens, or as we call them corruptly, Gypsies. The Hair of their Head grows entangled in one another, like the Wool of a young Lamb; upon which they hang for Orna­ment all manner of Sea-shells. They are of a mid­dle stature, and well proportioned, only that they have their Noses a little too flat and broad.

They wear no manner of Cloaths, only a Sheeps-skin or Calf-skin on their Shoulders, (and that's be­smeared with Grease to make it soft and pliant) when it is a little Cold, or when it Rains. They wear the Tail of a Fox, or of a wild Dog hanging before their Privy-Parts. The Women among these Hottentots have a different Ornament from the Men, which is the Gutts of their Cattle fresh killed. [Page 239] These they wrap about their Legs, not minding the inconveniency it puts 'em to, which is such, that they can hardly go, and they leave 'em there till they are quite dry.

I had often-times been told, that these Women had naturally a little kind of a Flap growing over their Privities, like that of a Turkey-Cock's Bill, which I had a mind to see if it were true; but upon Examination, I found nothing of Truth in it. My Experience cost me only some Tobacco.

These People have a very strange Speech, and make such a disagreeable Noise with their Mouth, as other Nations cannot imitate; but a great many of them that live near to the Cape of Good Hope can speak some Dutch. They have no manner of Religion, Prayers, or Laws, only they Worship the Moon. The first time that they see it; they spend that whole Night in Dancing, Singing, and Bawling Ha, ha, ha, ha. They do not at all trouble themselves with Building or Planting: So that they have no constant abode, but move from place to place with their Children and Wives, where they can find Pasture for their Cattle. They Eat all sorts of Fruits and Roots that grow either above or under-ground. They make no difference, whether their Meat is kill'd, or dead with any Di­stemper, or whether it be Man's Flesh: Whatever it be, they throw it upon some Coals, leave it there a little while, and so Eat it.

They lie in small Hutts or Holes, every one with his Wife. If any of the Women have two Chil­dren at one Birth, they kill the weakest, that the other may have the Breasts to himself, and grow stronger and lustier. As soon as the Boys come to be about Twelve years of Age, they cut off his right Testicle, that he may be the fitter for Running.

[Page 240] They have some Kings amongst them, and a great many Captains, and have cruel Wars be­tween one another. They shoot Darts, and are excellent at hitting a Mark with a Stone. The Women too will come in often and carry their Husband's Arms: If they take any of their Ene­mies, they kill 'em and eat 'em with great Joy and Sa­tisfaction. And in the same manner they use the Europeans too, (who come often to Truck a lit­tle Tobacco or Bracelets, for a good parcel of Cows and Sheep) if they can get them into their Hutts.

Thirdly, Rich. They have all manner of wild Beasts. For here are the furious Lions, which re­gard no Man, and when Hungry, fall upon Men and Beasts and Devour them. The Grinning Ty­gers. The vast Elephant for Bulk and Strength. The Angry Rhinoceros. The skipping and clam­bering Ape: Besides, Wild Dogs, Bears, Wolves, and wonderful fine Wild Asses, all in great num­bers; As also Ostriches, which have indeed Fea­thers and Wings, but cannot Fly by reason of their bigness and weight. Their Eggs are hatch'd of themselves, and not (as some mis-informed Per­sons have given an account of it) by their conti­nual looking after 'em. Sea-Cows, that lie in the fresh Rivers all day, and at night come on Shore to feed: Their Flesh is better than that of Swine. Stag and Deer, Wild-Boars, Partridges, Peacocks, Geese, Wild-Ducks, and other sort of Poultry, too long to give an Account of, all which are here very plentiful.

The 1st of May, towards Night, the Asia, Tidor, and Cortgeene, put off together to go forwards, and continue our Course (with the help of God) to Batavia.

[Page 241] The 2d we had a General Day of Humiliation in our three Ships. For tho' we were now out of Danger of Sea-Robbers, we were not so from Storms and Tempests, and other fatal Accidents.

The 3d, The Wind blew very hard at N. W. tho' it was Serviceable for us to set us forward.

The 14th, The Wind grew higher still: And in the Afternoon, a Merchant's Son of Franckfort, Morel by Name, going, (as it was usual) to the fore-part of the Ship to Ease Nature, fell into the Sea; and all our Endeavours to help him were in vain, by reason of the boisterousness of the Waves, and our swift Sailing: That same day the two Ships of our Company, the Tidor and Cortgeene, parted from us.

From the 5th to the 10th the same Wind lasted.

The 11th, We felt it very Cold.

The 12th, We had a mixture of Hail and Snow, and two of our Seamen fell in and were drowned.

The 13th, 14th, 15th, 16th, 17th, 18th, 19th, and 20th Ditto, We hoisted up but one Sail, and ran very swift, the Wind blowing almost a Storm, and made commonly 70 miles, or more, in 24 hours.

The 21th, We reach'd the Altitude of the Island St. Maurice. This Island was not long since Inva­ded by the Dutch East-India Company, before which time it was not Inhabited. It is fruitful, and has great store of Wild-Deer; It produces Amber-Greese, Ebony, and other fine Woods.

The 22th, A Seaman of ours fell unluckily from the Main-Mast upon one of our great Anchors, and from thence into the Sea, and sunk immediately, his Breath being gone with his first fall.

The 23th, We came again into a warm Cli­mate, and we had a very favourable Wind to the end of this month.

[Page 242] The first of June it was very still, but very Rainy Weather.

The 2d, Our usual Allowance of Flesh, Bread, and Beer, was lessened, which did not please most of us very well.

From the 3d to the 20th, We had nothing remarkable, save that we suffer'd in some measure both Hunger and Thirst, tho' that contributed much to our Health, according to the Proverb, which says, That Hungry Men will not over-sleep them­selves; and much Sleep being unhealthy, the sharp­ness of our Stomachs would keep us from any such Indisposition.

The 21th, Our Master promis'd Twelve Crowns to any one that should discover Land, upon which we all look'd about us very sharp, and kept very strict Watch, taking great notice what Colour the Water was of, by which we often have notice that we draw near the Land; in the mean while we were busie with getting of our Anchors ready.

The 22th, in the morning, One that stood on the top of the Main-Mast, cry'd out, Land, and being ask'd which way he spy'd it, he answer'd, Directly in the East, and that it was a high Land. This was about Sun-rising, and about Noon we found that he had not been mistaken; for it was the very Land which we were to go to, viz. Java Major, or Great Java; This occasion'd a very great Rejoycing, for now we had Bread and Water al­lowed in abundance.

The 23th, We came into the Road of Sunda, which is about 36 miles long: Here we were ob­lig'd, by reason of the Calm, and the fierceness of the Tide against us, to cast out our Anchor. While we lay there, some of the Inhabitants of Java came to visit us, and brought us all manner of Indian Fruits; such as King's Apples, Mellons, Figs, Citrons, Bananas, Sugar, Rice, and other-like things; all [Page 243] which Refreshments we had of them in exchange for old Iron and Tobacco. They came in little Boats, but oddly made, and very ill put together, but they sail very fast with 'em.

The 24th, Two of them were sent over to us out of Bantam, laden with Fruit from Java, Ducks, Goats, &c. This day we made some of our way with a good Wind, but towards the Evening we cast Anchor, the Wind being changed.

The 25th, in the morning, betwixt 9 and 10 a Clock, we saw at the right Hand of us, the Royal City Bantam; In the afternoon, about 4 a Clock, we came into the Road before Batavia: Our Cabin-Boy swimming very well, and having a mind to re­fresh himself in that Water, was unexpectedly catch'd and devour'd by a Crocodile.

The 26th, in the morning, We were fetch'd to Shore in a small Skiff to Batavia, to our great Joy: Thus we did (by God's Assistance) compleat this great Voyage from Amsterdam to Batavia, in five months and 12 days, and in less than 24 weeks, made 3636 miles.

The 27th, Came in the Tydor and Cortgeene, which came out with us from the Cape of Good Hope, and which had not been seen since the third day after that until now. This made them all very glad in Batavia.

This day at night, all the Soldiers that were sent here from Holland, were brought, well Arm'd and in good Order, before the Dutch General there, called Maetzuycker: He welcom'd them; and after that, the Officers divided them, and sent them, some into the City, and some into the Fort. I went to see the Fortification: It has four Bastions, viz. First, the Diamond, where a Major, with 40 or 50 Soldiers keep constantly; Secondly, The Ruby, kept by a Captain, and as many Men; Thirdly, The Saphire, which is commanded by a Serjeant; And [Page 244] Fourthly, The Pearl, commanded also by a Ser­jeant.

The 28th, 29th, and 30th, We had three days liberty to go up and down, in and out of the City; and here we much wondered to see the Chineses, (of which several live here upon the account of their great Trade) carry Meat and Drink to those that are Buried in the Church-yard, in Vessels of fine China, lamenting, and asking them, Why they Died, and what they wanted; and telling them, it was unkind not to let their Friends know of it; But the Dead there, as well as here, are very silent. This good Chear of theirs is generally carried off by the Dutch Soldiers and Seamen, who Feast them­selves with it, when they have Game'd away their Money, or otherways spent it. Besides these Chi­neses, there are several other East-Indians, and other Heathens, that live at Batavia, and drive a great Trade there. They are all oblig'd to joyn toge­ther in the common Defence of the City, in case of Necessity; chiefly the Javans, the proper Inhabi­tants of this Island: They are very Tawny, and wear only a Girdle about their middle, of fine Linnen, or Silk: They are Circumcis'd as the Turks: Some of them Worship an Image with a Lion's Head, the Sun, and the Moon, &c.

Beside Amboineses, Tarnatans, Malleyers, Ma­chassers, and other-like Nations, each of these have their Kings; are very skillful with Weapons, which are Bows, Arrows, Javelins, Spears, and Poisoned Darts. When they go into the Field, they adorn their Bucklers with a great deal of finery, wearing on their Head a very fine Bird, call'd the Bird of Paradise, which is found in Amboyna, about 500 miles from Batavia. Their warlike Musick is an Instrument made of Mettle, called Gum-Gum, much in the Nature of our Drums; It makes a greater noise than a good large Bell. The Amboyneses [Page 245] are great Necromancers; and from hence it is said, Doctor Faustus got his Master, and was carried thither through the Air riding upon a Cloak.

From the 1st of July to the 9th, We were daily exercis'd in the handling of the Musket and Pike, &c.

The 10th, Some of the stoutest and briskest of all our Men were pick'd out and sent,

The 11th, Under the Command of Major Pool­man a Brandenburger, Captain Harzing, Captain Roodbol, Captain St. Martini a Frenchman, and Cap­tain Dack, each with his Company, and Embark'd in one Ship to go to Japara to quell the Insurrection there, and to help the King of Bantam against the Inhabitants.

The 12th, Our Seamen too, belonging to our five Ships were divided into Companies, and provided with Hand-Granadoes, sharp Cutlaces, Pikes, Bills, and other Weapons useful in War: Their Officers were the Master as Captain, the Mate was made Lieutenant, the Boatswain a Serjeant, and the Quartermasters Corporals.

The 13th and 14th, We past by Bantam, and af­wards by Toppers-hoedie, and the Prince's Island.

The 15th, We saw our Enemies in an innume­rable quantity of little Skiffs. They had notice of our approach, and designed to keep us from their Wall; so they came to meet us, and quite surrounded our Ship: Their intent was to get on Board, then Storm, and Rob us. All this while, our Grana­diers and Soldiers were employed, and fought so briskly, that that day we destroy'd about 1100 of their Skiffs, little and great. We had but few of our Men killed, but many wounded. We could not tell the number of the Enemy that was slain; for supposing there were as many of their Boats sunk, as I said ev'n now, the number of the Men is uncertain, for they hold according to their big­ness [Page 246] from 6 to 30 Persons. And besides, As their Boats sunk, abundance of them were Swimming to Land, like so many Water-Spaniels for about a mile's space, and so saved their lives. Our Booty was but small; for the Indians had nothing about them but Provision and Arms, the best part of which fell into the Sea.

The 16th, early in the morning, We were put ashore all together to pursue the Enemy, whilst they were still terrified with their late loss. We ex­pected to make an easie work of it, but they un­derstood, and we found it, otherwise. They fell upon us like Mad-Dogs, in vast numbers, and of all sides. The Opium that they use to take always before they engage, had made 'em stark Mad; so that they kill'd the flower of our Officers, and 150 private Soldiers: And at last, the rest of us were forced to Flee and Swim for our Lives to get into our Ship.

The 17th, All our sick and wounded were put into a Ship, and sent to the Hospital in Batavia; And a Letter sent to the General, and the Council, to acquaint them, that we wanted a sresh Assi­stance and Recruits to go on in our Enterprize.

The 18th, We sent out a large Boat, with a Lieutenant, and Soldiers and some Seamen, to go ashore and view the place, and give us Intelligence; but the Enemy fell upon them, and slew every one of them, except one Seaman; who,

On the 19th, came swimming to our Ship very quick, having the stream with him. He gave us an account, how they were fell upon by four Boats full of those Japarians, who killed all his Compa­nions; and as for his own safety, he had made his way through 'em with a great lighted stick of Wood, that he snatcht up from under a Kettle, and with that kept them at such a distance who were half Naked, that he had room and time to [Page 247] throw himself into the Water to Swim for his Life, tho' they continually shot at him with their Ar­rows. Our Master order'd him immediately a Glass of Sack to refresh him, for he was sadly weaken'd, having been almost a day and a night in the Water.

The 20th, After a Council held, Letters were written to the General Maetzuycker, in Batavia; and I was one of those that were order'd to go with them.

We sailed all the 21th, 22th, and 23th, and arrived happily at Batavia on the 24th, and deli­vered our Message and Letters.

The 25th, An Advice-Boat was sent with a Letter to the Fleet at Jappara, to order them to come all back to Batavia.

The 26th, A new Ship from Holland arrived here, and brought us an Account, That they had been 9 months a coming, and that 18 of their Men died in their Voyage.

The 27th, Came another Ship in, which the Hollanders had given over for lost, having been gone from Zealand above 18 months, and they had no News of it all that while. The Master of it told me, They had undergone a great deal of Hardship; (which one might easily see by the Ship and her Crew.) Amongst other things, he told us, That they had been driven so far Southward by a continual Storm, that their Compass did 'em no more Service, the Needle turning from one side to the other irregularly. At last, they had discover'd in the night, a high Land, which ap­pear'd to them like Fire; but they turn'd their Backs to it, and sail'd so long, till they came at last by meer good Fortune, to get the use of their Compass again.

[Page 248] The 28th, A Ship came from Malacca to Bata­via, which brought a great many Spiauters and Pellicans of a Purple Colour, as also a Casswari: This is a great Bird that has no Feathers on his Body, but Hair, like Hog's Bristles. It will Eat red-hot Coals, Tobacco-Pipes, Iron, and leaden Bullets; but doth not Digest any of 'em: It hath no Tongue, but makes a Noise as Shrill as that of a little Gosling. Of this Bird we shall take an oc­casion to tell you a very pleasant Story by and by.

The 29th, Four Seamen were publickly Beheaded at Batavia, (which is here the common Death of Criminals) for having killed a Chinese. At the same time, six Slaves that had Murthered their Master in the night, were broke upon the Wheel. A Mulatto (as they call those that are begotten betwixt a Black-a-Moor and a White) was Hang'd for Theft. Eight other Seamen were Whipt for Stealing, and running away, and were besides this, Burnt on the Shoulder with the Arms of the East-India Company. Two Dutch Soldiers that had absented themselves from the Guard two days, ran the Gauntlet. A Dutch Schoolmaster's Wife that was caught a Bed with another Man, (it being her frequent Practice) was put in the Pillory, and Condemn'd to 12 years Imprisonment in the Spin­huys.

During the time of Execution, the Gates of the Fort, and of the City, were shut up, and all the Garrison in Arms.

The 30th, Came 32 Javans, with a Crocodile, 22 Foot long, which they had caught with a great Crook, and brought into the Fort to shew it to the General, who having taken a view of it, gave the Fellows that brought it 6 Rixdollars for their Pains: So they carried it away again.

[Page 249] The 31th, A Javan came into Batavia, and gave an Account of the General's Huntsman's being fall'n upon by a Tyger, and torn in pieces by him.

The 1st, 2d, and 3d of August, The Dutch Bur­gers and Soldiers, as also the Indian Inhabitants of Batavia, drew up in the Galge-Veldt, each by them­selves, and made a very fine shew. Many of the Indians here shew'd their Activity in Leaping, and in exercising their Arms, viz. Shields, Bows, Ar­rows, and Pikes. The most remarkable Leaper amongst them all, was one Captain Joncker, who Leapt cleverly over a Dutch-Trooper, that was mounted on a Persian Horse. We Hollanders were Posted, (about the House where our General and the Lords of the Council of the Indies were, with their Wives and Children) with four Companies under Arms, ready in case the Indians (who were in great numbers) should attempt to Rise or make a Rebellion. This shew was made to entertain the Heer Rycloff Van Goens, a Dutch Admiral, that was newly come over, and was then one of the Lords of the Council, and a short time after was made General.

The 4th, Twelve Slaves of the Heer Speelman's one of the Council of India, run away; they had taken a Boat and got to Bantam. The Muster-master of Batavia, went with six Servants, all Guinea-Gaffers, well provided with Cutlaces and other Arms, in a Yatch in pursuit of 'em. They soon met with them, but the Slaves so well de­fended themselves, that they kill'd the Muster­master and all his Company; and went on to Bantam: where they thought themselves very safe, but to their Grief, they found themselves mistaken; for as soon as they Landed, they were known to be Fugitive Slaves, and seized and sent back.

[Page 250] On the 7th, All the Twelve were broke upon the Wheel in the place call'd the Galge-Veldt. The manner of doing it is thus: There are four Posts drove into the Ground, and stand out about two foot: To these they Tie the Malefactor's Hands and Feet; Then comes the Executioner with a Bar of Iron, and breaks his Limbs one after the other, and at last gives him one Blow on the Breast.

The 8th, A Seaman was found in the Square, (the Dutch call it the Vierkant) cut most dreadfully with a Knife. This Square is a very large place, and is so called, because it hath four Angles. It was built by the English about 60 years ago. Af­terwards the Dutch got it from 'em, by this means, (as I am informed.) Some Dutch Ships came close to this Square; Their Admiral begg'd the favour of the English Governour, that he might be per­mitted to bring in his Men, (who were very sick with their long Voyage) for recovery of their Health and for Refreshment; which the English Governour generously granted out of Pity and Compassion. The Dutch sent two Boats full of their best and stoutest Men, arm'd privately with such Weapons as might not be discover'd, as Swords, Knives, and Pistols, and with a feigned groaning and grunting, were let in at the Water-Gate; and being got in, fell upon the English, and slew one part of 'em, and took the other Prisoners, and plunder'd all their Goods. (vid. Van Hesse's Ac­count of the taking of Batavia in his Voyage.) Since that time, the City and Fort was built by the Dutch, who have now made it so strong both within and without, with Walls and Ditches, (which never are frozen up by reason there's no Winter here) that the place is inaccessible, and is able to resist all their East-Indian Enemies. The Fort, with the 4 Bastions, (which I have given an Account of al­ready) [Page 251] commands all the Streets of the City, the Square, the Water-Gate, and the Road where the Ships lie.

The 9th, Our Armourer sent Orders to all the Guards, That those who wanted Musket-Balls should come to the usual place at 4 a Clock in the After­noon, (after they had been Exercised,) and fetch 'em. He sent out before-hand, a Box full of 'em by two of his Slaves from the Store-House, and bid them set it down in the great Court. A while after, coming to give 'em out, he found his Box empty. He runs immediately to our Captain, and com­plains, That the Soldiers had stole away the Bullets: The Captain sets him Sentinel for his Negligence; and then had all the Soldiers search'd: But on

The 10th, They found out that the Casswari Birds (of which we have made mention above) that run all about the Fort, had swallowed all the Bullets, and dropt them here and there, as they wander'd about, whole and undigested. Our Armourer was forced for his Carelessness, to go all over the Fort to pick up the Bullets that were fall'n, and to hunt the Birds about to make them restore the rest.

The 11th, As an old Chinese was coming along the said Fort, with two Vessels of Milk to sell; a Peacock that belong'd to the General, seeing him, flew up upon his Head, and had certainly pickt out his Eyes had it not been for some Slaves that beat him off. This old Chinese had once been the richest Man in Batavia, and worth some Tuns of Gold, which he had play'd away at Dice, and lost the very Hair of his Head which was his last Stake.

The 12th, I went into the City to a Chinese's House to drink a Glass of their Grass-Beer, which is made of Sugar, and is very pleasant. There I saw their manner of Eating: Seven of 'em, all Men, sat at a Table by themselves, for they will not trust themselves among the Europeans, nor will [Page 252] they let them see their Wives: Besides their Wives, they keep several Malleyers, that are fine Women, tho' of a tawny Complexion, and broad Noses, whom they Buy for their use. These Wo­men have the liberty of shewing themselves abroad: Their Masters lie with them at their Pleasure; but besides these Women, they frequently keep Swine for the same purpose, and make the same use of 'em.

In the middle of the Table stood a very large China Dish, with a great many little ones in it, which were filled, some with Fish, and boil'd Rice instead of Bread; some with a sort of a Mess made of Citrons, which they call Arschhar; and others, with a pickl'd sort of Fruit like our Barberies, which they preserve in Juice of Citrons and Vine­gar. Each Man had a Wooden thing in his Hand like a pair of Tonges, which they use instead of a Fork, to Eat their Meat with. After they had done Eating, they took every one a Whiff of Tobacco out of a Pipe (which they call Gur-Gur) the Bole whereof is so large, that it would contain half a Pint of Water.

At the time of their Meals, they did not forget their God, which was an Idol made of Wood, and stood very finely adorned upon a Table, with a Lamp burning by it. Him they served first with their best Fruits and Meats, and laid it all decent­ly on a Board that stood by for that purpose. I was so intent upon observing them, that I never minded my Drink, tho' it was excellent, and continually expected to see that Devil Eat the Victuals that were set before him; but I found, I might have staid long enough, for he was so modest, he would not offer to touch them, so I came away: For I saw they did not like my standing so near their Door to observe 'em as I did, and they knew me to be a Dutchman. [Page 253] What the Devil did with his Meat afterwards I cannot pretend to give you an account of.

On the 13th, I went to visit the Rich Chinese. Any European that goes there, is treated very li­berally with as much strong Drink as he pleases; which sort of Drink is Distill'd out of the Suri that comes off from the Coco-Trees, and they call it Arack. The Richest Chinese hath all the others under him; and as soon as he hangs out a red Flag, they are all obliged to appear immediately. He furnishes also all the Dutch Ships with a sufficient quantity of Arack, and Vinegar; of which he makes a Bill, which is abated out of their Contri­butions.

CHAP. III.

THe 14th of August, Came two Javans to Ba­tavia, and brought Twelve Bats as big as Geese for a Present to our General. They are reckon'd there a very delicate Food; and I was told, they were brought to the General's Table as a Rarity, and fit for a great Entertainment. They fly out at Night as ours do, and haunt the Coco-Trees, and there suck the Suri that lies in the Coco-Nuts, so long, till they tumble down, and so are easily taken up with one's Hand; in the Day they keep in the Woods and hollow Trees.

[Page 255] The 15th, A ^* Javan that had eaten some Opium struck a Soldier that stood Sentinel with a half Pike upon the Bridge, between the City and the Fort, with a Poisoned Dart, and kill'd him. This mad Fellow went on with a Design to fall upon the next Centinel also, which stood next to the Gate; But he being aware of him, presented the Point of his Half-Pike against the Javan, who ran furiously up­on it, and so killed himself. His Body, was, for an Example to the rest, dragg'd about the City by the Executioner's Men, (who are Caffers of Angola,) and after that Hang'd up upon a Tree by Jacatra.

The 16th, We had a great deal of terrible Light­ning that set fire on many Chinese Ships, and con­sumed them. It look'd all that day, as if the Can­non had been perpetually firing. The reason of which is, That their Masts and Ships (Jonckers as they call 'em) are of Bamboo-Canes, the Knots of which, when the Fire comes to crack them, give a very great Bounce in the Air.

The 17th, Two Soldiers and one Seaman de­serted out of the Garrison, and went to joyn with the Robbers that dwell on the Blaew-bergh, that is, Blew-Hill, about 12 Leagues off here. These Robbers are a parcel of Soldiers and Seamen that are run away from the Dutch Service, and live about the Blaew-bergh with their Wives that are Javans, and much annoy the Passengers.

The 19th, Twelve Javan Wild-Horses were brought over from Bantam for a Present, to the Heer Maetzuycker our General.

The 20th, Some Javans brought a Dead Ser­pent 26 foot long, before our General's Lodgings. When the General had seen this dreadful Creature, [Page 256] he order'd it to be carried to his Physician Dr. Kleyer, who had it cut open by one John Otto Helwigh, a Saxon Doctor of Physick, (that came over with us as a Soldier) and had his Skin stuff'd up, and kept for a Show.

The 21th, Three Month's Pay was paid to all the Garrison, in Money, Silks, Stuffs, Linnen from China, Shirts, Shooes and Stockings; instead of Victuals here, we are allowed Board-Wages. The Pay is as followeth.

A Captain's, 80 or 100 Guldens per Month Salary; 10 Rixdollars, and 7 Cans of Wine, and two of Oil, Board-Wages.

A Lieutenant's, 50 Guldens per Month Salary; and 6 Rixdollars, Board-Wages.

An Ensign's, 36 Guldens per Month Salary; and 6 Rixdollars, Board-Wages.

A Serjeant's, 20 Guldens per Month Salary; and 4 Rixdollars, Board-Wages.

A Corporal's, 14 Guldens per Month Salary; and 4 Guldens, Board-Wages.

And a Private Soldier's, 10 Guldens per Month Salary; and 4 Guldens, and 40 pound of Rice, Board-Wages.

The 22th, The Ʋtrecht that was come some days before from the Western-Coasts, and loaded with 400 Lasts of Pepper, was burnt in the Road of Batavia. The Cannon and Anchors were hall'd up again, by reason it was not very deep, and all the Men saved.

The 23th, Our Major Poolman order'd a Lieute­nant, with 60 Soldiers, to go with the Asia to the Western Coast.

The 24th, Two Ships happily arrived before Batavia; the one from Siam, loaden with Spiauter; the other from Tarnate, loaden with Cloves, Nut­megs, and Mace. They brought us the News of a great deal of mischief that had happened in Am­boina [Page 257] and Tarnate about 500 miles Eastward from Batavia, by the Earthquakes, that are very frequent there, and commonly every year. Amongst others, a part of an Island that was sunk by an Earthquake in the year 1674. which at that time was saved, and was very rich in Clove-Trees, was now wholly sunk.

Those that know the way of living here, need not much wonder why that Island should have such severe Misfortunes fall on it. The Spaniards here­tofore found this Island, and seeing it abound so much in Spices, fortified it with Castles and Towers, and adorn'd it with Churches, Cloisters, and Schools: But they exercised an excessive Tyranny over the Inhabitants. For after they had treated with them and establisht themselves in Peace, the Don's car­ried themselves so haughtily and cruelly, that if an Inhabitant chanced to meet 'em, and did not go 10 or 12 steps out of their way, and then stand still, till the proud Spaniard was gone by, Sinioro made no more on't, but thrust him through the Guts with his Cinque-Palm, (a Sword five Span's long) and laid a certain piece of Money, call'd a Perdau, upon the Dead Body: After which, the Murtherer was free from any Punishment, nor was he liable to be accused or reckon'd a Murtherer. And in this manner they have dealt with abundance of poor Indians upon any slight occasion, and often­times out of a meer insolent Humour. This Ty­rannical Spanish Yoke hath been made somewhat lighter to 'em by the assistance of the Dutch; but the latter too, often plagued them sufficiently, tho' not so bad as the former; and being once become Masters, turn'd the Churches, Schools, and Cloisters into Warehouses, Inns, or Taverns, to save the Charge of Building new ones. To this excessive height of Inhumanity and Irreligion they were come, till in the year 1674. they were overwhelm'd by [Page 258] an Earthquake, and their Forts, Walls, and Houses sunk, together with a great number of the Inhabi­tants.

The 25th, Two Elephants passed by our Fort, which the King of Siam, who keeps his Residence in Odea, sent as a Present to General Maetzuycker; besides 35 hundred weight of Spiauter: With this, His Request was, That we should lend him a Man to make him some Gun-Powder; promising that he would send him back again to Batavia in two years time.

The General received the Present, thanking the Ambassador; and desired him to return his Thanks to his Master for his Favours, and to tell him, That he would heartily have fulfill'd his Majesty's Desire, but that he could not possibly do it then, because he had but one of them himself, which he could by no means spare; but that he had some Powder that was at his Majesty's Service.

From the 26th to the 31th, We were obliged to appear every day upon the place where we used to Exercise, with our Companies, and fire against two Elephants that were newly come from Ceylon, which were brought every day to that place, that they might stand firing, and be useful in fight.

From the 1st to the 30th of September, I did not stir out of the Fort, by reason of a terrible Head-Ach that seiz'd me, and such a terrible one, that it fetch'd all the Hair off my Head; nor was I able to bear the excessive heat of the Weather. I us'd no other Remedies but Bathing [...]nd Refreshing my self every night and morning (after Sun-rising and Sun-setting) in the Water that runs about the Fort, tho' that was very dangerous, by reason of the Crocodiles that are there.

The 1st of October, Three Companies of the Gar­rison of Batavia were order'd to Embark in three Ships, call'd the Macassar, Polsbroeck, and Polran [Page 259] to go to the Island Ceylon. They were all to be ready the next day to go off: I being one of the Company that was to go, took my leave of my Friends, and made my Provision of Fish, Sugar, Dates, Citrons, and other Necessaries for my Voyage.

The 2d, About 10 a Clock in the Forenoon, each Company went to its appointed Ship; We and our Lieutenant (called Henrick Rentzen Van Oldenburgh) went to our Admiral-Ship, call'd the Macassar; In the Afternoon a Muster-Master came to visit the Ships, to see whether all the Men were on Board or no. If at any time one absents himself after Or­ders given, and is found on shore, he is condemn'd to remain in Chains till the Ship in which he was to have gone is come back again.

The 3d, early before day, The Master order'd the Gunner to fire one piece, which was the signal for our two other Ships to weigh Anchor, and to hoist up Sails. At break of day, (the Sun rising here all the year round at 6 in the morning, and setting at 6 at night) we sail'd with a Land-Wind by Bantam: In the afternoon, when we came to have a Sea-Wind, it blew very hard, and quite against us; so we were forced to cast Anchor, and lie there still, till

The 4th, about two at night, The Tide and Land-Wind turn'd for us again, which carried us as far as the Prince's Island, where we were to take in Wood and fresh Water.

The 5th, 6th, and 7th, I went ashore with five Soldiers, well provided with Arms, to defend those that cut the Wood, from the Tygers; and to shoot some Fowls, such as Peacocks and Ducks; for this Island being not much inhabited, does very much abound with all sorts of Fowl.

The 8th, at break of day, We weigh'd our An­chors, and pass'd that day through the Road of Sunda, and came about the evening into the Sea. [Page 260] The Wind was S. E. and by S. our Course lay most toward the North.

The 9th, We were divided into two Quarters, for the better regulating the Watch, that every one might know when to Watch, and when to enjoy his Humour. Till this time we had Water to Drink, and Rice enough, but boil'd only in Water.

The 10th, We had a very favourable Wind, And this day we came to an Allowance, which was, To each Person half a pound of boil'd Rice every day, half a Pint of distill'd Arack, and a Pint and a half of Water: Two Pound of Bisket a week, and half a Pint of Vinegar, and half that quantity of Lisbon Oil. Sundays and Thursdays three quar­ters of a pound of Flesh: On Tuesdays a Quartern and a half of Bacon; Mondays, Wednesdays, Fri­days, and Saturdays, Gray-Pease, which we Eat with Oil and Vinegar.

The 11th, 12th, 13th, 14th, and 15th, We had still a good Wind, and we began to draw pretty near the Western Coast. In the night, about the 2d Watch, which is between 10 and 2 of the Clock, we saw a continual Lightning shoot through the Clouds, which look'd like a mixture of black and red, and made the most dismal sight that Man ever saw. In the 3d Watch, called the Day-Watch, about 3 of the Clock, we chang'd our Course from West and by North, to North and by East.

The 16th, It was a very serene Calm; But on

The 17th, 18th, and 19th, We had nothing but very unconstant Winds and Weather, and very dark Clouds all about us.

The 20th and 21th, We saw neither Sun, Moon, nor Stars; from whence we concluded that we might expect a great Storm, and for fear of it we took in our Sails, and prepared our selves for it.

The 22th, We had a smooth Gale of Wind at West: Our Course being Northward, we saw con­tinual [Page 261] Lightning, and heard much Thunder: I was Amazed that it lasted so long, and I enquired of our Master, and of some of the oldest Seamen, what could be the reason of it. They told me, That it was dark in that Country of West-Kust six months together; that the Country afforded great store of Pepper, and some Gold was to be found in the Mountains of it. For that Reason, the Dutch, af­ter a long War, had built there some Fortisications, and kept Soldiers there, which hold it to this day. That the Europeans cannot bear the Climate long, it being very unhealthy; and unless they are fetch'd away within three years time, they generally Die. To prevent which, they send fresh Men thither every year. That those that Die there are common­ly taken away suddenly, as they are Eating or Drink­ing at Table. Their Food is Rice instead of Bread, Bufflars Flesh, Beef and Pork, and Fish in abun­dance: Their Drink is Suri that comes from the Coco's, and Sugar-Beer, 3 or 4 years old, which they keep under Ground.

The 23th, The Wind blew hard at West. We saw an infinite number of Fishes, called Springers; their length is generally about 6 or 7 foot, and about as much in thickness. Their Flesh is very firm; they Swim always against the Wind. When they Leap very high out of the Water (as they did then) the Seamen expect a very great Storm and Tempest. We catch'd several of 'em with a certain Instrument, which they call an Elle­gaer, striking it into their Bodies. This night the Polran parted from us, but we could not tell whe­ther it was done designedly by the Master, or whe­ther it was by the Carelessness of the Helms-Man, whose turn it was to Watch.

The 24th, We were forced to take in our Main-Sail, by reason of the hard Wind, and defend our [Page 262] Deck all over with pitch'd Canvas from the Waves that were so boisterous, that they almost over­whelmed our Ship.

The 25th, 26th, 27th, and 28th, We had stormy Winds, but yet so tollerable, that we made 25 or 30 miles of our way in 24 hours.

The 29th, The Wind increased. The Polsbroeck, which still kept us Company, gave us a Signal, that she was so full of Water, that she stood in need of our help. When we came to be somewhat near, the Master told us, That his Pumps were good for nothing, and begg'd of us to lend him some of ours, which we did; for our Ship was so strong and close, that it receiv'd no Water, and we did not want'em our selves; but that night this Companion of ours lost us too.

The 30th, We took in all our Sails, and lower'd our Yards, and made our selves ready for a Drift; that is, to bind the Helm fast, and commit our selves to the Winds and Waves to drive us where they pleased. This Drift we held out in, till

The 4th of November, five days together. Upon Consultation held, we cut down our Main-Mast, which, with the force of its fall, was like to have sunk our Ship. Till that day we had not taken the height of the Sun, so that we could not tell whither, or how far, we were cast.

The 5th, The Wind fell, and changed to the S. E. Then we hoisted up our Sails, and took the height of the Sun, whereby we found that we were close by the Equinoctial, and not cast yet away so far as we were afraid we had been. We sailed N. E. and by E. all this Voyage we had that kind of Birds flying about us, that live upon the flying Fishes; but upon the great Heat we were now come into, they left us.

[Page 263] The 6th, We had a brisk Wind, and from six in the morning to six at night we made 20 miles of our way, and found the next day, being

The 7th, That we had pass'd the Line. Two Soldiers and three Seamen died out of our Ship that day, and were thrown, after Prayers, into the Sea: And we had about 20 sick.

The 8th, The Wind changed to the South; and we were directly to go Northward. The Boatswain's Mate catch'd a large Shark, in which they found four Boys, and some Bones of Men.

The 9th, We saw a little Vessel that made to­wards us; in the afternoon it came near to us, and we were big with the hopes of some News they brought, but they were all vain: For our Orlamen (as we call them that have been before in the Indies) spoke to them in the Malleyers, Amboineses, Cingu­laish, Malabarish, and Maldavish Languages, but neither would do; and they answer'd us in a Lan­guage that none of us could tell what to make of; but they made us to understand by Signs, that they were in great want of Drink: Our Master had their Vessel boarded, and in it we found 24 Indians, with long Hair ty'd up on the left side of their Heads. They had with them 12 Muskets, some Gun-Powder, and Iron-Balls; pretty good store of Rice, Pepper, and dry'd Fish, but no Water. We supposed them to be some Indian Robbers come from the West-Kust, and drove thus far into the Sea by the late Storm. Our Master order'd them to be taken into our Ship, together with their Provisions, and we drew their Vessel along after us, ty'd with a strong Rope to our Ship. We allowed them Bread and Water, and we made them Pump the Water out of our Ship, and Swab it.

The 10th, 11th, 12th, and 13th, The Wind continued directly for us at South, we going on still Northward.

[Page 264] On the 14th, We changed our Course to the N. W. and by W. the Wind kept where it was, but something weaker. This day one that sate on the Foremast, holding by a Cord, the Cord broke, and he fell down Dead into the Ship.

The 15th, We observed, that the Water begun to change colour; at night we used the Plummet to sound the Water, but we could find no bottom, tho' the Line was 200 Fathoms long.

The 16th, The Water changed yet more, and seemed whitish; we made our Anchors and Cables ready, if occasion should be, to use them.

The 17th, Our Master promised six Rixdollars to the first Man that should spy Land, and a Flag­gon of Wine.

The 18th, We had a lovely Wind and good Sailing. A Seaman that stood on the out-side of the Ship to draw up Water, was wash'd of by a Wave. We immediately tack'd our Ship, and back'd our Sails, and threw out our Long-Boat to go and take him up; which they did, and in about two hours time brought him safe to us.

The 19th, We had a very fair Wind and fine Weather. Two of our Seamen quarrel'd, and fell at last to their Knives, and wounded each other. As soon as the Master knew of it, he had 'em both Duck'd from the Main-mast, as wilful Transgres­sors of the Laws of the Ship.

The 20th, about 6 in morning, our Boatswain, a very expert Seaman, climb'd up the Main-top-gallant-Mast, which is the highest part of the Ship; no sooner had he look'd about him, but he cry'd out aloud, Land, Land: The Master ask'd him, which way, and he told him to the North-East; streight we changed our Course from North West thither. The Helmsman threw out the Plummet, and found a sandy bottom at 80 Fathoms. In the [Page 265] afternoon we got sight of the high steep Mountain, call'd Adam's Pick, and by that we knew that this was the place we wanted to be at, viz. the Island Ceylon. Towards night we changed our Course again to the East, and sometimes to the E. and by N. for we had no mind to be near Land that night, and we could not have reach'd the Road that day. In the first Watch, between 6 and 10, we could feel ground still, but in the 2d and 3d we could not.

The 21th, in the morning, at break of day, We chang'd our Course again, and went directly to­wards Land lying South-East of us, with the Wind at S. W. About 10 a Clock before Noon we saw the Ships that lay at Anchor upon the Road by the City of Columbo. In the mean while, the Wind veer'd four Points more to the W. and so much the fitter for us. About Noon, we felt a sandy ground at 40 Fathoms, but we kept Sounding still, till we were quite out of the deep, and in full sight of the Land. This day every one had plenty enough of boil'd Rice, and the Water Vessels were free to any body. We had suffer'd a great while Hunger and Thirst, notwithstanding that we had Course Diet enough, and above 40 Barrels of Dutch and Bata­vian Water. The Soldiers now begun to Equip themselves, to make a shew at their Landing, and dress'd themselves very sine with great Joy and Sa­tisfaction. Their Arms, which till then had been kept up in the Gunner's Room, were delivered to 'em, to go out Arm'd, as is usual, to Shore.

All our Flags were out till about three in the af­ternoon, when we cast our Anchors, and found still 12 Fathom Water. The Gunner was ordered to fire one Gun, and one Seaman was to strike our Admiral's Main-mast Flag before the City of Co­lumbo, but immediately again to set it up. After this, we fired all our Guns, to which the Fort of [Page 266] Columbo answer'd with seven of their Cannon. The Governor of this City sent two great Sloops of Ceylon to fetch us ashore; in which our Lieutenant and Men went up to the Governor's House, who welcomed us all very heartily, and gave all our Men three days liberty to refresh themselves after their hard Voyage. The distance between Columbo and Batavia is about 500 Dutch miles, which we had reach'd in 49 days, from the 3d of October to the 21th of November.

The 22th, I went to Board with an old Cingulaish Woman, because she could speak a little Dutch; and she got her living by keeping a House to enter­tain the Dutch, of which she had generally 20 or 30 in her House. I paid 15 s. a Month, and 40 pound of black Rice. We had every one his own Dish, served up with Flesh, Fish, Figs, and such like Diet, twice every day, at 8 a Clock in the morning, and 4 in the afternoon. Our House was only a Hut, made up of Boughs of Trees. And here I met with three of my old Acquaintance; who,

On the 23th, took me Abroad to a very large Orchard, call'd Tang Salgato, where we drank some Sury fresh from the Coco-Trees. This was in the morning, and about noon we bespoke a hot sort of Liquor, called Massack, which is made in the fol­lowing manner. They put into a Vessel 8 Quarts of Suri, and to that, one Quart of Arack or Brandy. All this boil'd together, and about 20 or 25 Eggs are broke into't, which gives it substance, and a good colour. Then they add to all this some Kings Sugar, (which they get from some certain Trees there) and some Nutmeg, and Mace: All this came to half a Rixdollar. We had some Wo­men to wait upon us, which they call Bulliatoses, who diverted us with various Leaping and Dancing. Their Ears are about a Span long, with Golden Pendants in them; They saw by my Dress, that I [Page 267] was newly come from Europe; and I found they had a great mind to Converse with me, but I not understanding them, made them understand by shaking my Head, that I did not Care for their Company.

The 24th, We took a walk about two or three miles out of Columbo, to see some tame Elephants that were kept in Orchards there. And having seen them, we went into the House which belong'd to a Portuguese, who treated us very nobly; and at night had us home upon an Elephant of his. This day an Ambassador, named Myn Heer Bucquoi, was sent from Ceylon, with a Lion, for a Present to the King of Candy.

From the 25th to the 30th, Our Men were daily Exercised, and at night our turn began to be upon the Guard, where my Post obliged me to be, till

The 25th of April 1677. which was five months, in which time I learned the Cingulaish and Portu­guese Languages, finding them not only useful, but necessary to those that are to stay there.

The 22th, I was sent with 30 Soldiers to the Fort of Galture, 8 Leagues from Columbo, to have some new Ramparts added to it. Of this Fort I intend to speak by and by, designing now to give an Account of the Cities, Inhabitants, Cattle, and Fruits of the Island Ceylon, as far as I could observe of them while I staid there.

CHAP. IV.

THE Island Ceylon is about 200 Dutch miles in compass. It lies in the Indian Sea, not far from the Maldivian Islands, and the Wild Coasts of Cormandel and Malabar. It was found out about 200 years ago by the Spaniards, who invaded the Kingdom of Cotta, which the City of Columbo be­longs to, in this following manner.

They came with two Ships, and landed at the place, where now Columbo is: The Cingulaish King, being informed of it at Cotta, came out with an Army to meet them, but in vain; for his Men could not abide the smell of Gun-Powder. The Spaniards fell to Building some small Fortifications, and to settle themselves in the Country: As soon as they were able to get some Assistance, being well pleased with the Land and their Success, they [Page 269] carried on the VVar not only against the said King of Cotta, so as to beat him out of the City where he resided, and lay it waste, (as it is now to this day, a place where the wild Elephants are catch'd) but in time reach'd farther; and at last, of seven Kings that had possession of this Island, they de­stroyed six. But the seventh, who resided at Candi, in the middle of the Island, being vex'd to see with what Tyranny they used his Subjects, begun to car­ry on a War very vigorously against them, and con­tinually Plagues the Cities and Forts, which they had built on the Sea-side, and for about 20 miles into the Land. . How this Country fell from the Spaniards to the Portugueses, and from the Por­tugueses to the Dutch, I will give an Account hereafter.

Their chief Fortifications, are, the City and Ca­stle of Columbo; eight Leagues Eastward of that lies the Fort Negombo; 20 miles further, the Fort Cal­pintin; again, 22 miles from thence, another call'd Aripen; and between those two, the Paerl-Bank, heretofore so famous: Six miles further, a very strong Fort on the Island of Manara, very fruitful, and seven miles in compass. This Island of Manara is divided from Ceylon by an Arm of Salt-Water, about a Cannon-shot wide. Jasnapaparnum, a for­tified City, lies 22 miles distant from Manara, and is secured with Bastions, call'd by these Names, Pas-Piil, Pas-Beschatter, Pas-Elephant, and Punt de Pedre. Six and thirty miles farther, is the Fort called Trin­conamale, built by the Dutch against the French. This Fort the French had taken Possession of; as also of the Bay, where Ships ride very safe, under the Command of Monsieur de la Haye, as Viceroy, till the Dutch drove them away again. There is another Fort call'd Battacolo 40 miles from that. Thence to Punt de Gala 30 miles. Thence to Alecan 11 miles. Thence to Galture 5 miles. Thence round back again to Columbo 6 miles.

[Page 270] The Description I have given here of these out­ward Fortifications, makes the Circuit of this Island to be in all 206 miles.

The Inland Fortifications, are; Maluane, 6 Leagues from Columbo; Hanguelli or Gourwebell, 2 Leagues from Malvane; Sittawaca 4 miles farther; Ruenell also 4 Leagues farther; Saffrigan and Bibliogam, 8 Leagues from Ruenell: And 12 Leagues on this side of Columbo, you have Anguradotten and Caudingellen, lying upon two Rivers that run out of the King of Candi's Country, very rich in precious Stones.

The Island of Ceylon hath chiefly two sorts of In­habitants. Those of Columbo, from Columbo to Ga­la, are called Cinguleeses or Cingulaians. They are very well shaped, part of a black, and part of a yellowish Complexion. The Men have long streight Hair, and wear their Beards very large, like the Suissers. They are generally very Hairy upon their Breasts, and they are very proud of it. They wear a piece of Linnen about their middle, from the Na­vel down to their Knees: But they make a very great distinction of their Apparel, according to their Dignity, and Quality.

Their King dresseth himself as he pleases. His Cap is of Silk, wrought with Gold about a yard high, with a great Carbuncle before, and Rubies and Saphiires all round about it, and at the top a Bird of Paradise. His Shirt and Wastcoat is made of the finest Cotton, with Golden Buttons, and he wears a Garment of colour'd Silk, that goes 4 or 5 times round his middle, and hangs down to his Knees. His Stockings are fastned above his Knees with a string, whereon is fastned a silver Plate as large almost as a Trencher. His Shoes are only Leathern Soles with strings, one of which comes up between his Toes, and the other comes round his Foot, and ties the Sole fast to it: And all these strings are set out with Saphires and Rubies. He [Page 271] wears a Sword close under his right Arm, tied to a Silk Ribbon: It is very heavy, being in a massy Silver Scabbard; it is made like a Hanger, and about a yard long; the Handle is ordered with fine precious Stones. On his left side, between his Shirt and his Wastcoat, he wears a long Knife, besides his Sword, inlaid with Gold and Jewels, and by that a sharp Pen, (wherewith they write upon Leaves of Trees) in a Silver Sheath.

Those of his Council, called Pisare, and his Ge­nerals, may also wear Silk, Gold and Silver, but they are not permitted precious Stones for Orna­ments; and it is as much as their Lives are worth, to offer or pretend to wear any of 'em, tho' they are of little or no value; Nor do they dare so much as take up one of them when they find them any where; and the greatest, as well as the meanest Persons throughout all the Kingdom, are equally obliged to the Observation of this Custom.

His Corals, which are Governors over some one Coral or County, may wear Silk, but neither Sword nor Stockings. They wear a Staff tipt with Silver, with the King's Arms on it; they wear a sort of Slipper or Shoe made of Wood, mighty neat, and very curiously wrought.

Next to these Corals, the Apohami or Nobles are rank'd: They go drest as the Corals, excepting that they may not tie, like them, the Caps they wear on their Heads. These are to be known, when they come into the City, by their having a Slave always behind them to carry a Talpot Leaf after them, which serves as an Umbrello when it Rains.

The next in Rank are the Scriveners and Hus­bandmen, who Manure the Fields of Rice. They must wear nothing but Linnen, no Swords, Shooes, Stockings, nor Caps, only a Knife they may, and an Iron Pen. Their Wives, and those of the above­named Persons may have their Garments from a [Page 272] handful above the Navel down to the Ground; but nothing upwards, but a short Bajuvan, as they Name it, which doth not come so low as to cover their Breasts.

After these, are the Handicrafts-Men, as Car­penters, Goldsmiths, Blacksmiths, Potters, Bar­bers, Burners of Chalk, &c. These and their Wives may wear a Linnen Garment from the middle downwards, and set out their Ears with Gold. After them are the Trivitors, who gather the Drink from the Trees and boyl the Sugar: Tschallias that peel off the Cinnamon: The Fishermen and the Laserins their Soldiers: Mainets their Washers: Borrowayen, their Drummers: Cubin, who are a sort of People that will carry People where they please for Money: the meanest of all are the Batins and Zubies; These may not lay them down upon the Ground, but must always have a Fan with them to lie in; Nor are they permitted to lie under any Roof. All their Women are obliged to go Naked all upwards upon pain of being whipt.

To give you a Specimen of the Cingulaish Lan­guage, they express their numbers thus:

But it is to be observed, That here are Diversity of Dialects, as in the several Provinces of other Coun­tries, and so the Inland Cingularians differ from the Borderers; which makes Rob. Knox in his Description of Ceylon, give a different Account; and generally writes with an o, what I put down with an a; as Echoi, Dechoi, Tunhoi, Hutterhoi, Pauhhoi, Hoyhoi. [Page 273] Their Salutation is in these Words, Deo wardende Sacradende Neinde; and is answer'd with the same, both clapping their Hands to their Foreheads. Whither go you, Gaudi Januade. I don't know, Dut­wanetti. Fire, Genere. Water, Diwere. They write upon the Leaves of Sugar-Trees; when they read, it is with a very unpleasant Accent, and very long Tone, as if they sung. They write to each other on these Leaves, which are about an Ell long, and two Inches broad, and can fold them up so artifici­ally, that none can open them, without discovering that they have been open'd. They teach their Children to write upon the Sand or Ground with their Fingers. As to their Religion, they believe, That God, whom they call Deine, governs in Heaven, and that the Devil governs on Earth. Wherefore they Religiously serve him, giving him the Name of Jacie; and that not only by Offerings, and Songs in their Temples, but with Meetings in the Fields, under a sort of Tree, which I cannot compare to any Tree so well as a Lime-Tree. There is a Wall built round it of about half a Man's height; Here they Dance, Leap, and Sing, to his Honour: He comes to them in their Dance, and gives them Answers to their Questions about things to Come: As whether it shall be a plentiful Year, dry, or wet, and other things of this kind. The Soothsayer too, that receives the Answer, hath great Honours paid him. But because the Devil torments him too much, they are forced to carry him away home. They believe, That those that Die are turn'd into a Bufflar, wherefore they give the Bufflars the name of Apetie, which signifies Father; and to the Cows, that of Amme, which signifies Mother.

When the mean illiterate People (who cannot Read) have a Child Born, the Father Plants a young Jacken or Jager-Tree by his House, by which he can reckon up the Child's Age. I have been at some of [Page 274] these Men's Houses to Buy Goods, and happen'd to ask the Age of some of their Children that came about me, and they shew'd me a Tree, and told me, he was of the same Age with that. But they have there a Proverb, the cursed Allusion of which they verifie in earnest, which is, That it is fit a Man should Eat the first Fruits of the Trees they Plant; so the Father always deflowers his Daughter as soon as she is come of Age.

They have a New-Year's Festival, which lasts six weeks, and begins about our Easter. In the first three weeks they wash themselves every day; the other three weeks they pass away in Singing, and all kind of Mirth.

Their dwelling Houses are made according to the conveniency of the Country; some are near one another, after the manner of our Villages, which they call Aldeen. Others stand by themselves upon some rising Ground, to be secure from the Water, which sometimes rises very high, by reason of their great Rains: They are cover'd with Leaves of Trees. There is commonly but Room where they Eat and Lie, and another to Dress their Victuals in, which they besmear every week with Bufflar's Grease, to free themselves from Fleas and Pismires. Their Money they generally Bury in a Pot under the Hearth, or sometimes under the Devil's Tree, in the Field, where it is Sacred.

Their Victuals is Rice boyl'd instead of Bread, and what they Eat with it, is made of all kinds of Herbs, Roots, Fruit, dry'd or fresh Fish, which they Boil with a deal of green Pepper, or else with the Milk that comes from the Coco-Nuts. Every one takes his share of Rice upon a Fig-Leaf, (instead of a Plate) and takes his other Meat, and mixes it together with his Hand, and so Eats it.

They wash their Hands and Mouths very clean before and after Meals. They chaw Betel all day [Page 275] which they prepare after this manner. They take one or two of the Leaves, about as broad as one's Hand, they call them Bular: They grow all round about, against Fruit-Trees, as Ivy does. Then they take some very fine Chalk, made of small Mussel­shells burnt, and of it they scatter about as much as will lie on the top of a Knife over those Leaves, and then rowl them up, and put into the middle a fourth part of an Arck, which is a Fruit like a Nutmeg; and to this Composition they give the Name of Betel, which they keep continually in their Mouth: And this is to prevent the Scurvy. They Smoak Tobacco too, not out of Pipes, but wound up in a dry Leaf.

In their Trade, like other Nations, they love to Buy as cheap, and Sell as dear, as they can. They have no particular Traffick amongst them, dealing almost all in the same Goods. One thing which seemed mighty strange to me, was, That when I, or other Europeans came to Buy any such things, as Butter, Pepper, Sugar, Honey, Figs, Fowls, Rice, &c. and ask'd them if they had any; they used to say Netti, which is to say, No. So that we were forced to give them very good Words, and insinu­ate our selves into their favour, by giving their Children some Tobacco, or some little Trifle; Then they would ask their Children, even the smallest of 'em, whether they had best Sell any thing to these Persons; and according to their Answer, they either sold to us, or refused us, and would not have sold us any thing without their Consent, tho' we would have paid ten times the value of their Goods. When they had sold us any thing, and received their full Price, they would beg of us, that we would give them some of it again, tho' at the same time they were well stock'd with the same Com­modity.

[Page 276] Theft, tho' but inconsiderable, is punished with Death. All their King's Commands must pun­ctually be observed upon Pain of Death; and that not of the Person only that hath Transgressed, but of his Kindred, to a third Generation. This King of Candi is a very cruel Tyrant. Some Europeans, that had been Prisoners at his Court for above 20 years, have told me, That he had order'd no less than 300 in some years, to be drawn in pieces with Elephants, for a very small Fault, or sometimes a meer Humour.

We will now give you some Account of their Military Exploits and Discipline. They have a Ge­neral, which they call Dissave; next to him some Saudis. Then the Araski, which are as Captains over 20 or 30 men each, with an Ensign. Their Artillery is only a sort of Muskets, which stand upon a frame with three Feet, of which the hind­most is broad, and shorter than the two foremost: Having no Lead, they shoot with Iron Bullets. These Muskets, the Nobility, which serve the King, carry with 'em in fights.

They come into the Field, 30, 40, or 50000 strong, all barefoot. Their Arms are a heavy Iron Cimiter about a yard long, and a light Half Pike. Few have Muskets or Fire-Locks; or if they have, they do little Execution with them; tho' they have never so much room to draw up, yet they never advance but in single Ranks, for fear the Hollanders should take too many of them off at once with their Field-Pieces. Their Drummers are very much despised, being taken out of a sort of People, (tho' Cingulaians too) that live upon Bufflars Flesh, and the Flesh of any kind of Beasts. They call them Borrowayen. They tie to their Body, two little sorts of Drums call'd Tamelins; others have but one of 'em, but then it is bigger. They beat di­stinct Marches, with a great deal of Art, and the [Page 277] Soldiers understand them very well. They beat morning and night, but differently. Their Pipers use both a straight and a crooked sort of Pipe, and make pretty Musick with them both together.

Any Dutchmen, that are taken by these People, are never to be Ransom'd at any Rate; but must remain amongst them in great Slavery all the days of their Life; and all the ways are so strictly guard­ed, that there is no escaping by any means. The Dutch that sometimes desert us, and go over to the King of Candi, are maintained in Necessaries, but are not trusted in any Employment.

The other sort of Inhabitants of this Island, are those of Gala Batacolo, Trinconomala, Jafnapatnam, Manara, Aripen, Calpintin, as far as Negombo; and are called Malabars. These are all very well shaped, and very black. They are all under the Govern­ment of the Hollanders, except those of Wani, who have a King of their own. But he is obliged to pay to the East-India Company a yearly Tribute of ma­ny Elephants, and Money besides.

These Malabars come originally from the Wild Coast of Malabar, lying by Manara, and from the Kingdoms of the great Samerin, Calicut, Cananor, and others. They are all Infidels, and of different Opinions. Some of 'em, who are call'd Vitzliput­zli or Joosie, Worship the Devil; others, a Ser­pent, a Crocodile, or an Elephant, and commonly what they please themselves. They neither Eat the Flesh of Bufflars, nor Swine. They hire old Wo­men to Mourn over their Dead a whole night, and cry over the Corps all the time: Ajo aniate, ariate, inguwarre, which is as much as to say, Why did you Die, Come, come live again, &c. Then they Bury him, and leave the Hutt out of which the Man died, and build another. They are a little more Civil than the Cingulaians, and their Dress is a lit­tle more comely. The Women never let them­selves [Page 278] be seen uncovered by the Christians. When they go abroad, they are all covered with white Linnen, and so close, that they can but just see their way with the corner of one Eye: Their Arms and their Legs are all adorned with Silver Rings, and their Ears, about a Span long, with Gold: Their Fingers and Toes too are all richly set out with se­veral sorts of Rings, most of Silver and Gold.

Their Numbers are; 1 Onera, 2 Renda, 3 Muna, 4 Nala, 5 Anse, 6 Ara, 7 Ola, 8 Orta, 9 Otta, 10 Padda, 11 Paddona, 12 Padda-renda, 13 Padda­muna, 14 Padda-nala, 15 Padda-anse, &c. The manner of their Salutation, is, Laying their Hand on their Forehead, and saying Damrian Amadran, which is returned the same way. They write like­wise upon Leaves of Trees with an Iron-Pin, and make whole Books of 'em. We will now give you some Account, How the Hollanders came to Con­quer this Country, and make themselves Masters of it.

I have already told you, how it came to be in the Power of the King of Spain, and fortified by the Spaniards: It remained a great while in their Hands, till the Portugueses Rebelling in Spain, chose a King to themselves, with whom all the Spaniards that were in the East-Indies, joyn'd. And thus the King of Spain lost all his Pretensions in those Countries, which was no small loss to him. The Portugueses would be improving their Conquests, and try their Strength against the King of Candi, and thought by Fire and Sword, and their barbarous Slaughters and Murthers, to frighten him out of his Kingdom, but all in vain. For the King of Candi, finding himself in a great Extremity, call'd the Dutch to his Assi­stance; who together fell upon the Portugueses, and became at length Masters of all their Cities and Fortifications above-named. The last that was Be­sieged by 'em, was the Capital City of Columbo, which is about 28 years ago.

[Page 279] The King of Candi was now free, and had an Army of 50000 Men. The Dutch General on the other side, (call'd Min Heer Ʋander Hulft) had an Army of 12 Companies of 80 Men each, together with a Fleet of 8 Ships. Both these, tho' the one a Heathen, and the other a Christian, agreed very well together, put things into very good Order, and made a Treaty; That when the City of Columbo, both the old and the new, should be taken, the King should have the Old one for his Residence, and the Fort Negombo, lying 8 Leagues from thence, towards the Kingdom of Candi, in his full Posses­sion: The Dutch for their part should have the new City of Columbo without any Molestation, with all the other Fortisications they were already possest of; and besides this, should have Priviledge to Trade in any part of the Kingdom whatsoever with its Inhabitants.

The City of Columbo being taken at last by the Dutch Admiral Ryclof Ʋan Goens, (the above-men­tiou'd Heer Ʋander Hulst being shot Dead in the Trenches) and by the Assistance of the King's Forces, who did not suspect any Falshood after the Treaty made. The Heer Ʋan Goens, having ga­ther'd together the King's Army under pretence of giving them a Treat, and the Streets being filled with them, he sets all his own Men upon them, (for what Reason I cannot tell) who cut the best part of them in pieces, and put the rest to flight. The King, whom they thought to have taken Pri­soner, made his escape upon his Elephant, and got over high Mountains, Rocks, and Wildernesses, and at last into his Kingdom of Candi, where being secure, he swore never to forget the Falshood and Treachery of the Christians, but to continue in a perpetual War and Enmity against them.

[Page 280] And in that he hath so constantly kept his Reso­lution, that in these 28 years, he hath taken Pri­soners, and put to Death some thousands of them. Therefore this Island of Ceylon is not unjustly call'd the Dutch Soldier's Slaughter-House; and when they are commanded thither, they reckon them­selves going to Execution. For the Cingulaish Sol­diers or Inhabitants are not the only Enemies they have there, but the Blood-Suckers, or Hedge-Hogs, which the Ground is cover'd with after a show'r of Rain, will suck the Blood out of 'em: Besides this, there are other Dangers; which are, First, Being very often Pinch'd with Hunger; and then the Unwholsomness of the Air, by which those that are not used to the Climate, fall into many Distem­pers. Some are seized with a Stiffness in their Limbs, others with a Dizziness and Swimming of the Head, and cannot endure to look on the Light. Others are killed by the Bloody Flux; and with these Distempers, I have seen more Soldiers at one time in the Hospital than in the Garrison: Besides many others, who in pursuit of their Lustful De­sires, destroy themselves by Venereal Distempers.

CHAP. V.

I Come now to give a short Account of the Wild and Tame Beasts that are in this Island of Ceylon.

Among the Wild ones, I will speak first of the Elephants. They are finer and more Docile than in other Countries. Therefore they catch a great many of 'em, which they make Tame, and fit for War, and send them to the Kingdoms of Persia, Surrat, the Great Mogul, and several other places; and the Dutch themselves make use of them in the Field.

I have been very curious in Searching into the Nature, Disposition, and Qualities of these Ele­phants; and for that purpose conversed much with those that Catch them, when they are young, and have my self help'd to catch 'em. I have found in them all a great deal of Cunning, and a good Me­mory, in which they seem to be almost Rational [Page 282] Creatures. They never forget a Master's kind Usage; but that of a rough and cruel one, they on the other side, never leave unrevenged. They never Couple together in the sight of Men, but first they search round about the Wilderness to see if no Body is there hidden in any Tree to spy 'em; and if they find any, woe be to them. The Male hath his Testicles inwards, and the Female gives Suck between her fore Legs.

When they are Catch'd and Tame'd, they ne­ver Couple together. They carry their young ones seven years, and this has often been manifest by the Wild She-Elephants that have been taken, and kept in the Stables which they have for 'em at Gala, and have brought forth their young at seven years end, after they were catcht. The young ones are, at first, about the bigness of a Calf half a year old. They feed on Grass, Figs, Leaves, and Coco-Nuts, Rice, and other Fruits, and Bread if one gives it them. This they reach and hold faste with the end of their Trunk, and then thrust it into their Mouths. Before they Eat any Grass, they throw it and toss it about, to shake out the Pismires, by which they are mightily tormented sometimes. If these little Animals chance to get in their Trunk, they walk about there and tickle them intolerably.

Tho' they have no Hair, except on the Tail and Ears, yet they Swim very well. They'll live above 200 years, as has been seen in some whose Age has been designedly mark'd. They go together in the Woods some 8, 10, or 20 in a Company. They have a sort of King, or Master-Elephant, which they follow; the young ones go in the middle. In the day time, they keep on the Mountains in the shade, but towards the Dusk of the evening, they repair to the Meadows and Water-side. They break their way through the Boughs and Bushes with their Trunk; so that by the Noise they make, one may [Page 283] hear them coming a Mile off. Then the Inhabi­tants, and the Keepers of the Fields, cry out to one another for help, to keep them out of their Grounds, where they destroy all when they come. They holloe first, Hu, Hu, and then they cry for help, Alia innuwate, The Elephants are a coming: Therefore, when they come near their Hutts, Or­chards, or Fields, they light Torches, which they have on purpose made of long dry Wood, and with this they drive them away, making a great deal of Shouting and Noise. Those that watch the Fields of Rice, sit and sing all night in a little Hutt raised upon four Posts; and when they hear the Elephants coming, they holloe and light their Torches.

There is two different ways of Catching the Ele­phants. Among the Malabars, from Trinconomala to Batacale: There are some that Worship the De­vil, by whose help they Charm these Creatures, after having Sacrificed to him a Cock for an Offering. After they have Caught 'em with their Hands, they tie them with strong Thongs of Bufflar's Leather, and Tame 'em: But neither the Persians, nor the Moors, care to Buy those that are catch'd this way.

The other way of Catching them, is in a Pound prepared for that purpose, as I have seen one in the Kingdom of Cotta, two Leagues from Columbo, near the Aldee or Village Battalamuda: And I have been my self at the Catching of 50 of them, young and old; which is done thus.

When the Inhabitants have notice where they are, and what place they frequent most, the Governour of Columbo gives a general Order for a Hunting Day; on which every body high and low, even the Nobles themselves, meet at the appointed place: Besides this, the Governour takes all the Soldiers, Drums, and Burghers, along with him; being all met, they spread themselves in a Wing a League or two long.

[Page 284] Thus they go holloing and shooting along the whole day, thro' Woods and over Mountains: At Night they rest, and for fear the Elephants should get out back again, they light Fires all along about a Stone's throw from each other, which the Ele­phants are very much afraid of. The next day they go on again, and draw the Elephant's into a narrower compass. If any of 'em offer to go back, and break through, they fright them with Drums, and shooting and holloing. If one of them should chance to break through, all the rest would inevi­tably follow. When all the Hunters have in 3 or 4 weeks time ranged over 20 or 30 miles Ground, these Wild Elephants are at length, by the means of Tame ones that serve to decoy them drove into the Pound, which we mention'd above. Then they tie a Wild one to a Tame one, or if it is a very lusty one, between two. Then they make 'em so Tame by giving them neither Meat nor Drink, that with a certain Instrument they use, a Child may manage them. Notwithstanding there are some which they can never Master, and those they turn out again to Breed and Increase.

The East-Indian Kings and Merchants buy the Elephants by their height, which they measure to an Inch (as we do Horses here) from the Ground to the ridge of the Back. According to their height, they are worth 7, 8, 900 or 1000 Rixdol­lars. Sometimes they Buy them (when they are of an extraordinary vast Bulk) for shew. Otherwise they use 'em in War, and to draw the Baggage, and great Artillery. The Great Mogul hath fre­quently with him 4 or 500 in the Field; And we used them in all Expeditions: Each Company had an Elephant, as we shall tell more largely hereafter.

The two Teeth that stick bending so long out of their Mouth, are sufficiently known by the Name of Elephant's Teeth. The Flesh of Elephants is [Page 285] not fit to Eat, and their Hides are made no use of, by reason of their wanting Men to dress and pre­pare them. They are extream thick. The Flesh is Spungy, and Rotts in two or three days. The Hair that grows upon the Tail they hold very good against the Cramp, and as an approved Remedy they wear it made up in Rings on their Fingers.

When they are to draw a Load, they go side long and look steadily upon the Waggon, to see that no Body lays any thing more upon't than what is usual; and if one doth, they will not wag a foot further till it be taken off again: But what is more strange then that, is, what I have often seen at Columbo and Jafnapatnam, That these Elephants when they were drawing a Load of Stones for the Fortifications, would stand stock still at 11 a Clock, which is the Dinner time allowed to all the Slaves and Workmen, and would not draw an Inch further, tho' they were just at the place, and the Drivers encouraged 'em never so much.

There is great store of Bufflars in Ceylon, espe­cially in and about Calpintin. They are about the bigness of a Podolian or Hungarian Ox, but stronger. Their Horns are about two yards long: They are of an ash-colour. In the day time they lie in the Water up to their Nose, and at night they come to Graze in the Meadows. Their Flesh is Eatable, when it hath lain 2 or 3 days in Salt; but very hot, and gives the Bloody-Flux to most People that Eat of it. They are very dangerous to go near, especially to the Europeans, and chiefly if they have any young ones by them.

Tygers are here also in abundance, and very per­nicious to Man and Beast, and particularly to Stags and Deer. They are about the bigness of a large Ass, but something longer; they are spotted with yellowish and whitish spots, and in their Make ex­actly like a Cat. Their Flesh is white, and many [Page 286] People Eat of it. Their Skins serve to make Belts, Holsters, &c. and are much used for covering of Trunks and Boxes. They have so much of the Scent of Musk, that the Huntsmen, if they take the Wind right, will sind them out by it, and so in their pursuit of other Beasts, avoid them.

Bears are likewise found here in several Parts, and are dangerous Creatures: Yet they are not so much fear'd here, as the Wolves are in Germany.

Jackalls are of shape and bigness like a Fox, only a sharper Snout: They keep all day in their Dens, and at night they gather together a hun­dred of them or more, and come to the outside of the City of Columbo, in quest of Dead Bodies, and fall sometimes upon a Man, if they chance to find him asleep.

There is a sort of Creature here, that is not very well known, because it is rare; it is called Bitsche Vergunie, and by the Dutch, The Devil of Negombo, which Name they have given it, because of its Qualities, as I am going to tell you, and be­cause they are most frequently about Negombo. It is about a yard high, and three yards long. It hath a sharp Snout, and very sharp Teeth. The Body is as it were Harnass'd over with thick round yellow Shells. When it is pursued, it can winde it self up into a Ball. At night it makes such a dis­mal frightful Noise, that it hath often scar'd the Centinels from their Posts.

The Lewer is another, called by the Dutch, Luiste Dier; i. e. Slow-Beast. These Beasts are made like an Ape, with Hands and Feet, look very ghastly, and as lean as a Skeleton, wonderful slow in their Eating, Drinking, and Going; tho' Dogs, or any Wild Beasts come towards 'em, they will not hasten their pace in the least; and when they come near 'em, they turn themselves to 'em, and with their glaring Eyes, fright away the fiercest Dog that [Page 287] can be. Their Eyes stand quite out of their Heads, and appear very terrible: When Men come after 'em, they do the same: But it hath not the same Effect, for Men have a Snare, which they clap on their hinder parts, and so catch them as they do Monkies. After they are catch'd, they are still slow as before, and would not go above a League in a day, if one left 'em to themselves. They are kept in Cities for a Rarity, but they are too ten­der to transport into other Countries.

Wandura or Apes are here in abundance; they are black, excepting a whitish Ring about the hin­der part of the Body, and a great gray Beard, which makes them look very much like some of the Old Cingulayans. They are about the bigness of a Mastiff, and have a very long Tail. They skip about the Woods from Tree to Tree, making a great noise, their young ones hanging all the while about 'em. If you shoot 'em, the young ones fall with 'em, and then you take 'em off to keep and breed up: But this is not a true kind of Ape for keeping, so that few People take the trouble to Catch them; for they do not take any thing that's taught 'em, as others will. If a shot wounds them so as to fetch out a part of their Guts, they work out the rest with both their Hands, (if I may so call 'em) and so fall down. Those that are Catch'd will never Couple together, tho' one keeps them ever so long.

Wild-Cats; there are of two sorts: One of which is as large as our common House-Cats, and live upon all sorts of Fowl. The other is as small as our Squirrels, and are called Suri-Cats; because they keep about the Coco-Trees, whence the Suri comes. Their Hair is of a grey colour; and they make a noise like a young Turkey.

Stags are bigger than the Stags in Holland.

Deer, are somewhat less, and full of white spots.

[Page 288] Wild-Goats are a little bigger than our Hares.

The Hares less than with us.

Wild-Boars here as in Africa.

All these are in vast numbers, because but few People Hunt 'em; there being so great a quantity of Wild-Beasts there that are better.

Wild-Horses are very plentyful in the Isle of Ma­nara, and not far from thence in another Isle towards Jafnapatnam; but they are less than our Horses in Holland. Sometimes they catch some of the finest of 'em, which they Break for the Saddle, or else they use 'em for Carts and Waggons.

Among the Tame Beasts and Cattle, Oxen and Cows are in so great plenty, that one of 'em is not worth above two or three Gulders.

Bufflars are in abundance; the Country Fellows use them in their Rice-Fields: One of them is worth three or four Gulders.

Three sorts of Sheep there are amongst 'em; one which comes out of Persia, which for Wool, &c. are like those in Holland, excepting that their Tails are so vastly big, that some of 'em will weigh 20 or 25 Pound: Another sort comes out of Africa, with Horns about a Span long, but no Wool, only Hair like Calves: A third sort hath Wool like the first, but very long Ears.

Goats are in good store here, and Swine, such as in Holland. One of the biggest and fattest in the Island Manara is not worth above a Rixdollar.

Now for the Wild-Fowl. There are Peacocks of the same colour as here; and besides those, there are many as white as Swans.

Wild-Cocks and Hens are about the bigness of ours.

Water-Fowl, Snipes, Stock-Doves, and others. Two sort of Herons, one of 'em bluish, the other half black. Geese and Ducks in great numbers. I will not make any mention of their small Birds, &c. [Page 289] I will only give you some Account of the Parrots, which are here of three sorts. The largest are of a green colour, mixt with blue and red, with a black Ring round the Neck, and are accounted the best. A lesser size there is, all green, with a red Ring round the Neck, which is but little valued; and a less than that which is less esteemed too, be­cause it is the least docile. They Eat Rice and Figs. They are best to be taught when they are young. They are tied to a Cord or Chain, and morning and night, while it is duskish, one talks to 'em half an hour or thereabouts, till they get 'em at last to speak any thing after them.

There is also a great many Birds of Prey; as Falcons, Hawks, and Ravens, with a white Ring about their Neck.

Batts are of two sorts; the one small as ours here, that fly by night; and the other as big as those I have spoken of in Java.

There is another sort of Bird, which is call'd, a Navi, (because it makes a noise which sounds like that word) which when the Portugueses hear, they expect the arrival of some Ships in a short time.

They have but few Geese, except such as are brought hither from the Cape of Good Hope; they have a Bunch growing on their Bill: They cost a Rixdollar a-piece.

Other Tame Fowl is there in such plenty, that one may Buy a Pullet for a Peny, and 40, 50, or 60 Eggs for the same price. Ducks that lay 200 or 300 Eggs after one another, without one days inter­mission, will cost but Two Pence or Two Pence half peny. Many keep Pigeons likewise, which come from Holland, which they Buy for 10 d. a pair.

Among the four-footed Animals, in the Rivers; There is the Crocodile which devours many Men that live near them, as they are Fishing, Washing, or Bathing themselves, if they do not take an espe­cial [Page 290] Care: But I will in short describe something of the Nature of them.

The Crocodile is not so very furious as some Peo­ple imagine. He seeks his Prey alone; but when he is hungry, he Devours any living thing he can Eat, whether Man, Fish, Beast, Dogs, &c. shews him­self commonly, and swims any part of the day at the top of the Water, like a piece of Timber. He sets open his Mouth for a certain Bird to pick his Teeth with his Bill, which is about the length of one's Finger. At night he comes upon Land to seek out for Meat. These Animals lay their Eggs upon the bare Sand, and leave the Sun to produce the young ones out of 'em, who as soon as they come out, are about half a yard long; The Egg it self is about twice as big as that of a Goose. They con­tinually keep growing as long as they live, and come to be some 20, some 25, some 30 foot long: The Body is armed all over with a thick Scale: Their Teeth are exceeding sharp; and so much strength is in their Tail, that they'll kill any Fish or other Animal with a blow of it. Upon Land they can run faster than most Men; but in a short turning, a Man may have the Advantage of 'em, because they must take a great compass; and being so long and thick, without any bending in their Backs, they are forced to take a large turn, which affords a Man fair time to escape out of their reach.

Here is another sort of Beast, much like the Cro­codile, which is call'd a Caprigoy; but it hath nei­ther Shells, nor Scales on it, and its Tongue is very long and pointed. The longest I ever saw of these was not above ten foot.

Another not much unlike this, but less yet, call'd a Leguwan, the Flesh of which many People Eat.

Now of Serpents there are several sorts; one of 'em is called Worgers, they are 10 or 15 foot long. They will seize a Man, and clasp themselves round [Page 291] about him, and squeeze him so that he can't Breath, and falls down Dead: And to be arm'd against these, no Man goes abroad without a good Knife about him, to cut them in two, which makes them let go their hold quickly.

Another sort, which is called, Chapel-Snakes, be­cause they keep in Chapels or Churches, and sometimes in Houses; These are very mischievous and venomous, and without a timely Antidote, they who are bit by them, die Infallibly. They are com­monly from 4 to 6 foot long; and they have a sort of Bladder, or spot of white, which shews it self on the top of their Head when they are vex'd.

There is another sort of 'em, which they call Rat-Catchers, which are not so dangerous. They live all in Houses, and destroy the Rats and Mice as much as any Cats would. They are nine or ten foot long, and will never hurt any Body unless one Angers them.

The Green Serpents keep upon the Trees, and when any Man or Beast comes near them, they dart themselves upon them, and with their sharp Tongues endeavour to put out their Eyes. They are about two yards long. The most poisonous of all, are, the two headed ones, which have a Head at each end.

Here are two sorts of Remedies against the Poi­son of those Animals: The one, which the Inha­bitants use frequently, is Witchcraft: The other, which I have often used, is a Serpent-Stone. This Stone is laid upon the Wound, and it sticks to it, till it hath drawn to it self all the Venom out of it. When it is come off, it is thrown into new Milk, which fetcheth all the Poison out of the Stone, and grows black and blue with it: Then the Stone is applied afresh to the Wound, and if there be any Poison remaining, it sticks on, if not, it falls off, and the Person is secure.

[Page 292] I have seen many Scorpions here as big as a common Crab, but their Stings are not dangerous, and cause only a smarting for two days, and never prove mortal.

The Hundred-Feet called by the Portugueses Cente-Pe, because it hath a Hundred-Feet, is about half a yard long, and hath two Horns wherewith it Pinches. It is so full of Venom, that it is all over of a blew and yellow colour with it; if one is pinched by 'em, it may prove very dangerous, be­sides the cruel Smart it causes, unless the place is anointed quickly with Oil of Coco's.

There are three sorts of Pismires, red, black, and white. The first are the biggest, and rid the Houses of other Vermine, as Rats, Mice, and Ser­pents. The black keep in the Fields; if they touch a Man's Skin, they make it Smart for about half an hour. The white ones live amongst Houshold Goods; they Eat through Chests and Trunks, and damage Cloaths and Linnen very much.

Fleas are here in Shoals, so that Men could not have any rest, if they did not besmear all their Houses with Cow-Dung, to keep them away.

The Air is full of little Flies and Gnats; and in some places People cannot Eat for 'em, but are forced to stay till night when they are settled.

Blood-Suckers, or Leeches, are the worst Ver­mine on the Island: They are most towards the North between Candi and Columbo. There are of two sorts of 'em, the great and the small; The first are the common Plagues of Bufflers: The other of Men. They keep in the Water, and are made much like our Hedge-Hogs. When any Man or Beast goes into the Water, they hang upon him till they have suckt their fill, and swell three times as big as they were at first, then they fall off. If one goes to strike them off, immediately they break off and leave the Head in the Flesh, which makes the [Page 293] Wound the more dangerous: But the best way to deal with 'em is to have some green Lemons with one, or good Vinegar and Salt or Salt-Petre, and wet them with it, and they fall off immediately.

The small sort are about the bigness of a Straw, and about three Inches in length, and of a brown colour. They have neither Eyes nor Feet. In dry Weather they are seldom to be seen; but after some Rain, they fill the Ways and Shrubs. They do not creep as Worms do, but raise themselves up an end, and throw themselves upwards. If they lay hold of a Man they are not easily got off again, nor with­out great danger. Some Cingulayans say, That these things were first brought over into this Country by the contrivance of one Lamammea, one of the Kings of Candi's Sister, (whose Brother the Portugueses had taken away by violence) to be a Plague to them, but how much truth there is in the Story, I leave the Reader to judge.

Amongst the Sea-Fish commonly catch'd here, I place the Sword-Fish; it is from 8 to 12 foot in length: It is called by that Name from a sort of Sword it hath upon his Nose, which is like a Saw, with about 50 Teeth about the bigness of one's Fin­ger. The biggest of those Swords that I ever saw was an Ell long. The Flesh of this Fish is fit to Eat, but the younger the Fish is, the better. These Sword-Fishes are not of that sort which are so great Enemies to Whales, for they never come so far into the North, it being too Cold for them there: Be­sides, those that sight with the Whales have their Sword on their Back, and keep about Greenland and Ysland in vast numbers.

Sharks are right Sea-Wolves, and devour the Men they can catch, but they are often catch'd and devour'd themselves.

The Sail-Fish, so called, because it hath a large Finn, which stands upon the Back of it above Water, [Page 294] and lets the Wind drive it forwards; hath a sharp long Head of about an Ell long, and his Body is twice as long again: tho' its Flesh is but course, yet a great many People Eat it.

There is a Fish which they call Oan-Egbertsen half an Ell long, and very full of Blood. They are in so great plenty, that they pull up 7, 8, or 900 at one Draught. The great time of Fishing for 'em is in February, at which time not the Fish only is very cheap, but all sorts of Meat and other Victuals are at very low Rates.

The St. Peter's Fish, or Five Finger-Fish, is called by some the Leather-Fish, by reason of the thickness of his Skin; Hath five white streaks on the Back in the shape of a Man's Fingers; it is about two yards in length, and very good to Eat: It is most in sea­son in March, and then they catch likely 2 or 300 of them at once. The old Portugueses will tell you that this mark on the Back came by St. Peter, who drew up one of them in his Net, and left the figure of his Fingers upon it. But this I leave the Reader to believe at Discretion.

Jacks are here of the same kind as in Holland, one, two, or three yards in length, and are to be catch'd with Angles in April or May.

The King's Fish is the best sort that is here, and is something like our Carps.

Cablins are like our Herrings, but a little broader, there is vast plenty of 'em, and one Buys 10 or 20, sometimes 40, for a Peny.

The Sertin is a small lean Fish. They catch some thousands of them at one Draught, because they go together in Shoals.

Sea-Swine or Sea-Hogs, are catcht here in great numbers; their length is five or six yards, and half that about: They have a sharp Snout like ordinary Hogs; The Flesh of 'em is very fat, and the Blood very hot: In the Water they out-swim all other Fishes.

[Page 295] Sea-Devils or Sand-Creepers are 5 or 6 yards long, with a frightful Head, very broad, but not thick, black at top, and white underneath. There is much difficulty in catching of 'em with Angles, because they lie 15 or 20 Fathoms deep.

Scaits are round and flat: Have their Eyes in their Body, and a thin flat Tail about two Yards long; they are very good to Eat.

The Piil-Staert, as they call it, (which signisies Arrow-Tail) is much like it; it is as good to Eat too: But the Tail is of that Nature, that if he wounds a Man with it, 'tis mortal to him: Wherefore great Care is taken to cut that off as soon as they have catch'd 'em.

Tortoises, are catch'd here of 200 pound weight. They lay their Eggs on the Sand, 200 at a time, and leave them to the Sun to hatch; they have no Shell, only are cover'd with a Tough Skin. When they come upon Land, the Indians turn them over on their Backs, from which they cannot rise again, having not the command of their Legs. When they have them thus, three or four Men carry them to Market, and there cut them out. The Shells of these very large ones are not useful, but the small ones are of great use for inlaid Work, Combs, &c.

Sea-Crabs, and Sea-Lobsters: These are here a Yard long, with large Claws; and the other round with a very hard Shell.

Sea-Lice, are made like Lice, cover'd over with a white Shell, about the bigness of a Walnut. They keep in the wet Sand on the Shore, and are Eaten only by the Malabarian Fishermen.

Muscles stick to the Rocks, and when the Sea is at Ebb, they pick them up.

The manner of Fishing, which the Malabarians use, is much like ours. Their Nets are exceeding long, so as to reach about half a mile in compass, [Page 296] and are buoy'd up with Wood instead of Cork; and in the middle of it, which comes last to shore, they have a great Bag, into which the Fish is all driven.

Fresh River-Fish are these: The St. Pilang, a Fish with a broad Head, as smooth as an Eel, about a yard long, and two Spans about. The Bald-Head is a better sort of Fish, all Scaly like a Carp, ex­cepting the Head; weighs generally 7 or 8 pound. A Fish called a Fool, because whoever Eats any thing of the Head, becomes stupid: Wherefore the Head is always thrown away, the rest is very good to Eat. The Pager is a black Fish, with a hard thick Head; its Body is round, with very sharp Finns. There is small Fish also in abundance, as we have here, such as Gudgeons, Craw-Fish, &c.

Gurnets are a small sort of Fish like the Craw-Fish, without a Shell, and have only a whitish Scale over their Body. They are most used in Angling, for a Bait to catch other Fish with.

CHAP. VI.

THE whole Year is divided into two Seasons only, call'd the good and the bad Season. Each of them consists of five Months; the other two are call'd the Dubious Months, being March and Sep­tember, in which are the two Solstices, on the 12th Old Stile, or 22d New Stile, of each of those Months.

In the Month of March, the Rains begin to fall on that side on which Columbo is Situated, and con­tinue most commonly to the Month of September; so that all the Rivers overflow the Countries in such a manner, that the People, Cattle and Wild-Beasts [Page 298] are surrounded on a sudden, and carried away by the Water-floods. Those that delight in Hunting, may find great quantities of Beasts forced up into the Mountains at that time.

In September it begins to hold up, and the Wea­ther is much like what we use to have in April, in Holland: Then the Sun-beams come to be so vio­lently hot, that it dries up sometimes Navigable Rivers, and then the Wild-Beasts are forced to run a vast way to get Water.

In this good Season (as they term it) Thunder and Lightning are very frequent, and to that degree, that many huge Trees are split and rent to pieces with it. The Sun doth not move far from this Place, wherefore little notice can be taken of the lengthning or shortning of the Days: Nor is it ever very cold here; only when the North Wind begins to blow in February, and which holds on for about four Months, one may bear a cotton Garment on. In this Season, the Fishermen have seldom the oppor­tunity of Fishing, by reason of the roughness of the Sea. Whilst the good Season is on that side of Co­lumbo, the other side towards Cormandel, Jafnapatnam, Manara, Batacolo, &c. have the bad with them, which is not a little strange, considering that they are not far from one another.

I was upon Duty in the Fort Galture, where our Men work'd by Day on the Fortifications, and at Night stood Sentinels, (the Night lasting but two Hours) from the 22d of April 1677, till the last of September of the same Year. Our head Officer there was a Lieutenant, one Adam Slecht, a Bohemian.

On the 1st of October, we were order'd by our Governor to march to a Forlorn Fort, call'd Candin­gelle, six Leagues from Galture, with 40 Europeans, and 200 Lascarins, or Cingulaish Soldiers.

[Page 299] A very hard Storm fell upon us in the way, which so swelled the Waters about us, that we were forced to wade with our Cloaths tuck'd up, and we were not a little plagued with the Blood-suckers. We found the said Fort overgrown with Trees and Shrubs, and no Inhabitants within two Leagues of it; they were all retir'd up into the high Moun­tains, because those of Candi continually made In­cursions upon that side of the Country, Spoiling, Burning and Destroying all they came near. The Hollanders had built this Fort some Years since; but having not made it strong enough, and pro­vided it with necessaries sufficient, they were forc'd to leave it. It takes up about two Acres of Land; it hath four Bastions, a Parapet, and Pallisado's as high as a Pike, and as thick as a Man's middle. We Europeans were posted within, and the Cingulai­ans on the outward Works; and were forc'd to cut up all the Wood about it, within a Musquet­shot.

We were in no danger in the day-time, but we had enough to do at night with several Parties of Candians, and with Elephants too: But these we frightned away easily with the Fires we made, ha­ving good store of Wood. Our Magazine was stor'd with Salt, Rice, Bacon, Flesh, Brandy, Pow­der and Shot, all which we had from Anguratot, two Leagues distant from us; and the care of it was gi­ven to me. Our Water was fetch'd about a Pistol­shot from the Fort.

After we had lain here eight days in this wild and desert place, the Candians came against us, Headed by Dissave Tennecool, the great Robber: An Aratsi of ours brought us intelligence that they were coming with great forces upon us. We found then it was high time to remove our Quarters, which we did, setting all on Fire, and retired to another place near to Anguratot. By an order sent [Page 300] us from Columbo, we were oblig'd to go back to our old Quarters at Galture.

The 12th of October I was sent to Anguratot to reside as Master of the Stores, and Pay-master of the Forces. I was made mighty welcome by our chief Dutch-Officer, who lay there; and by Mr. Busterweld, who was the Ensign there. He was a Man that had been employ'd in great Affairs here, and had been sent as an Envoy to the King of Candi. He invited me to stay with him and make my a­bode at his House to keep him company, that be­ing together we might spend our time more agrea­bly.

I was well enough pleas'd to be at Anguratot, because it was very strong, and well provided with Cannon. A very fine River runs before it, which comes from Saffrigam, and hath great store of good Fish, and Tortoises; and we had some thousands of Inhabitants about us, of whom we bought choice Fruits very cheap, and all other sorts of Victuals, as Fowls, Butter, Honey, &c. for a very small price. It is very pleasant living here for one that can speak the Cingulaish Language.

The Europeans that live here, who are not above Forty or Fifty in number, live live in this following manner. They have Prayers every day, morning and night, and a Sermon on Sundays, with Singing of Psalms. They watch, and are free by turns in the day-time, but at night they must all be in the Fort upon pain of Death. Out of the Fort ev'ry one hath his little House, where each of them keeps his Cingulayish Woman to provide and dress his Victuals, and serves likewise for his Bedfellow. If a Woman at any time is brought to Bed of a White Child, it is matter of great Joy to the Pa­rents and Relations, and they grow very proud upon it. If a Man design to go out of the Coun­try, he must keep it exceeding private; for if his [Page 301] Bedfellow knows any thing of it before-hand, she certainly poisons him, or bewitches him, as seve­ral have been serv'd that have gone away; and tho' they were got 2 or 3000 miles, yet they were forc'd to come back again.

On the last day of December, a Letter came to Mr. Busterweld from Columbo, advising him to come thither, seeing he had a mind to go back into his Country. He ask'd me if I would not go with him to Columbo: So I accompany'd him thither, and we gave orders for three Boats to be made rea­dy for our selves and our Baggage.

The 2d of January, 1678; Early in the morning we went out of Anguratot, and order'd the Cingu­layans (of which there were four in each of our Boats) to take a great deal of care, for we were to pass thro' two several places that were very full of Rocks. The Dutch call the one of them, The Great Hell; the other, The Little Hell, because they swallow up so many Men. We sent out be­fore in a Boat that went free, and old Fellow (a Cin­gulayan, who was most experienc'd) to shew us the way. The Boat was loaded with Rice and Fowls, but the Men not Rowing so strong as they should have done, all sunk with their Boat. We that came just after them were not a little startled. I encouraged the Men in my Boat, as the Gentleman did those in his, and we fortunately got through, and we compass'd 3 Dutch miles in 4 hours: So we got to Galture: But we never heard more of our four Cingulayans that we lost in the first Boat.

Our Lieutenant Sleght receiv'd us very nobly, and invited us to Dinner, and gave us other Cingulayans, which we sent out before with our Boats. And be­ing Columbo was a great way from Galture, he or­der'd two Palanquins to be got ready for us (which are a sort of Chairs, but so contriv'd, that one may either sit or lye down in them) and two Culins [Page 302] or Slaves a-piece to carry us; they carry'd us very fast, and we got safe to Columbo.

The 5th, Mr. Busterweld, having sent all his things aboard, and being to leave me behind, in­troduc'd me to a certain Captain of Columbo, one Min Heer Witzenburg, to whom after he had recom­mended me, he went on the 6th Instant aboard his Ship to Punto de Gala, where he was to take in her Loading of Cinnamon and Pepper, and then put to Sea.

This Captain Witzenburg was a brave Soldier, a­bout 50 years of Age, was then in Columbo as Com­mander, and was likewise one of the Council, which consists of eight Men only, who are treated with no less Title than that of Honourable. They Judge and give Sentence in all Causes, as well Capital as others. Our chief Merchant, one Van Vorsten, was the President of them: He had been rais'd to this from a Cabbin-boy. The best part of them could neither Write nor Read: nor could the Captain I am speaking of, tho' he was the third of the Coun­cil. If any Man will appeal from them, he must transfer his Cause to Batavia, which is 500 miles di­stant from thence.

I staid 5 months with this Captain, during which time I was a very serviceable Companion, by read­ing to him all Orders and Causes at home, before he went to the Council (for they were always sent to them there first) in which he us'd to take my opinion, and in answering for him all the Letters that came to him.

The 1st of July, I was obliged to go to a little Fort call'd Malvane, 4 leagues from Columbo, where I remain'd four months. The place is very strong, by a River, it hath Pallisado's, Parapets, and a Ditch, eight Field-pieces, and other necessaries, and sixty Men to keep it. Our Head Officer there, was one Oldenburgh, a Lieutenant. It was very unheal­thy [Page 303] by reason of the thick Fogs; and therefore the Garrison is often reliev'd from Columbo.

The 6th, We were inform'd that the King of Candi would Besiege this Fort; wherefore we pro­vided our selves against it.

The 16th, The Dissave, or General, appear'd with Thirty Thousand Men, (this was that Tenne­cool the Renegado we have spoken of before,) and he let us know privately

On the 17th, That he resented an affront which the King of Candi had put upon him, and besides, that he had deceiv'd him in his expectations, for which he would now be reveng'd; and with this opportunity return to the Dutch, and not molest our Fort in any manner. We were oblig'd to keep this very secret, least it should come to the know­ledge of his own Soldiers; and we sent an account of his offers to Columbo, whence we receiv'd orders to direct him to Columbo, but not receive him into our Fort.

The 20th, He went with three hundred of his best Men to Columbo, where he was receiv'd ho­nourably by the Governor, and presented with a Gold Chain worth 300 Ricxdollars. When the King of Candi had an account of this, he order'd the siege to be rais'd, and all Tennecool's Generation to be destroy'd.

The 31th of October we were reliev'd, and went altogether to Columbo. We were to cross over a River 7 or 8 at a time, with two Boats tyed to one another. I was one of the last that were to go o­ver. I was here very near being drown'd by an un­lucky accident. The old Dottia or Waterman was just shoving the Boats off of Land, when the Boats which are exceeding little turn'd over, for the Rope broke that tyed them together. My danger was so much the greater, for that a lusty fellow, who fell in with us, and could not swim, took fast hold of [Page 304] my Leg, and would have drown'd us both, had I not fortunately laid hands on the post to which the Boats used to be tyed, by which means we were safe. Those that could swim were in no great dan­ger: The others hung luckily upon the Boats that were floating with the bottom upwards; so that all saved their Lives. Some Musquets were lost, but it was a wonder that none of the Men were drown'd or at least devour'd, considering that there is always so vast a number of Crocodiles in that Ri­ver.

From the 1st to the 8th, We lay in the Old Town of Columbo.

The 7th, and 8th, Several People were sent out to hunt after the Prince of Candi, who had been kept some years by the Dutch, with a design to put him on the Throne of Candi, when the old King should die. He was kept out of the City, near the old Hospital, and had a Guard of six Files of Mu­squeteers and one Serjeant; notwithstanding which he found means to make his escape, and was never heard of since.

He had been about six years at Columbo, where, at his coming, he declar'd himself to be of the Roy­al Blood of Candi, and the true Heir to that Crown, alledging that the present King of Candi had U­surp'd it from him, and that he was the Person that should have succeeded the Old King. And indeed all the Inhabitants were much more affected to him, which they used to express continually by the rich Presents they used frequently to bring him.

The Dutch allow'd him Forty Rixdollars per month, and 41 Simmeri's of Rice, to maintain him­self and his Retinue, which was a Steward, a Wi­zard, a Captain, 20 Soldiers, 6 Drummers, 4 Lea­pers, and 8 Slaves, or Chair-men, to carry those Sedans we have already spoke of; in all 21 Men. They would not have lost much by this, if he had [Page 305] continu'd at Columbo, and had ever come to the Crown of Candi; for they would have made such Articles with him before they had setled him on the Throne, that he would have been little more than Titular King.

The 9th, Two Companies of Volunteers were form'd out of the Garrisons of the City and Castle, of 80 Men each, and were order'd to go to the Coast of Cormandel.

The 10th, We were muster'd up, and receiv'd the next day two months Pay. Our chief Officer was a Dantzicker, one Tobias Guntz, Captain-Lieu­tenant, and our two Lieutenants were one Koningh, and one Vernie.

The 12th, We went aboard in two small Ves­sels, and arriv'd the next day at Calpintin, where our Men were lodg'd in a Church which stands out of the Fortification, where Divine Service is done in Dutch, Portuguese, and Malabarish. This Fort was built here, and is carefully look'd after, because it is a considerable Pass for other Nations; and be­sides the Inhabitants drive no small Trade with the Moors, and others. A great Commodity there, is Areck, which is a Fruit that grows like the Nutmeg. Most of the Eastern Indians cannot live without it, being so us'd to it, that they are never well, but when they are chawing of it. The Soldiers here, which are 100 in number, keep Dogs, with which they go and Hunt Bufflers, Sheep, Stags. &c. upon which they live: For the Land affords nothing but what's Wild, some Fish and some Rice.

We lay still from the 14th, to the 18th, Then orders were given for every Man to make his own Provision for three days, and to be ready on the 19th of March. Accordingly they were; and I having a desire to be in the adventure, provided for my self too, and order'd one of the Men to get me 6 pound of Beet boyl'd in Salt-water, and half a pound of [Page 306] Bisket. The next morning early we set out. Our two Malabarian Guides went before us. At noon we came near to a Well, but found no Water there, which we began to want; but our want ra­ther increased: Then we turn'd our selves to a Ri­ver; where we thought to have satisfy'd our selves, and found the Water to be Salt. Our comfort was, that we were to come in the evening to a Well; but when we came to it, we found a Buffler fall'n in and drown'd, which made us all abstain from drinking, notwithstanding we were exceeding thir­sty. Our Guide then took us half a mile farther, to a deep sandy Soil, where they told us we might have Water. There we were forc'd to make seve­ral holes in the Ground, 2 or 3 yards deep, to get at it; but we were happy still to have it upon any terms. In this place we lay all night, having set some Men to watch, and kindl'd some Fires to pre­vent the wild Beasts coming upon us.

The 20th, Early in the morning we march'd on thro' great Woods and Desert-places, where we saw and heard nothing but Elephants, Tygers, Bears, &c. there being no Man in all that part of the Country. We came in the forenoon to an Arm of a Salt-River that reach'd into the Land a great way; so that we were forc'd to wade over, after we had staid about three hours, till the ebb was at the lowest; and then too we were all forc'd to strip, and pack up all our Cloaths, Provisions, and Arms, and carry them on our Heads. We were almost half a quarter of an hour going over; and it was so deep, that some of the least of our Men, had much to do to keep the Water from running in at their mouths. Some that thought to be wiser than our Guides, went up to a place where they saw the Wa­ter run very rough, because it was not so deep there. It was but shallow indeed, but the stream was so strong there, that it threw 'em off out of [Page 307] their depth, and drown'd most of 'em. We being got over made haste on, for we were by this time in want of Water again, and the best allay of our thirst we could get, was our Bullets which we rowl'd about in our mouth to moisten them. At night we lay still at a place, whence those that would of necessity drink were forc'd to go a­bout a mile for Water, and then dig for it too. After they had made each of them their hole, they drank their sill, and then laid down in it for cool­ness, and took a nap there.

The 21th, Three Soldiers came to meet us with three Horses sent from Manara for the Officers. We got upon them with a very good will, while the poor fellows were forc'd to drudge on without Shoes or Stockings (in the same manner as they set out). We arriv'd all at Aripen about 3 of the clock in the afternoon, having gone about 22 Leagues in our three days march; which was very hard for our Men, who went all the way barefoot. Aripen is a pretty strong place, kept by 20 Dutch Soldiers, provided with 4 Field-pieces, and other Warlike Necessaries convenient for a place of that big­ness.

Many Malabarians live about it, of whom one may buy Flesh, Milk, Butter, Eggs, Fowls, &c. cheap enough: And we bought here two pretty good Bullocks for one Rixdollar, that serv'd both our Companies.

This place is chiefly design'd to keep the Pearl­bank from being sish'd by any one that hath no ti­tle to it, which is an ossence punishable with death. It is very unhealthy there, and no European but must expect a Fever that will kill him, it he stays there long. For which reason they are exchang'd from Manara ev'ry four months; and yet they lose generally half their Men. We staid there all night, and

[Page 308] On the 22th, We march'd away again, and at night came by the Island Manara, to go to which we were to cross the Waters, which is about a mile broad: It is six miles from Aripen. We were very kindly receiv'd by the Dutch Captain that lay there; and treated very nobly with Flesh and Fish, which is here in great plenty.

This Island, as we mention'd before, hath seven miles compass: It is inhabited by several Malabars, and abounds in Flesh, Fowls, and fruitful Trees; and all the Water about it affords plenty of Fish. In short, it may be call'd an Earthly Paradise. The Fort is well provided, and is kept by near 100 Dutch Soldiers. Each Soldier keeps a Boy to clean his Arms and carry them for him, and a Woman to look after his Meat and serve him. Proportio­nably to this, the Officers live in very great State. We lay here three days, and

The 16th, We went in three Dutch Boats to Jaf­napatan, where we arriv'd on

The 27th, And were very well receiv'd, and Quarter'd in the Fort that lies to the Sea.

The 28th, 29th, and 30th, Our Men were ex­ercis'd, and 20 Elephants were brought upon the place whilst we Fir'd, to use them to stand it with­out starting in War. At first they were very fear­ful and untractable, not being able to bear the noise and smoak of our Guns, tossing up their Trunks, and were very furious. At last they were brought to it so, that an Indian could get upon them, and ride about a Furlong away from us, and then drive them upon us, (we firing against them all the while,) at length they'd break our Ranks, take what care we could; and tho' we shot in their very Noses; and if the Cingulayans that rid them had not prevented them with their Instruments, they would have trampl'd us under foot.

[Page 309] The 1st of December, Two Companies of Sol­diers came to us from the Coast of Cormandel, out of the Fort Palliacate, and Nagapatan. They were Quarter'd in a Stable, used generally to keep Ele­phants in.

The 2d, Another Company came from Gala, Battacula, and Triconomala.

The 3d, We had a general Muster, and march'd with our 7 Companies, and 8 Field-pieces drawn by Elephants, and 20 others Elephants besides, out of the Fort of Jafnapatan. And being drawn out in the Fields there, we were commanded to inclose our Leaders; that is, to form our selves into a Ring, where we heard the Articles of War read to us.

Jafnapatan bears the Name of a small Kingdom, which the Dutch took by surprize from the Portu­gueses. Its Fort is well built, and strong; having four Bastions, two Towers, a Counterscarp, and a deep Ditch. It lies upon a Salt-water on the side of Manara, where the Dutch have built a very strong fine Key.

All the chief Officers lodge within the Fort with their Wives. The under Officers and Soldiers Wives live amongst the other Inhabitants in the Town, which is about a League in compass: But there are a great many Gardens in it, and many poor small Hutts; as also fair large Streets. There are two different Market-places in it; the one for Fish, the other is for all sorts of Commodities, as Silks, Linnen, Pearls, Gold, Silver, Spices, Salt, Butter, Allum, Tobacco, Rats and Mice, Herbs, all sorts of Colours; in short, all a Man can desire. Their current Money is made of Copper, and is either Shillings, Two-pences, Peny-pieces, Dama­gasties, Half-penies, and Farthings. One may buy 10 or 15 Figs for a Farthing, that are almost a span [Page 310] long; and sometimes 2 or 3 Pounds of Fish for the same price: So that a Man that goes to Market with 4 or 5 Farthings, may buy Provisions to serve a common Family two days for his Money.

I met here with an acquaintance of mine, a Phy­sician, who was chief Chirurgeon to the Dutch Ho­spital, and Physician to Min Heer Laurent Piil, the Governor, and was much esteem'd among the Na­tives of the Country for his Abilities, and the great Cures he perform'd.

The 4th, We march'd out. Our Major Clebout went first, carry'd by Slaves in a Palankin, a sort of Sedan, I have already mention'd. After him march'd the 6 Companies, with each an Elephant to draw the Baggage. It was suppos'd that we were design'd to march to Wani, where the Inhabitants had chosen a new Prince without consent of the Dutch, their Prince Don Philip being Dead; and design'd to free themselves for the future from pay­ing Tribute to Jafnapatan. But as soon as they un­derstood that we were drawing towards 'em, they sent to meet us with ten Elephants, with offers to continue willingly a yearly Tribute of Elephants and Money, on conditions we would secure them from the King of Candi.

The Major sent them to Jafnapatan with a Let­ter, and we came at night to a place call'd Pas-Piil, where a Dutch Garrison lay. Here the Hutts were ready for our Men, and provided with necessaries against our coming.

The 5th, 6th, and 7th, We lay still here, being much tir'd with going ten Leagues in a day in all that heat, and so sandy a Country. We found there three great Dutch Ships that were come from Ba­tavia.

The 8th, Four of our Companies, viz. The two that came from Columbo, the other two from Corman­del, were to Embark secretly, and the two other [Page 311] Companies were to remain in the Fort, by reason of the Troubles that were in Wani, That very eve­ning we set forwards for the Coast of Corman­del.

The 9th, Early in the morning, we came before Negapatan. Here a Dutch Yatch joyn'd us, and two other Vessels, together with three great Boats well Mann'd with Seamen. With this Fleet we sail'd along the Coast by Krancko Baar, a City belonging to the King of Denmark, and lying 8 Leagues from Negapatan. We sail'd by the Danish Admiral that lay in the Road, with two other Ships, to whom we struck our Pendants. We pass'd on by Porto Novo, a Fort that belongs to the Moors, under the command of the King of Volkendal. They had a great many Boats before it, and one at a distance to watch the rest. This one put up a Flag, and sir'd a Piece for a Signal; and of a sudden they were all under Sail, taking us for Enemies. But it was but a false alarm of theirs; for our design was only up­on the Fort Policere (which is not far from St. Tho­mas) into which many Soldiers that had deserted from the Viceroy Lakay, were got: And this Fort we had orders to Invest and Demolish, because it was a great hindrance to the Dutch Commerce.

But on the 21th, A Yatch met us, that was co­ming to bring us word, that the French, upon no­tice of our coming, were fled out of the Fort, and gone to the King of Volkendal. So we went back to Nagapatan, where we arriv'd

The 11th, at night, and cast Anchor there. We heard that the Moors had drove away a Dutch Mer­chant that was Registerer, and Secretary of Mata­patan, and had seiz'd all his Goods: Upon which we sent 2 of our Boats with 150 men to redress this Injury.

And on the 13th, They came back with an ac­count of their good success; and that they had re­stor'd [Page 312] the Merchant his Habitation, and forc'd the Moors to give back all they had taken from him. Our Ship being to take up 400 quarters of Rice at this place, we lay still there till

The 12th of January, 1679, When we set sail, and came on

The 13th, To a Dutch Fort call'd Punto de Pedre, a very pleasant place, having great plenty of Oni­ons, Tamarins, Figgs, Cocos, Jager, and Areck­trees, which make delicate shady Walks, some of 'em a mile or two long; and a fine Campaign Coun­try; There we lay all night, and very well lodg'd we were.

The 14th, Early in the morning, we march'd on foot to Jafnapatan. I was very dry in the march; and coming to a Malabarian Village, I slipp'd into a little Hutt to get me some milk to drink. I found an old Woman there with her Daughter: I desir'd a Pint of milk, and they gave it me, asking me a Damagas for it (which is two-pence;) I drunk it off, and having paid my money, went away to overtake the rest of my Company; and not think­ing of any thing, I was immediately shot in the Leg with one Arrow, and with another in my Thigh. I pull'd them out, and look'd all about me, but could not perceive any body, nor whence they should come. However I thought to fright them, and cry'd out, O Nay, Dayoli, mettene Landes ingu­w [...]e; which signisies, Ye dogs, there are more Dutch a coming. But that was all the revenge I could have, for I durst not complain of it, because it was done by stealth, and contrary to our orders, that I stopt there. So I went out of the Village as fast as I could, and stopp'd my Wounds with an old rag, that I used to wrap the lock of my Fusil in, and overtook my Company, and went on to Jafnapatan in great pain. There our Post was; and I immedi­ately went to my Countryman Lutz the Physician, [Page 313] who Cur'd me; but was forc'd to cut open my Wounds, because the Arrows were poison'd. We staid there till

The 14th of February, And then we were car­ried back in Boats to Manara. There was a Vessel here that would have held us all very well, but the Captain-Lieutenant would take but one Company in with him, wanting room for good quantity of Hogs and Onions, that he had a mind to carry to Columbo to trade with. We had very good Quar­ters here, and staid till

The 1 st of March, Then we were divided, and went in two Boats: The one was a large Dutch one, call'd the Elephant; the other a poor little Malla­barish one, into which it was my lot to go: It was quite open, and had neither Rudder, nor Compass. But those in the Dutch Vessel told us that we should not want one, if we would but follow 'em; we told 'em we would if we could; but we gave our selves over for lost, and never expected that it would carry us over the Sea. However we went well e­nough while the day lasted; but towards the even­ing, coming to the Pearl Bank at Aripen, it began to Rain, and blow exceedingly. The Wind was good, but so strong, that we were afraid of over­turning ev'ry minute. Our four Seamen, who were Malabarians, thought good to keep as nigh to the shore as we could; all of us thought very well of that too: But the Rogues, more afraid than we, as soon as they came in sight of the Land, leap'd into the Sea, and left us, and swam to shore. By mere good fortune we had some Soldiers amongst us, that had been Saylors, who manag'd the Sails and Stern. I had chosen to lay me down by the Hearth, where they used to dress their Victuals, to keep my self and my Writings dry; but the Rain beat upon me, and mixing the Ashes and Soot with it, I look'd next morning like a Chimney-Sweeper; [Page 314] but the best on't was, that I kept my Papers very safe. This was a bitter night; and in the morning we struck upon a little marshy Island, and there staid till day, to see which way we were to take. There was an old fellow with us, that knew where-about Calpintin was, being well acquainted with the Country; by the help of his Directions, we thrust off our Boat, and sail'd by many other little Islands like this, and got in sight of Calpintin, and by the next morning to it. Here we found the fellows tha [...] should have been our Guides, but had basely left us. We lay still here till the 5th Instant.

CHAP. VII.

BEfore I proceed, I will inform the Reader how the Pearls are got here, how Fish'd for, and how Sold.

The Bank, where they are, lies in the Sea, not far from the Land. It is about twenty miles long, and two broad; from seven to ten Fathoms deep. It belongs at this time to the Hollanders. The Oy­sters in which the Pearls are found, are about the breadth of one's hand. They stick to the bot­toms of Rocks, some twenty or thirty together. There are People to look every year, and see whe­ther [Page 316] the Pearls are ripe; when they are so, they write to all the neighbouring Kings to let them know what time the Fishing is to begin. Then the Divers are sent, who are Malabarian Fishermen, who come with their Boats, and some Stones along with them. Each Diver hangs a Stone upon his Foot to sink him the sooner; when he is at the bot­tom, he fills his Net with Oysters, and then loosens himself from the Stone. Then the Stone, together with the Net, is drawn up by another Malabarian in the Boat, whilst the Man shoots himself up to fetch breath. When they have thus fill'd their Boat with Oysters, they row to Land, and throw them out. There is a Dutch Soldier waits on each Boat, to see that the Malabarians do not take any of the Pearls away. The three first days these Boats are all em­ploy'd for the East-India Company; after this they may Fish for themselves paying a Rixdoller a day for every Diver.

The Oysters are laid in heaps on the Shore, and the Merchants come there to buy them. They are sold at the rate of eight hundred for a Rixdollar. The gain or loss of the Buyer depends on meer chance: For some may be find no Pearls in all they buy; others make vast advantage of their Bar­gain.

There hath been no Fishing here for these eight years. Some superstitiously think that the place is bewitched: Others give this for a reason (which I rather approve of) that the boisterousness of the Sea hath cover'd the Oysters with Sand, so that they cannot come at them.

The 6th, In the morning all our Company went in the Boat call'd the Elephant; and having the Wind for us, we expected to reach to Columbo by night. The number of the Soldiers and Officers was in all 110. We had but a small Vessel with Water, a bushell of Rice, a small Buffler, and a [Page 317] young Buck; which two last things were for a pre­sent to the Governor. Thus the Boat was quite full, and no Man had room to lye down, but was forc'd to keep his Seat. The Wind blew North: But at noon it ceas'd, and then we went but flowly: but we kept in sight of Land all along on our left hand. Toward night, the Wind arose again; and and then we made some speed. Therefore the Steers­men bad us all look out sharp for Columbo, where we earnestly desir'd to be, especially because our Water Vessel was every drop drunk out.

The 7th, By break of day, we found that we were carry'd wide off of it by the strength of the current, and partly by the oversight of our Steers­man: For we could see no Columbo, nor Land nei­ther. All the Officers were very angry with him for't, and would certainly have thrown him into Sea, if he had not got up to the top of the Mast, where they made him stay all that day for his Pu­nishment. Our Captain consulted the Map of the Island Ceylon, and he directed us somewhat in our course; and about night we got in sight of Pico­d' Adam, or Adam's-Hill; and at six of the Clock next morning we got happily to Columbo. It was high time for us to get thither, considering that we had been two days and three nights without Meat or Drink. The Steersman begg'd we would par­don him, and not complain of him to the Go­vernor.

The 8th, As soon as the Gates were open'd, we enter'd the City and went to our respective Posts. The Captain, with whom I spent some time when I was here before, sent to me to desire me to make his House my own again, if I pleased. I did not make any refusal of so advantagious a proffer, but accepted of it, and I staid with him till

The 16th, When I was order'd to go with seve­ral others to carry a Present, which the Governor [Page 318] sent to the King of Candi; during which time I had the Title and Office of Captain. The Presents were, two Persian Horses, with sine Velvet Cloaths and Trappings, each Horse led by two Malabarian Slaves: Ten Falcons, each carry'd by a Malabarian dress'd all in white: Six Musk-Cats, each in a diffe­rent Cage, carry'd by two Slaves: Six very large Cocks from Tutucurini, each of them likewise in a Cage, cover'd with green Velvet: Two Persian Sheep, each with a Tail that weigh'd 20 or 25 pound: A Box that had two Bottles in it, that held each of them six Gallons of Persian Wine: Besides this, a great piece of Sandel Wood, that weigh'd 200 pound, wrapp'd up in sine white Linnen. The Letter that was to be deliver'd to the King, was carry'd in a Silver Cap by a Serjeant bare-headed, and a Canopy was carry'd over it by four Cingu­layan Nobles: By each of which another went with a large Wax-Candle lighted as long as a half Pike.

Our march began in order at the Governor's House. Some Companies of Cingulaish Soldiers went first; then some Companies of Dutch; then the Presents; after them two Companies more of Dutch. These were order'd to go as far as the King of Candi's residential Town, Ruenel. All the City was in Arms, and all the Cannon was Fir'd round, and a Dutch Company that conducted us out of Town gave three Vollies and went back again.

We, together with the others before-mention'd, went on with the Presents. At night we came to a place, where Dutch Potters live, two Leagues from Columbo; there we lay that night, and the next morning march'd on, and came

The 17th, At night to Hanquelle or Gourwebel, a Dutch Fort, where we lay.

[Page 319] The 18th, We had a very unpleasant and dirty way, and were not a little tormented with Blood­suckers, till we came to the Fort Sittawack, which is in possession of the Dutch, and 12 Leagues distant from Columbo. Immediately Letters were written, on leaves of Sugar-trees, and dispatch'd to the Co­ral of Candi at Ruenel, to acquaint him with our being come thither, with a Present for the King his Master; and that he should permit them to come forwards, if he pleas'd to receive them. But not a word of answer did we get, and we staid here in expectation of it six whole Weeks, till the end of September. At last we had Directions sent us from Columbo, which were, That we should go four Leagues farther beyond Ruenel, and deliver them to the Coral, and then come back. And accordingly

The 1st of October, We went; and after ha­ving crossed seven little Rivers, we came to Ruenel. This Fort heretofore belong'd to the Dutch, but was abandon'd by them, tho' themselves had built it. There we cross'd over, and having march'd a League further, we came to a large Plain, where we halted a while to rest and refresh our selves. By that time we had been there about half an hour, we saw and heard several small Parties of Cinguleses coming upon us from ev'ry side. Our chief Com­mander sent some Cingulayans to ask what they meant to do? They answer'd them, that the King of Candi had sent them to take the Presents we had brought.

We would not trust 'em. So we put our selves in order, and stood our Ground. Their number still encreased, and they came very thick out of a Wood. At last their Artillery (which was very small) appear'd too, and then they drew towards us. We sent again to 'em to know what they de­sign'd to do with their Artillery, and whether this [Page 320] was their custom to repay Civilities? They told us their Field-pieces were not loaded.

We would have been glad to have been at home again, for we were but two Companies of Dutch of 160 Men each, and two or three hundred Cingulay­ans; and these Heathens were almost innumerable. They appeared as thick as Grass on the Field. The Presents were sent for by the Monthou, who was one of the King's Chief Officers, and an under Officer took them and delivered them to him. He recei­ved them, and he giving no orders for their Artille­ry to be dischrged, we gave no Volley of our side.

Our Officer desired to speak to the King's Saudi in Person, and a place was appointed for them to meet at, equally distant from them both. The Saudi came upon an Elephant, and our Officer was on Horse-back. These two sorts of Creatures are not to be brought near one another, wherefore they were forced to light, and meet a-foot.

The Saudi did not take off his Cap, because he be­long'd to Crown'd a Head: Ours only represented a body of Merchants, and Deputy Governors.

Our Officer complained of the manner of our Re­ception, and ask'd why so many thousand Men were drawn out against us, knowing that we had but two Companies of Dutch: The reason the Saudi gave was, That his Master had commanded it to be so; so they parted, but neither would draw his Men off first. At last, Night coming upon us, we were forced to retire.

They let us pass by quietly enough till we were got to the River by Ruenel (which is most like the Rhine of any I ever saw;) But as soon as one of our Companies was got over, they fell upon the Rear of the other. Our Cingulayans took the River, and swam over, leaving us in the lurch. We continu­ed Firing upon them, and they upon us; till we were all got quite over. We lost our Lieutenant and [Page 321] two private Soldiers. We killed several of theirs, and wounded many more. We had a very bad way to go, and it fell a Raining, which made it more Dirty and Slippery, so that we could not go so fast as we would have done. We retired towards Sittawack, and passed by a steep Rock; whence it is reported, That the late King of Sittawack's Wife and Daughter flung themselves down headlong, having received the News that he had lost the Bat­tle against the King of Candi. The Candians all the while came after us, but were not able to do us any great harm, because the ways were so narrow that they could not come up to us. Yet we were forced every now and then to Fire in the Rear of us.

The 2d, 3d and 4th we rested at Sittawack, the next day we destroyed two Heathenish Temples not far from that place; they were built upon a rising Ground, and cut out of a vast Rock: Within they were adorned with many Images and Statues of Wood and Stone, representing Devils, &c. Under one of the Pagods we found a dark black hole, as it were grown so with Smoak, no body durst venture to creep in. We threw some Straw into it, and Fired it, but we could not sound the Depth or Length of it. Some Fellows were mightily afraid of standing near the hole, and were afraid that we should poke some Cingulayan Devil out of it; but if he was there, he did not come out, nor did we find out what it was made for.

We had several Lutherans and Papists amongst us; the first of these fell a Singing some Spiritual Hymns in the Temple, that had that hole under it. The Papists went together into the other, and they having among them an Old Fellow that had been a a Priest heretofore, he fell to saying Mass. There was on the sudden such a noise, and thundring, and cracking, that we thought we should have been a [Page 322] blown up, or that the Temple would have fallen up­on us, Some run out thinking to be safer, but the noise and hurly-burly was greater there than with­in, so that some came in again; and this continued a quarter of an Hour.

The 6th we came away, and toward the Even­ing entred into Columbo; where we found two great Ships lying in the Road come from Japan, with Cop­per, Gold, China and Saccapali which is a liquor of a faint smell, but very wholsome.

The 7th I was ordered to my Post, which was at the Gate call'd Victoria, where I stay'd till the 2d of February 1680. I had 110 Men under me. The Castle Gates were open'd and shut, every Morning and Night at Six of the Clock, and all the Keys ty'd together with a Silver Chain, were car­ried to the Governor: The Gates are shut likewise from Eleven to One a Clock in the Day time, that being the hottest part of the Day, and therefore generally taken to sleep in. We Exercised our Men every Mondy, and every Sunday we went con­stantly twice a Day to Church, where Divine Ser­vice was performed in Dutch and Portuguese, after the Reformed way.

The 9th Instant we went to relieve the Com­pany that was at Sittawack, Twelve Leagues from Columbo; we got there that Night, and the next Day being

The 10th, the Company march'd out and left us. And here I shall give the Reader some short Account of the Fort of Sittawack: It is scituated upon a Rocky Ground; near to this, just over the River, stood heretofore the King of Sittawack's Pa­lace, ruin'd since by the Portuguese: It is about four hundred Paces in Circuit: It is built four­square, with four Bastions, call'd, Rycloff, Louisa, Columbo, and Gala; Each of these Bastions hath two Pieces of large Cannon. In the middle of this [Page 323] place is a large square Bulwark: Under this are kept the Provisions, as Rice, Flesh, Salt, and Bran­dy; and the Ammunitious of War, Powder, Gra­nadoes, and Balls: Over that was the Guard Room, where all the Men lay; at each corner of which were two small Pieces of Cannon. Half the Men might have leave to be out of the Fort in the Day­time, but at Night they were to be in, every Man, upon pain of Death. Every Night the Names were call'd over, and Prayers Read; and on Sunday Night we had a Sermon preach'd in the Guard-Chamber. Here is also a Company of Amboineses continually kept in the Dutch Service. Their Licu­tenant was call'd Alons, and was of Royal Blood. They live in the Town altogether, and with their Huts they make a very pretty Street, and they have their Wives with them. But at Night they are as much obliged to be in the Fort as any of us. They are very nimble and active at Running or Leaping. They never have but little Beards, and behind in their Necks they have a sort of bunch grows like a Wen. Their Pay is, for a Lieutenant 24 Rix Dollars a Month, an Ensign 16, a Corporal 8, a Private Centinel 5, all paid in Mony.

The Cingulayans are mightily afraid of the Am­boineses, and rather more than the Europeans are; for they are great devourers of Men. They wear Muskets and short Swords. Besides their own Lan­guage, they generally speak Maleysh, Cingulaish, Portuguese, and Dutch. They love Gaming exces­sively, and the day time they generally spend in Cock-fighting, Cards, and Dice; and when they have lost all their Mony, they go to some work or other, as Carving several things in Stone or Wood, &c. till their Month's Pay comes into their hands again, and as soon as they have paid their Debts, what is left they put to the venture; and when they have lost that, it is much if the Wife is not strip'd of all [Page 324] her Ornaments to supply him in the pursuit of his Gaming, and the Family is left often in an extream necessity, and ready to starve.

As for Sittawack, it is a Fort design'd to resist the King of Candi: It hath three little Counties or Corls depending upon it, the one is call'd Cuculi and in Dutch the Hoender Grafschap, (Hoender sig­nifying Fowls, which are there in abundance;) the second is call'd Bulatkam-Corl, from the quantity of Plants it produces, which serve for Food to the Inhabitants: The third Bisang-Corl, from the great quantity of Figs that grow there. In each of these Corls are some hundreds of Peasants that are under Contribution, and are forced to pay a fourth part of all their Rice to the Fort, and likewise of their Fruit-bearing Trees, as Cocos, A ack, Sugar.

This Fort besides serves for a Guard upon all the pretious Stones, as Rubies, Saphyrs, Emeralds, the Topaz and Azure Stones, that lie in and upon the Ground: They are sometimes washt into the Rivers by the great Rain and Water Floods. In the River that runs from Saffrigam (which was once a Dutch Fortification, but now left) one may find abundance of little Rubies, and sometimes a pretty large one; the very Sand of that River is al­most of the same substance with the Stones, being of a Red and Blue Colour. We often used to go to bath in that River, and seek for precious Stones, but not when the Water was high, for fear of the Crocodiles; though it was not worth any Man's while, unless he could swim, and venture to dive in the deepest places for 'em; because it is there only that those of any considerable bigness are to be found.

There is a little rivulet that runs below this Fort, coming from between two high Hills, and discharges or empties it self into the River, in which are found Saphyrs, Emeralds, Topaz and Lazule-Stones: [Page 325] We have walk'd many a day in this Water for two or three Miles an end, to look for 'em. We had little Basket-nets which the Amboineses lent us; and we us'd to thrust the Nets into holes, and fetch'd out good and bad together, and shake out of the Net all the Sand and Gravel, and the Stones that were of any bigness remain'd. Those that had no Net made but but little on't. The Elephants us'd to be very troublesome to us, and we were forc'd often to go some Miles about to avoid them, and I for my part was always provided with a Gun against them; and for fear too of Tygers and Ser­pents.

A small account of the Nature of these Stones will not be unpleasant to the Reader; wherefore I will, as far as I know, give as brief an account of them as I can:

And first for the Rubies, they grow in a reddish, stony, sandy Ground, one Fathom or two deep, spreading themselves like Veins, and though the great Floods carry them away in the Rivers; they keep their Beauty and Colour as well under water as under ground, but if the water runs off of them, and leaves them ever so little exposed to the Sun, they turn as black as a Coal.

The Saphirs grow in a hard bluish ground, about a Fathom deep, and in veins too, and are washt likewise into the Rivers by the violent Rains and Flood. Some are as big as the top of one's Finger;

So are Emeralds, Topazes, and Lazule-stones, these are as Red as Fire, and as Blue as the Skie.

Another sort of stone is found here, call'd Cat's Eyes: These are so call'd from their colour, which is a changable Blue and White.

Red, Blue, Yellow, Black, and White Chry­stal is to be found every where, and is very trouble­some to Men upon their March, when they go bare-foot, [Page 326] as all our Men did, but they find an Herb ve­ry common there, which they call Horse-foot, that cures them in two or three days time.

Some of our Company us'd to frequent those Ri­vers every day, and at last all of 'em contract­ed some Distemper, and that was all that some got by it; wherefore our Officers gave orders that no man should go any more into the water upon that design.

On a certain time that I was upon no Duty, I went about a League from the Fort, where I spy'd an old Cingulayan, with his two Sons, in the River seeking Stones: I took care to come up to them without being discovered, least they should have slipt away; I ask'd 'em if they had found any stones, one of 'em answer'd, Netti Ralu, which is, no Sir; I would not believe him, so I search'd his Cloaths, and found in some of his Buttons, among other little Saphyrs, one that was about the bigness of a Hazel Nut. I askt him if he would sell it, he re­fus'd it at first, but at last he offer'd it me, and two small ones with it, for half a Dollar, Dutch Mony. I had at that present time no Mony by me, and I durst not take it by force from the old Fellow nei­ther, because he was a subject of the Dutch; and what to do I could not tell, having a great mind to the stone too: I had a piece of Chrystal in my Pocket, which I took out, and convey'd the Saphir into my mouth; so I told him I would give him his price if he would go to Sittawack, and offering to give him it again, to keep till then, I let the Piece of Chrystal fall into the Water, he thinking it was his stone, cry'd out, O Deine Balatie, which signi­fies, Plague it is gone: I seem'd concern'd, and told him he might find it again. He and his Sons went to seck for it, but to no purpose: They were mighty sorry for their loss; I told them I would make them some recompence, and took them with [Page 327] me to Sittawack, where I gave them three shillings, and they went away very well satisfied. I made use of this stratagem, because if I had left the stone in their keeping, they would have mistrusted me, and never have come to the Fort after me.

The Tenth of March I went with two other Lu­theran Gentlemen, (each of us having a Gun with us,) to the Hill, where we had not long since de­stroyed the two Pagods, to see what condition they were in. We found them ruin'd as we had left them, and poked again in the dark hole; But I believe we had routed the Devil the time before, for we could not make him roar any more, do what we could. At the bottom of the Hill I saw abundance of fine Cocks and Hens, and I bought some of the Hens and one Cock of an old Woman they belong'd to. She told me that the Cock I bought was consa­crated for an Offering, while the Pagods stood, and therefore that I should not kill him, and that he would beat any Cock whatsoever. I laugh'd at the story, and yet was a little afraid because it was de­sign'd for the Devil, and did not know but he might come and fetch him. However I ventur'd upon him, and paid as I did for my Hens, a Dutch peny for each of them. Being come to the Fort, I let him run there: In two or three days he fought and beat every Cock in the Fort that he could come nigh. Every Body wondred at the sierceness of this little Cock, and I began to think that what the old Woman had told me might be true. At last I made a trade of Cock-sighting, and I got all the Amboineses about me. They laid wagers among themselves, and I only won the Cocks that mine beat, which amounted to two or three and thirty. At last they ignorantly hit the Nail on the head, saying that the Devil was in him. Being to go to Columbo again, I took him with me, and thought he would have done as great feats there, but he was [Page 328] overmatched with a Cock that came from Tutucurini, that beat him lustily.

The 2d of March, A Laserin came to Town, and told us that an Elephant was fall'n into the King's Well, on the other side of the River. I went with several others, and saw him lye at the bottom squee­zed together, standing almost up an end, but his Legs bent, and he was very uneasie. We took some Fig leaves which we threw down to him; he took 'em very thankfully, and eat them. At last he lif­ted up his Proboses, and made a horrid noise, which we interpreted as a begging us to help him out; but he lying 12 Fathoms deep, we could not possi­bly do it. One of our Drummers was there with us; who having been pursued one time by an Ele­phant, as he was Hunting, knew this to be the Ele­phant, that had put him so hard to his shifts; for if it had not been for a large Tree that he climb'd up into, he had certainly been kill'd. The Drummer to be reveng'd of him, went the next day by himself, threw a great many dry sticks upon him, and some straw, and set it all on Fire, and then came home and told us the exploit.

The 3d of the same Month about 8 or 9 of the Clock at night, We felt a very violent Earthquake coming from the Northward, which shook our Block-house extreamly. All the Men that lay in the Guard Room were awaked out of their sleep, and thought it was an Alarm. Ev'ry body would make haste to come out, and ev'ry body would be first down stairs. The Throng was intolerable; and in the bustle the Lamp went out, which made the grea­ter Confusion; so that at last very few went out as they should do, but fell down stairs. We felt three several shakes, the last of which was so very violent, that we thought the whole Island would have been lost; and we heard from the Seamen that lay in the Road before Columbo, that they had felt [Page 329] it very sensibly too. What conclusions may be drawn from this, of the causes of Earthquakes, I leave Naturalists to agree about if they please or can.

CHAP. VIII.

I Spent all the Month of March in Hunting, and I liv'd altogether upon what Game I used to bring home with me. Upon a certain night the Moon being at Full (knowing it would be light all night) I, with three Gentlemen more, went out into a fair Plain, about a league from Sittawack, where we design'd to have some Stags. We set our selves down at the side of a Hill, to watch the wild Beasts, that we expected would come out of a Wood to feed where we were, there being very fine Grass.

[Page 330] The first that appear'd were Bufflars, among which there was a Stag; they came directly to the place where one of our Company was (who was a Swede) and did not know what Creature it was. As soon as these came to smell him, they took to the top of the Hill again immediately, and made a great noise there. On the other side we heard several E­lephants making towards us. About Mid-night, being tir'd with sitting, we got together to ask one another's Advice, what we should do, when the Elephants came. We resolv'd to fall upon them; because we concluded they kept the Game from co­ming into the Dale, and so spoil'd our sport.

When we got into the middle of the Plain, an Elephant broke out of the Wood, and run at us immediately; We took to our Heels, and run as fast as we could to the place where we first sat down; there we took Courage again, and resolv'd to go on again, and that not one of us would run away, as we had done before: At the left hand of the Plain, we saw two great Elephants by a Tree eating the Leaves of it.

The Swede would shew the greatest Courage, and went foremost; and being within 60 paces of 'em, fir'd upon them, but they did not stir for all that: After that I went a little nearer, and shot one of of them in the Head, which made him make a most hideous noise; and then they ran off into the Wood again.

We heard on the other side of us some more of 'em, and went towards 'em: We heard where they were, but we could not see 'em; for they were feeding about a Tree that had boughs which reach'd down to the ground, amongst which they stood like so many Horses at a Manger. We came close to the very Tree, where they were, and yet could only hear 'em. I went a little on one side of the Tree, and then discover'd a terrible huge Elephant, [Page 331] with four small ones besides, about ten paces from me. My Gun was cock'd, and I, having overcome that little Pannick fear that seiz'd me at first, gave fire upon the biggest, and hit him just on the head, which made him roar lustily. Then I retir'd, and another stept in, who fir'd likewise, and then ano­ther; so we kept firing three times a piece round. The Elephants gave ground, but not above 20 or 30 paces, and set up a hideous roaring.

We did not think it safe to pursue any more Game; So we went back to Sittawack. The next morning the neighbouring Cingulayans came down to the Valley, to see what was done there, having heard much shooting in the night; They found an Elephant, with two very sine teeth, lye dead. They gave an account of it to our chief Officer, who sent immediately for me, and ask'd if we had shot the Elephant: I told him it was probable, because we had been pursued in the night by some of 'em, which oblig'd us to fire upon 'em. This was the only reason that could serve to excuse us; for it is strictly forbidden to shoot any Elephants, unless a Man is in danger of his Life. Our Officer sent word of it to the Governor of Columbo, and sent withal the Elephant's two Teeth. The Flesh of this kind of Animals is good for nothing; the Fat is used for Lamps, the rest was left in the place.

In April it rain'd so violently, that we were al­most overwhelm'd with Water. The Amboineses, who, as I told you before, liv'd in the Town, were forc'd to be taken into the Fort, with their Wives and Children; Men, and Beasts, both tame and wild, were drove up into the Mountains: And our Fort was very full of Serpents, Scorpions, and o­ther venomous Creatures. We did what we could to keep them out, by making Fires at all the Gates and Posts where the Sentinels stood.

[Page 332] The Rains abated in May, and likewise the Floods; and that Month I saw nothing remarkable, but that the Elephants shew'd themselves in vast Numbers about our Fort. Most nights of this Month I went a Hunting with Cingulayan Sports-men, and with them I had always good Sport; and brought some­times as much home as would serve the whole Gar­rison. An Indian used to go foremost, with a lighted Torch upon his Head, and a Stick in his Hand, to which some Shells are tyed loose; and he goes along shaking of 'em, making a continual rat'ling. As soon as any Bufflers, Harts, or Hares, &c. hear this, and see the Fire, they come towards it, and within shot of the fellow; then he that goes behind him shoots as many as he pleases of 'em. But the fellows sometimes are in danger of being run at by an Elephant, who now and then pursues them, and puts 'em to it very hard, not­withstanding their Fire, and the ratt'ling of their Shells.

The 1st of July, There came an Envoy from Co­lumbo to Sittawack, call'd Mierop: He had with him an Ambassador from the King of Persia. He rode in a very fine curious Chariot, made after the Persian manner, drawn by two Oxen, cover'd with fine white Linnen. His Presents for the King of Candi were two white Lions, three Tygers, twelve Musk-Cats, all carry'd in very neat Cages, lin'd with green Velvet. Two black Persian Horses, co­ver'd likewise with green Velvet; and twenty Fal­cons, carry'd by so many black Malabarian Slaves. The Letter was carry'd by the Dutch Ambassador in a Silver Cup, and over him was a Canopy carry'd by 4 Cingulayan Noblemen bare-headed.

The 2d, We guarded these Presents as far as a place, call'd The Devil's Tree, by Ruenel; and ha­ving given our Ambassadors three Vollies, we left them. They went forwards with their Presents [Page 333] to Buare-Birge, which is in the King of Candi's Do­minion. As soon as the King heard of their co­ming thither, he gave orders to have them all se­cured, and provided Necessaries for the Men, and the Beasts they brought along with them; and to keep them in close custody till further orders. And it is a question whether or no they will ever be set at liberty: For it is above 22 years since one John Baptista was sent thither as an Envoy from the Dutch, and another Ambassador sent from the French Vice­roy of Trinconomala, who are there still, kept in Prison and in Fetters, without any hopes of being ever free, as long as this King lives.

Besides this Consinement, they live very hard; for tho' the King allows them necessaries (and those it may be not in great plenty neither) the King's Officers convert the half of them to their own Use and Profit.

On this same day, Two gray Old Men came to us in the Fort of Sittawack, dress'd after the Cingu­layan manner. They told us that they came about 20 years since to Calpintin with an English Ship, and that they, with ten other Seamen, being sent on shore to this Island to fetch Provisions, Water, and Wood, they were trapann'd by some Candians, who sent them to Candi, where they had been kept Prisoners all that while every one of 'em. That the other ten were dead, and they two had ventur'd their Lives to make their escape, and had left their Black Wives behind them. They had been eight days a coming (or rather eight nights, that being the only time they could travel in, being forc'd to lye hid all day in the Woods). They had heard that day the shooting from our Fort, and judged it, by that, to be a place in the Hands of the Chri­stians; and were over-joy'd to find themselves deli­ver'd out of the power of their cruel Master, the King of Candi.

[Page 334] One of them was a Gunner, the other a Drum­mer, and both spoke besides, English, very good Cingulaian and Portuguese: The Gunner told us a great many passages of his Life, during their Sla­very; and amongst other Relations, described to us the Richness of the King of Candi's Warlike in­struments: His Carriages are all over-laid with Gold and Silver, and inlaid with Rubies and Saphyrs. He told us that he had seen once a great Ruby that a Cingulaian Peasant had found, and carried home to use for a Whet-stone, and had whetted his Knives and Hatchets with it for some Years. A certain Field Officer of the King of Candi happening to go to that Contryman's House, saw it, and carried it to the King, who sent immediatly for the Country Fellow, and askt him what he would have for his Whetstone: The poor fellow told the King that he had found it in the River of Bibliogam, and that it was at his service, and that he could get another stone to do his business as well. This innocent an­swer satisfied the King that he did not know the value of his Jewel; for had he known it, it would have cost him his life. The King dismist him, and commanded some Land and Cattle to be given him, ordering him for the time to come to let such stones lie whenever he found 'em.

The 3d Instant these two poor English Men were sent in a Boat to Columbo; I went along with them to introduce them to the Governor, who received us with extraordinary courtesie, and after a great many questions to satisfie his curiosity, sent for Cloaths, which he freely presented them with, and then took them to his Table, and very civilly desi­red them to stay in his House till some opportunity offer'd it self to send them to Batavia, where they might easily get an English Ship to carry them to Bantam.

[Page 335] The 4th I went back with two Soldiers to Sit­tawack, where I continued till

The 12th; when we were all relieved by a fresh Company from Columbo.

The 15th we march'd from Sittawack in the Morning, and came at Night to Columbo. I pack'd up amongst my things, two or three hundred of Bulat Leaves, which two Cingulayans carried after me. These Leaves I have already told you are chew'd commonly by the Inhabitants; so I brought them to make a present of to my Landlady. I can't tell whether Heaven design'd me an occasion of making my Fortune or no, but however it was, I refus'd laying hold on it; and how it was I will re­late in short. My Landlady treated me very civilly from the first time of my coming to her House, where I paid her 3 Rixdollers by the Month, and had a very good Table, and what Suri I pleas'd at Meals: Her entertainment grew in time kinder and kinder; and then it broke out into some prelimi­nary interrogations, why I would not settle there? Why I would not Marry? and many things of that kind; at last it came to a close application, and to a plain offer of her self, if I would marry. When I considered her on one side, as to her Fortune, I must confess she did not altogether displease me. Her first Husband was a substantial free Merchant at Columbo, call'd John Christantz; he was owner of of a Ship, with which he had often been at Bengal at the River Ganges, and drove there a considerable Trade, but going there again in the year 1678, was cast away with a Hurrican, and he and his ship lost. What she lost by this accident I do not know, but she was left worth near thirty thousand Ducats, and twenty Slaves from Bengal which she used very inhumanly: But the Figure she made never would permit me to entertain a thought of marrying her, but that other People may judge [Page 336] whether I was too nice, or but reasonably so, I will give some description of her: I did not dislike her merely for her being Black, but methoughts her Ears, though they were richly set out with Gold, look'd but hideously, being longer than my Hand: Her Hair, that would reach down to her Heels, she would besmear every Day with Oyl made of Coco-Nuts, and then wind it up on her Head, just as we serve Horses in Holland, when they have long Tails: She wore a little short sort of a Wastcoat that hardly covered her Breasts, fastned with Gold Buttons; from the Breast down to be­neath the Navel she was Naked. The best part of her Dress was from beneath the Navel downwards, having a Linnen Garment down to the Feet, and another-like one at top of that, something longer than the under one: She had a great Necklace round her Neck made of Gold and Ivory: She spoke no Dutch, but Portuguese and Cingulaish, which were her Father and Mother's Languages, and the Mala­barian which is much the same. All these things together were so far from raising any Passion for her, that they were a preservative against it, so I e'en left her as I found her.

There were at this time two Sloops and a Yacht ready to set sail for the Coast of Malabar, there to hinder the Malabarians Boats in their Pepper Traf­sick: I was sent to command them, and had my choice of Men out of all the Company: After that I pick'd them out that I liked best, I took twenty of them with my self on board the Yatch, call'd the Trinconomala, and in each of the two Sloops went 12 Men, and 7 Seamen.

The 18th. in the Evening we set sail. I had with me besides my twenty Men, a Steersman, and 15 Seamen; and I put off with our Flags and Pendants as Commadore from Columbo.

[Page 337] The 19th, 20th, 21st, and 22d, we saw no Land: We had the wind for us, but the stream was contrary to us.

The 23d, we espied land in the Forenoon, and in the Afternoon we came before the Town Couchin, which belong'd heretofore to the Portuguese. I went to the Commadore that lay there, and deli­ver'd my Letter to him from the Governor of Co­lumbo. The next Day he joyn'd us with another Sloop well Mann'd, and gave us instructions how we might best annoy the Malabarians.

The 25th we went to Sea again, and there Cruised along the Coast up to Goa, a Portuguese Town. We were in a continual Chase, and all the Boats that we met loaden with Cardamunga, and Pepper, and could not produce a Dutch Pass, we took. Their Provisions and Goods we stow'd in our Ves­sels, and sunk theirs; but many of the Malabarian Vessels being little ones, kept in the Shallows near the Land, where we could not come, ours drawing much more Water than theirs did, and those were secure enough.

The 6th of October, we went back to Couchin, and brought thither fifty Malabarian Prisoners with us, and a great deal of Onions, Pepper, Car­damunga, Rice, and Dry Fish. I acquainted the Commadore with what I had done, and brought with me, and he left all the Booty amongst us, ex­cept the Pepper, which he kept to himself.

Here we stay'd till the 20th of November, and found it much better living than in Ceylon.

The 21st, we went back homewards, and arrived happily at Columbo on the 29th about three of the Clock in the Afternoon: I deliver'd to the Gover­nor my Letters from Couchin, and every one went to his respective Post. We had but two Men dy'd in the Expedition, they were shot with two Poy­son'd [Page 338] Assagayen or Darts; and one Seaman had his Arm shot off by a Gun that burst in the firing.

The 30th, a Master Gunner call'd Henry Scholten was shot to death, he was a Lutheran, and would not hearken to any instructions or advice that our Protestant Minister offer'd him: But being come to the place of Execution, he pray'd for him­self: Three Muskets were fired upon him, which dispatch'd him in an instant. Then his Friends took him and put him in a Coffin, and buried him. The same day two Moors of Volkendal that had been catch'd at Aripen by the Pearl-bank, were soundly whipt, all their cry was Apoi Paring, Apoi Paring in Malabarian, that is to say, Mercy Sirs, Mercy Sirs; at last they hung their Heads on one side, which made me think they were dead; but as soon as the whipping was over, they held up their Heads briskly again. The Executioner rubb'd their wounds afterwards with Pepper and Salt, and they were kept in Fetters, as belonging properly to the Company.

I was now offer'd a Post, which I thought more advantagious, and not expos'd to so much Fatigue, which was to be Overseer of the 12 Clerks belong­to the East India Company: I accepted of it, and entred into the Office on the 1st of December. The Chief of that Office was one Walter Vander Beek. It was open from Seven till Ten in the Morning, and from Two till Six in the Afternoon, all which time there was business enough for the Twelve Clerks.

I Dieted all this while with my long-ear'd Wi­dow, who continu'd asking me why I would not marry: I told her I would have her if she would leave off Oyling her Hair, and let her Ears be clipt into shape; at which she shook her Head, and said in a doleful manner that she would die first.

[Page 339] There was at this time a Jew that had liv'd a considerable time in the House of a Cingulaish No­bleman, and had been very familiar with his Daugh­ter, tho' not Marry'd to her: He had a grievous fit of Sickness, during which she was so faithful and serviceable to him, that he promis'd her Marriage as soon as he should be recover'd. Being got up again, she pursued him to make good his Promise; but the Jew refus'd it out of meer shame of being seen at Church with such a long-ear'd Creature; and told her that was the only reason he could give her for going back from his Word. She, to remedy that, consented to have her Ears cut into better fashion, and had it done accordingly; after which the Jew Marry'd her in Columbo on a Sunday. A little while after he fell Lame, both in his Hands and Feet, and nothing but misfortunes befell him. The cause of all this he imputed wholly to his be­ing turn'd Christian; and look'd upon all as a just Judgment upon him for having forsaken the Jewish Religion: Bitterly Cursing the hour he had ever been Baptized. Another Jew, a Convert likewise, Marry'd at the same time a Black young Gentlewo­man of Malabar, very Rich; but this Marriage proved more happy than the other.

Being occasionally come to treat of Marriages, I will give you some Account how they are perform'd at Columbo.

The Parties being agreed before-hand, the Bride­groom comes, with two or three of his Friends, to the Bride's House, where she is dress'd in fine white Linnen and fine Flowers, to receive him. Her Fa­ther and Mother, if she has any, are to be present there; and so are any two Persons that were at her Baptism. The Certificate being produc'd, the Bride and Bridegroom give one another a Ring; after this they make merry. The next Sunday af­ter it, the Names are publish'd three times in the [Page 340] Church; and the Tuesday after that, they are Mar­ry'd. When they go to Church, they have several Balliators, or Leapers, that go before them Dan­cing all the way. Then goes the Bride between two Women, with a fine Umbrella over her Head; then the Bridegroom between two of his Friends. The Ceremony being ended; when the Bride is come home again, every one in the Room Sprinkles her with Rose-water, and throws an handful of Flowers upon her. Then they have a Wedding-Dinner, which is always given by the Maid's Fa­ther and Mother at their House: When the new Couple are got to Bed, they fall a-beating Drums, Tamelins, and other Instruments, for about an hour; the Balliators all the while Dancing, and making a great noise. The next day they go about a mile or two out of Town, where they have a Dinner at some Publick-House, which is generally given by the two Bride-men.

Any European in Ceylon may marry any Woman he pleases: But if he is in the Dutch Service, the Marriage is not permitted; unless a Testimonial is given of the Woman's being Christen'd, under the Minister's Hand and Seal.

These Women pretend to have a much greater Inclination and Love for a white Man, than for their own Country-men: So that, if there is any Credit to be given to 'em, one might be pretty secure of keeping one's Wife to himself, at least, from a black Rival. But I have known many Instances to the contrary, of Women that have been brought to Bed with black Children, which never happens if a Woman keeps constantly to an European; and several complaints I have known made of this kind to the Ministers. Many indeed choose rather to to take no notice of it, than to expose themselves by making their complaint; but if any brought it to an Examination, and it was either found out or con­fess'd; [Page 341] both she and the Adulterer were severely Whipp'd, and made Slaves of, together with the Brats. There liv'd a Shoe-maker in the Old City of Columbo, that had marry'd a Mastize, (so they call a Woman that hath had a white Father and a black Mother,) her Father and Mother were very honest People, and my great acquaintance; (he was a Brewer of Columbo, and one of the Burghers): The young Couple had not been marry'd above six or seven Months, when a Malabarian, one of the Washers, came as it is usual at Columbo for them to go twice a-week to fetch People's foul Linnen) to this Man's House, and sinding the Woman alone at Home, courted her to comply in his rustical man­ner, promising to Wash her Linnen for nothing. The Woman pretended to like the bargain well enough, but told him she could not for the present do it with safety, but the next opportunity she would grant him his desire. The fellow went home very well satisfy'd with the hopes of his future Enjoy­ment. But when the Shoe-maker came home, his Wife very faithfully tells him all that had passed between them: The Man was not a little glad to find his Wife so virtuous, and desir'd her to admit him in­to the Room, where he design'd to lay wait for him. At the time appointed the Malabarian came, and the Woman, according to promise, gave the signal; upon which the Shoemaker and a Neigh­bour of his came out, each of 'em having a good Club, and fell upon the poor Malabarian, and dis­abl'd him from any such attempts for the future. A short time after this the young Woman dy'd, sup­posed to have been poison'd by some Blacks, for being so faithful to a White.

Their marrying with the Whites is (I am apt to think) generally more out of Policy, and to have the advantage of living more secure and free among [Page 342] the Europeans, who have all the power in their hands, than out of any true love for 'em.

The Women live very lazy Lives; they chaw Betel and smoak Tobacco, all day long; they are very neat, and wash themselves all over every day. The Man hath all the Care of the House upon him; and they have generally two Slaves, the one to go to Market, the other to dress the Victuals.

I will, now I am treating of Columbo, give you some Description of that City.

I have already told you how it was built by the Portuguese; but when the Dutch East-India Com­pany took possession of it, they Demolish'd many parts, and Re-built others after the Dutch man­ner; and to this day they are building at the Ca­stle and City. The Castle hath on the West-side, the Sea; on the North-East, the City; on the South-East, a sweet River: It is fortify'd with several Bulwarks, each of which hath 20 or 30 Guns; a very good Counterscarp; and there are so many Rocks on the Sea-side, that no Ships can come near it.

There is a broad Channel runs all round it, where one may see every day Crocodiles in abundance: It hath three Gates, one to the South-West, call'd Port de Gala; about a Musquet-shot off, on the side that goes to Galture, the Land about it is richly fill'd with Orchards and Gardens, full of fine Fruit-trees, which reach a mile or two: The other Gate is call'd the Delfsche Port, from the Bastion which is just by it, that bears that Name. This Gate is toward the City, and the way to it hath the Sea all along on one side, and a deep Ditch on the o­ther, and a large Field call'd the Buffler's Plain, which they can lay all under Water when they please, by opening a Sluce. The third Gate, which is Northward, hath the Name of Water-Port; on the left side of that is the Water-Pass, guarded by [Page 343] many Cannon, that command all the Ships that lye in the Road. Within the Castle are many pretty Walks of Nut-trees, set in an uniform Order, but they bear no Fruit, only red and white Flowers: The Streets are pleasant walks themselves; having Trees on both sides, and before the Houses. The Castle contains about 40 Acres of Land. The Go­vernor, all the Merchants, Officers, and Soldiers, have their Dwelling within it; and without the Walls, between them and the Sea, are the Huts, where near four thousand Slaves, belonging to the Company, lye at night. They are of different Na­tions, and are constantly kept at work: Their Huts are very little, made up with nothing but Straw and Leaves. There are Dutch-men to look over 'em, who are call'd Mucadons; each of these have 70, 80, 90, or 100 to oversee, and must give an account of 'em.

There is likewise a very large place for Ammu­nition, two strong Cellars for Gun-powder, and Magazines for the Merchants, and a Church; and behind that, a very fine Stable, commonly full of Persian Horses. There is also a Powder Wind-mill by Port de Gala, and by the Water-Pass, a Wind-mill to saw Boards, &c. The City of Columbo is much larger than the Castle, by reason of the large Trees and Gardens that are in it; and it is very well fortify'd with five Bulwarks, call'd, Victoria, Con­stantia, Concordia, Haerlem, and Euckhuysen. It hath on the North the Road where the Ships lye; on the other side the River that is full of Crocodiles. It hath three Gates, the one (as I said just now) is call'd the Delfsche-Port, the second is not far from that, and goes toward the Sea; the third is the Port-Victoria, or Negumbo.

The Inhabitants are a mixture of Officers, Soldiers, Burghers, and Tradesmen, Blacks and Whites, and others: For which reason the Hol­landers [Page 344] are oblig'd to keep a careful watch every night. The Streets are always very clean, tho' it Rain never so much. There is an Hospital for the Dutch, very well provided with able Surgeons, and they with very good Medicines, and Slaves allow'd them. The chief Doctor, that had the Care of it in my time, was in very ill Repute for his ill Ma­nagement of those that came under his Hands, and for several ill Actions he was accus'd of; and, a­mongst others, of having a pretty while been too familiar with a Slave of his, and then Killing of her, and Burying her in his Garden.

Not far from that is an Hospital for Dutch Or­phans: The Boys are taught to Read and Write; after that they are made either Drummers or Sol­diers: The Girls, besides Reading and Writing, are taught to Sew, or any other Employment pro­per to their Sex; and there they are kept to work till some-body comes to marry 'em, which com­monly happens by that time they are 12 or 13 years of Age.

The Dutch Church-yard is in the middle of the City, enclos'd with a Wall, on which a Malabarian School stands: On the out-side of the Church-yard, there is Sold, all the Week long, Silks, Stuffs, and Linnen, by the Moors and Persians; and all sorts of Fruits, dry'd Fish, Onions, Sugar and Rice, by the Malabarians, Maldivians, and Cingulayans, and other Inhabitants of Columbo.

CHAP. IX.

IN the Year 1680, We had three unlucky Ac­cidents: The one was, That a Ship being come from Holland by Batavia, and lying at Anchor in the Road near Columbo; it had brought a great quantity of Gun-Powder for the use of this City; the Inhabitants thereof had already loaded their Boats with 80 Barrels of it, and were so near Land, that they prepar'd for haling of it to shore: A Boy, belonging to the Master of the Boat, stood smoaking with a Pipe in his Mouth; which the Ma­ster seeing, gave him such a box on the Ear, that he dash'd his Pipe into the next Boat, where some Powder being scatter'd, took Fire, and blew up that Boat, and, in the twinkling of an Eye, the [Page 346] two next; and not only so, but also, all the People that stood upon the shore had a toss in the Air.

Another was, That two Ships lying at Anchor in the Road, and the Wind growing very violent, broke their Cables, and stranded them against the Fish-market; but all the Men saved their Lives.

The 9th of December, Two great Ships call'd the Africa, and the Cortegeene, came from Persia.

Having now staid seven months over and above the five years I was oblig'd to, in the Service of the East-India Company, I design'd to have gone off with those Ships, but the Governor refus'd to discharge me for that time, under pretence of af­fection to me.

They sail'd away on the 10th from Columbo to the City Punt de Gala, to take in Pepper and Cinna­mon. I made my complaint that I was detain'd wholly against my will, to the chief Merchant of the Company; he told me I should go, and that I should stay but some days; that a Vessel was daily expected to come from Bengal, and was to take up several other Persons here, and then to go for our Country.

The 11th, News came from Punt de Gala, by Land, that the said Vessel was come in there from Bengal, well loaded with Salt-peter, but had no Masts left.

On the 12th, Some Carpenters and three Masts were sent in a small Vessel to refit the Ship, and get it ready to go with the two others for Hol­land.

The 14th, I went to the Aldee or Village, call'd Batalamulo, two miles from Columbo, where I took my leave of our General Dissave Tennekool (that was come over to us from the King of Candi.) He entertain'd me very civilly at Dinner, and order'd four Cingulayans to carry me back in a Palankin, [Page 347] to Columbo, and presented me with 200 preserv'd Citrons for my Voyage.

The 15th, My Captain invited me at night to a very handsom Supper.

On the 16th, A very rich Portuguese, call'd Don de Pairo, living at Matual, a league from Columbo, sent an Elephant for me to come to his House, where he receiv'd me with a noble Entertainment of Mu­sick, and a splendid Feast: I spent that night with him; during which he used a great deal of Rhe­toric to perswade me to stay, and ask'd me, why I would venture so hazardous a Voyage, seeing I liv'd so pleasantly there, and so much belov'd in that Country; but all this was in vain: My Incli­nations for my own Country were to me the most prevailing Arguments.

On the 17th, I took my leave of him, and thank'd him very heartily; and he lent me an Elephant to carry me back.

On the 18th, I took my leave of my Friends at the Office at Columbo, and

On the 19th, My Landlady invited me, with some others of her Friends and Acquaintance: She seem'd very much discontented with my leaving of her thus, yet would shew her self kind to the last; and presented me with abundance of Fruit and Spi­ces: But when I came to Sea, I threw all over­board, for fear some trick or philter should have been play'd with them, which is usual here.

The 20th, The Governor sent us word, that we should get us all ready to go aboard that night; about four of the Clock in the afternoon, we went on board, and took all our Goods with us. Our Ship was but small, yet it had four Pieces of Can­non, twelve Seamen, besides the Master, and the Steersman. Our Maker was one Cornelius Erasmus, a Jutlander, a true Pitcherman, who staid at Co­lumbo to take his leave of his Wife, and Friends; [Page 348] his Wife was a Papist when I knew her first, but he was a Lutheran. While I was at Columbo, I took a great deal of pains to convert her, and at last ef­fected it; but I believe she only embrac'd Luther's faith because it was her Husband's: I thought however she had chang'd somewhat for the better; and I believe if I had staid, I might still have advis'd her better. She had a Sister, one of the prettiest Wo­men I almost ever saw; at least, the finest that e­ver was in that Country. She was a white Wo­man, and her Mother was a Babylonian. The dress she went in was a great disadvantage to her Beau­ty, being the same dress as I describ'd before, when I spoke of the Habit my long-ear'd Widow used to wear.

Being oblig'd to lye still here till the 21th to stay for Letters, I went in a Fisher-boat to Columbo to our Master's House, where he was making very mer­ry, having staid a while, he took his leave of his Wife and Sister, who were very much griev'd at his de­parture; but they little thought it was their last farewel, as it prov'd the next day; for, being got into the Ship, and having weigh'd Anchor, we sett sail. The Wind toward night grew something boysterous; and as we came within a mile of Punt de Gala, our Ship, by the carelessness of the Master, and Steersman, who were carrousing in the Cab­bin, struck upon a great Rock, call'd the Whale (which is but just cover'd over with Water) and sprung a large Leak, which made the Ship be­gin immediately to sink. The Master hearing the knock, and being sensible of the Danger, came out to give orders, and cry'd out we should turn the Ship about; but it was too late to give Directions; so we prepar'd our selves for swimming; and I stripp'd my self to my Drawers, and with several others I leap'd into the Sea; we guess'd by the scum where-abouts the shore was; we made that [Page 349] way, and in less than half an hour we reach'd the Land: We were fifteen of us that sav'd our selves by swimming; the rest, being the Master, the Steersman, and ten others, were all drown'd.

We went to the first House we saw, which be­long'd to a Cingulaish Nobleman, who receiv'd us very kindly, had a great Fire made for us, and gave us all the refreshment his House did af­ford.

The 23th, In the morning we came before the Town of Punt de Gala. The Serjeants, Corporals, and Soldiers that kept the Guard, were mov'd with Compassion; and, before we went any further, gave every one of us some old Garments to cover our Nakedness; After this we were brought before the Governor, who examin'd us all, to know who was to blame for this miscarriage. The Master was in all the fault we told him, but he had his Punishment already. The Governor order'd every one of us to have 12 Rixdollars paid us to equip our selves again, which was to be abated in our Accompts. Six of the Men that came from Colum­bo with me would not venture to Sea again; so they engag'd themselves a-new for three years, in the service of the Company; their Pay was augmented with two Guldens a month, and they were now to have twelve Guldens, whereas they used to have but ten. Orders were given to a Serjeant to take twelve men with him to go that very morning and see if they could recover any thing of our Ship­wrack. I went thither my self in the afternoon, and saw a great many pieces of the Ship, and pie­ces of Chests a-shore: But I shrewdly suspected that they were broke by the Soldiers, and that they had bury'd the Goods under Ground.

The 14th, Some of the Men that were drown'd were drove upon the Land; the rest, I suppose, had feasted the Sharks, that are there in abundance.

[Page 350] The 25th, I went on board the Wester-Amstel, and gave my Pass to the Master of it. The form of it was thus: To N. N. Master of the Ship, call'd the Wester-Amstel; You may receive on board the Bea­rer hereof, Christopher Schewitzer, with his Goods, to go with you into Holland.

My Ship did not at all please me, for I saw it was very Old, and besides that, very small, and mighty slow in sailing. The Carpenters, &c. were busie in mending of it: In the mean while I went to shore again, and staid at Punto de Gala, till the Ships were all ready, and there I took my provi­sions. This Fort, by what I saw of it, is stronger than that of Columbo.

The 5th of January, 1682, All our loading was compleat; it consisted of Pepper, Cinnamon, Lin­nen, and Silk-stuffs, from China and Bengal.

On the 13th, An Officer came to take a view of all the Passengers.

The 14th, We hoisted up Sail all together, with a direct Wind for us at S. E. The Cortgeene being the biggest Ship, was our Commadore, or Admiral. We fir'd all our Cannon: The like was done in re­turn all round Punto de Gala.

The 15th, We kept a Fast in our Ship, to beg God's assistance in our Voyage; all the Dutch Ci­ties in Ceylon did the same.

The 16th, The Masters of our Ships met in the Cortgeene to advise and resolve upon their signal, in case of their needing one another's assistance; and upon the Watch-word, and ordering of their Lan­thorns in the night-time.

The two large Ships sail'd away briskly, but ours went very slowly; towards night they took in some of their Sails, that we might come up to them.

We had in our Ship, the Master, three Surgeons (one of which always read Prayers) some Officers, [Page 351] 12 Soldiers, 24 Seamen, all together made 56 men. The two other Ships had each of 'em 150. We had besides a great many Animals on Board, viz. Two Parrots, two Apes, two Cacadus of Amboina, (they are white Birds as big as Pigeons, with a tust on their Heads, and apter to learn to talk than the Parrots;) we had a Crocodile an Ell long, a Stag from Bengal: All these dyed in two months time, except the two Apes. We had likewise fifty Hogs from Bengal, and two or three dozen of Ducks for refreshment now and then. Our otherProvisions were 60 Barrels of Water, 6 Barrels of Salt Pork, 6 of other Flesh, 6 Barrels of Indian Brandy, and Rice enough. Our Ship was loaded at bottom with old broken pieces of Cannon instead of Ballast, then with Salt-Peter, then with 200 Lasts of Cinnamon and Pepper; and at top of all there were 250 great Bales of Silks and Linnen.

We kept altogether without storms, or bad wea­ther till the 28th of April.

We were then near the Coasts of Africa; but a thick Fog came upon us, and the Wind changing at South West, blew us in one day and two nights 50 miles from Land; after which it changed to the East by which means we came,

On the 30th, in sight of Tasel-bergh, Lewen-bergh, and Duyvels-bergh.

The 1st of May, We came to the Cape of good Hope: There we found the Ships that were come from Batavia, that had lain there seven Weeks stay­ing for us: There were five of them, four large Vessels, and one Fisher-boat, call'd the Postborn. On board the Admiral, call'd the Landschowen, that had a very fine gilt Stern, was the Old Heer Rycloff van Goens, heretofore the General over the East-India Forces. They told us that they had suf­fer'd much in the Latitude of St. Morrice by a [Page 352] storm, which had wholly disabled the Middleburgh, but that she was since almost resitted.

We lay there still seven days longer, and in that time took in fresh Water, Wood, Turnips, Herbs, Cabbage, Sheep, and Goats. Min Heer Rycloff van Goens, with all his Retinue, lodg'd all that while at the Governor's in the Fort. His Retinue was very magnificent; having several Gentlemen to wait on him, a Trumpeter, 12 Men for his Guard, all dress'd very fine in yellow, with silver Buttons, and red Breeches, and a great many Slaves from Bengal. I lay at a Dutch Countryman's House un­der the Devil's Hill; he was forc'd to keep seve­ral Hottentots, and great Dogs, to secure his Vin­yards and other Grounds from the Wild Beasts.

The 2d, A Ship came and lay amongst ours in the Road; she put out white Flags and Pendants. The Men on board of her gave out that they were French Merchants. But at night a Seaman comes swimming to our Admiral by the Moon-shine, and discovers what they were. He told 'em that they were French Pyrates, richly loaded with the booty they had got along the Arabian Coasts: For his own part they carry'd him away by force out of Persia, and used him as a Slave every since; and he begg'd that we would receive him, and carry him into Holland. In the morning early the Pyrates mis­sing this fellow hasted away, two of our best Ships were order'd to go after them, but they could ne­ver come near them.

The 8th, The Admiral went on board with all his Retinue, only he left his Wife behind him; for what Reason we could not learn.

The 9th, Early in the morning, we hoisted up sail and weigh'd Anchors. The Wind was very good for us at South-East; and we went by the Zee Honden or Banditen Island.

[Page 353] One the 10th, We kept a day of Fasting and Hu­miliation.

On the 11th, There was a meeting of all the Masters, &c. to agree all of us upon certain signals to be given amongst us either by shooting, lighting Fires, or hanging out of Flags, &c.

From the 12th to the 16th, We had very uncer­tain Winds, and little for us. At that time we had several North-Capers about our Ships. They are a large sort of Fish almost like a Whale. We held our course Westward and by South.

The 17th, We came into the Trade-winds, which blow constantly at North and West. We made directly toward the Island of St. Helens, to be in­form'd there in what posture Affairs stood in Europe.

The 20th of June, We came in sight of that Island; and being come on one side of it, where the English had a Fort, we order'd the Posthorn to sail close by that Fort, to give them notice that we were Dutch, and came thither upon no other de­sign than to ask some News about Europe. They an­swer'd us that it was a general Peace every where at Sea. Upon which we very joyfully fired all our Can­non, which was all answer'd from the English Fort. We kept on in our course West aud by North; the Winds still continuing; and we left St. Helens on the left hand of us.

The 22th of July, We came under the Line, and very happily pass'd it, and lost but two Men, both of 'em Soldiers.

The 23th at night, We saw again the Northern Star to our great Joy; till then we had only the Southern Cross in sight, which is a Con­stellation

of four Stars, which stand in this Order.

[Page 354] The 24th we met a Spanish Ship that had a great many Women on Board, who were sent into the West-Indies to People them: She was afraid of us, and would have escaped, but our Admiral soon fetch'd her back again.

The 25th we met an English Ship that had but one Mast, she was Laden with Tobacco from Brasil; we Barter'd with them, and gave a good quantity of Spices, Silks, Stuffs, and Linnen, for their Tobacco; but we were glad we could have it on any account. I for my part gave a great deal of Pepper and Cinnamon for half a pound of it.

The 26th, 27th, and 28th the Englishman kept by us, but on the 22th he left us with wonderful swiftness, and got out of sight immediately.

The 30th a great many flying Fishes fell down in our Ship, some of which we Eat, and the rest we kept for a Rarity.

The 31st abundance of Sea-hogs came through our Fleet, Swimming against the Wind. Our Gunner shot one of them with an Elligar which is an Instrument that sticks in the Fish it hits: it hath a Leaden weight at the But-end, which makes that end sink, and with the other it turns up the Fish: As soon as that one was made to bleed, all the others made away. That which we catch'd was Seven Foot long, and half that in compass; It was perfect Bacon, and had a deal of warm Blood.

The 1st of August we went directly North­ward; the Wind was at South-West, and blew very cold. The Days were long, so that we rested more by Day than by Night.

The 2d, 3d, 4th, 5th, 6th, and 7th we had much Rain, with which we filled our Water-Barrels; the Wind too being something boiste­rous, parted us: Our Vessel was just going to Founder, and began to gape in some places half [Page 355] a. Foot Wide. The Carpenters fell to Work, and were forced to bind up the Cracks and Chinks with Cords, Iron Bands, and Chains; and by our continual Pumping, we made shift to keep the Ship up.

On the 8th we were forced to take in all our Sails, and let our Ship Drive; two Waves struck into our Ship which would have certain­ly Sunk us, had not God's Mercy, together with our extream Diligence, happily freed us from the Danger.

We were at that time by our selves, without either Friend or Foe near us. Our Cook had for some Days not been able to Dress us any Vi­ctuals for the Tossing and Tumbling in our Ship, so that we were forced to Eat Bacon that came from Bengal Raw, and afterwards help the Dige­stion of it with Indian Brandy, of which we had good store.

The 9th we heard several great Pieces of Can­non Fired, but could not tell for what: In the Afternoon about two a Clock, we saw at our Right Hand a large Ship; we found it was our Vice Admiral, and perceived by the Pendants that it was in danger of Sinking. We both en­deavoured to get up to one another, and the Ad­miral being come within reach of us, the Men on Board begg'd that we would send our Long-Boat to help them.

They kept still Calling, Bawling, and Firing, whilst we were advising whether we had best joyn them, or keep off▪ For if they, being an Hundred and Fifty in Number, had all come over to us, we must have starved; yet we de­signed to be ready to take up as many as we could if their Ship had sunk: At last we re­solved [Page 356] that our Master, a very skilful Seaman should go to them, to see what condition they were in, and to give them his Advice. When he was come unto them, he advised rhem to throw Over-board some of their Goods, as they designed to do before: So they unloaded the Vessel of near Four Hundred Lasts of Spices, as Cinnamon; Cloves, Nutmegs, Pepper, &c, by which means they could come to stop the Leak, and so at last they saved themselves. The Pepper being scattered about, got into their Pumps, so that they could not use them; the same thing hath often happened with us too.

The 10th, and 11th, These Stormy Winds a­bated. We began now to find it colder and colder, and the Fogs to rise again. In those two days all our Fleet, except the Posthorn, met a­gain.

The 12th, 13th, and 14th, The Fog was so very thick, that we could not see one another, but were forced to Fire often, to know where we were all of us, that we might keep together.

The 15th, we met with an English Fisherman that was coming from Ysland; he was loaden with Salt-fish: We truck'd with him for some of it.

The 16th, we passed by two Dutch Vessels go­ing home from the Whale-fishing in Greenland. Of these we got some Cheese, Bisket, and To­bacco for Spices. One of them had catch'd ten Whales and the other Eleven, which is reckoned a good Voyage. The Men were very Lusty and Healthy, but we look'd all like Death, being almost quite spent and worn out with the labour and trouble, our great danger had put us to. Being come now into the Latitude of Sixty one [Page 357] Degrees, 7 Minutes: We turned to the North North-East.

The 17th, Some Dutch Men of War came to meet us, with another Ship that brought Pro­visions for our East-India Fleet, and accompani­ed us back.

The 18th in the Morning we came in sight of Hitland, and kept as much as we could to­wards the English Shoar, according to the Or­ders we had received from the States of Hol­land, least any Winds might have drove us into some ports of Norway, especially because the States were at that time at Variance with the King of Denmark: So we held to the North-East, and East-North-East, till

The 1st of September, when we came in sight of the Dutch Coasts. Two of our Company struck off the day before to go to Zeland. There came Pilots for each of our Ships, who brought us safe through the Tonnen in the Vlic. Here were two of the chief Men of the East-India Com­pany in a Yatch, expecting of us, they wel­comed us all, and thanked us for the Faithful Service we had done them. They took as many of us as would go, to Amsterdam; but our Chests and Goods we were to leave behind us in the Ships.

On the 2d of September we came to Amster­dam. We were from the 14th of January to this time coming from Ceylon; which is Three Thousand one Hundred Miles in Two Hun­dred and Thirty Two Days.

The same Day our Chests and Beds, &c. were brought into the East-India House, and there searched by Men for that purpose. If nothing Prohibited, or worth above Two Month's Pay was found in them, it was Delivered straight-way [Page 358] to the Owner, otherwise it was Seized, and Consiscated to the Searcher, and the Owner either Fined, or sent perhaps to the Rasphuys (the same as Bridewell here).

The 3d I gave up my Accounts to the East-India Company.